DeviceSupervisor Agent User's Manual

DeviceSupervisor Agent User's Manual

DeviceSupervisor Agent

User's Manual

(Applicable for IG & EC)

Based on device_supervisor V3.1.10, August 2024

www.inhand.com

The software described in this manual is according to the license agreement, can only be used in accordance with the terms of the agreement.

Copyright Notice

© 2024 InHand Networks All rights reserved.

Trademarks

The InHand logo is a registered trademark of InHand Networks.

All other trademarks or registered trademarks in this manual belong to their respective manufacturers.

Disclaimer

The company reserves the right to change this manual, and the products are subject to subsequent changes without prior notice. 9. We shall not be responsible for any direct, indirect, intentional or unintentional damage or hidden trouble caused by improper installation or use.


Getting Started

1.Introduction

1.1 Overview

DeviceSupervisor Agent (hereinafter referred to as DSA) is an industrial edge gateway software running on the gateway, providing convenient data acquisition, data processing, data to the cloud and protocol conversion. It is mainly deployed in industrial sites to achieve industrial equipment communication and industrial bus protocol acquisition, industrial system data integration, edge data filtering and analysis, as well as industrial IoT platform docking and integration, etc. It provides low-latency data access management and intelligent analysis services for industrial scenarios, helping users to quickly analyse business trends and improve operational efficiency and sustainability.

1.2 Product Advantages

  1. Rich southbound acquisition protocols

Provides data acquisition services to meet various industrial scenarios, real-time data acquisition and unified access for PLC, CNC, robot, Scada and intelligent instrumentation, etc. These acquisition services are widely used in building automation, CNC machine tools, robotics, electric power, and various PLC communications.

  1. Various protocol conversion functions

It supports to convert the data collected in the south direction to a specified industrial protocol, and then for the host computer or Scada software to collect, which is good to avoid the complexity of the collection problems caused by the diversity of industrial field protocols.

  1. Platform integration

It supports connecting to mainstream industrial IoT cloud platforms and integrating data into local data centres, industrial internet platforms or cloud services by interfacing with standard MQTT, MQTT SparkPlugB, AliCloud IOT, AWS IOT, Azure IOT and so on.

  1. Lightweight and flexible configuration

It has the characteristics of lightweight and low memory consumption; it can be installed or uninstalled in the form of APP (plug-in on EC products), which is easy to manage, and it can be used to meet various scenarios by modifying the DSA configuration.

  1. Edge Measurement Intelligent Analytics

Within DSA, it supports the addition of fast function scripts to handle edge measurement data processing; "publish" scripts can report the data to the platform after filtering and format conversion, "subscribe" scripts can handle the platform's control of the site, and "custom fast function" scripts can handle edge measurement data management and intelligent analysis.

1.3 List of functions

Function

Descriptions

Southbound data collection

Support nearly 100 kinds of industrial protocols for one-stop connection, data acquisition and device reverse control function. For the list of protocols, see "Southbound Acquisition Protocol List" below.

Realtime Communication Message viewing and downloading

The Southbound Controller supports online viewing and downloading of real-time communication messages, which can help users and O&M personnel quickly locate Southbound acquisition problems.

Historical data

In order to facilitate users to do data analysis and intelligent management at the cloud platform or the edge of the gateway, the collected data are supported to be saved in the database at the gateway at a specified frequency, so as to facilitate the analysis and processing of historical data.

Alarm handling

By setting the alarm rules, when the data reaches a certain threshold actively push the alarm message, the user can sense the abnormal situation on the scene in time.

Northbound Cloud Services

Supports the transmission of collected data via MQTT to mainstream IoT cloud platforms, as well as IoT cloud platforms provided by Enigma. For the list of protocols, please refer to "Northbound Cloud Service List" below.

Northbound protocol conversion

This function allows you to use the gateway as a protocol conversion gateway, and flexibly configure the acquisition points that need to be converted. For a list of protocols, see "Northbound Protocol Conversion List" below.

Fast Function Scripts

Data can be formatted and processed, and analysed and processed at the edge.

Third-party library management (IG Gateway support only)

Third-party libraries that need to be used are packaged and imported and installed at the gateway, and can be referenced in fast function scripts.

Protocol Name

Interface Type

note

EtherNet/IP (CompactLogix)

Ethernet

Docking with Rockwell Series PLCs

EtherNet/IP (Micro)

Ethernet

-

EtherNet/IP (MicroLogix)

Ethernet

-

EtherNet/IP (Unconnected)

Ethernet

-

*SLC Net

Ethernet

-

*ADS

Ethernet

Docking with Beckhoff series PLCs

CJT188-2004

Serial port

Docking with CJT188 Water Meter

Delta TCP

Ethernet

Docking with Delta Series PLCs

Delta Serial

Serial port

-

Delta Serial ASCII

Serial port

-

Delta Serial over TCP

Ethernet

-

*Euromap-63

-

Docking with injection moulding machines by means of FTP service

FATEK Programe Port (Programming Port)

Serial port

Docking with FATEK PLCs

FATEK Programe Port over TCP

Ethernet

-

*SPB

Serial port

Docking with Fuji PLCs

*SPB over TCP

Ethernet

-

*SPH Net

Ethernet

-

*SRTP

Ethernet

Docking with General Electric PLCs

*INOVANCE Serial

Serial port

Docking with Inovance PLC 

*INOVANCE TCP

Ethernet

-

*INOVANCE Serial over TCP

Ethernet

-

KEBA Socket

Ethernet

Docking with KEBA Controller

*KEYENCE MC 3E

Ethernet

Docking with Keyence PLCs

*Nano

Serial port

-

*Nano over TCP

Ethernet

-

Modbus ASCII

Serial port

Interfaces with all types of PLCs with Modbus protocol

Modbus RTU

Serial port

-

Modbus RTU over TCP

Ethernet

-

Modbus TCP

Ethernet

-

Modbus RTU Slave

Serial port

-

*FX Links

Serial port

Docking with Mitsubishi PLCs

*FX Links over TCP

Ethernet

-

*FX Serial over TCP

Ethernet

-

MC 1E

Ethernet

-

MC 3E

Ethernet

-

MC 3C

Serial port

-

MC 3C over TCP

Ethernet

-

*MC R

Ethernet

-

MITSUBISHI Programe Port (Programming Port)

Serial port

-

*C-Mode

Serial port

Docking with Omron PLCs

*C-Mode over TCP

Ethernet

-

EtherNet/IP (CompactLogix)

Ethernet

-

EtherNet/IP (Unconnected)

Ethernet

-

FINS TCP

Ethernet

-

FINS UDP

Ethernet

-

HostLink

Serial port

-

*HostLink over TCP

Ethernet

-

OPC DA

Ethernet

To collect OPCDA data from PC, you need to install OpenOpc software on PC.

OPC DA

Ethernet

-

*OPC UA PUBSUB

Ethernet

-

Mewtocol

Serial port

Docking with Panasonic PLCs

*Mewtocol over TCP

Ethernet

-

*Panasonic MC 3E

Ethernet

-

*Fetch/Write

Ethernet

-

ISO on TCP

Ethernet

Connecting PLCs of Siemens S200, S200smart, S1200, S1500 models

PPI

Serial port

-

*PPI over TCP

Ethernet

-

*WebApi

Ethernet

-

*VIGOR Serial

Serial port

Docking with VIGOR PLCs

*VIGOR Serial over TCP

Ethernet

-

*XINJE TCP (dedicated)

Ethernet

Docking with Xinjie PLCs

*XINJE TCP (Modbus)

Ethernet

-

*XINJE Serial

Serial port

-

*XINJE Serial over TCP

Ethernet

-

*Link TCP

Ethernet

Docking with Yokogawa PLCs


Electric power protocol

Protocol Name

Interface Type

note

DLT645-1997

Serial port

Chinese standards for electric power meters

DLT645-2007

Serial port

Chinese standards for electric power meters

DLT645-2007 over TCP

Ethernet

Chinese standards for electric power meters

*DLT698

Serial port

-

DNP3 TCP

Ethernet

-

DNP3 UDP

Ethernet

-

DNP3 RTU

Serial port

-

IEC 101

Serial port

-

IEC 103 (NR Electric)

Serial port

NR Electric

IEC 104

Ethernet

-

IEC61850
Ethernet
-






As shown in the figure above, DSA is mainly divided into functional modules such as southbound data acquisition, DataHub data processing, fast function processing module, northbound protocol conversion and northbound cloud service.

 Southbound data collection:

Support mainstream industrial protocols, power protocols, building protocols and environmental protection protocols for data acquisition, including Modbus, OPC UA, EtherNet/IP, IEC104, BACnet, Siemens PLC, Mitsubishi PLC and so on. It meets the data acquisition access requirements of various industries such as intelligent manufacturing, petroleum and petrochemical, iron and steel metallurgy, energy and power, and building automation.

DataHub Data Processing:

Receives southbound acquisition data and generates northbound messages and remote bus messages, stores acquired data in a historical database, and handles alarm messages.

Fast function processing module:

QuickFaaS is a lightweight FaaS (Function as a Service) that allows the user to customise a function for handling bus messages or events.

Northbound protocol conversion:

Receive measurement point data from the southbound message bus and convert it to some protocol specified in the northbound direction.

Northbound Cloud Services:

Receive messages from remote message buses and forward them to cloud connections; receive remote subscription requests and forward them to remote message buses; support offline data storage.

3 Installation

3.1 Hardware Wiring

Turn on the power to the gateway and connect the IG gateway to the PLC according to the topology using an Ethernet cable/serial cable.(The topology diagrams for the EC and IG series are the same, using the IG502 as an example.)


The wiring instructions for the IG502 serial port are as follows:


For details about the default IP address of the InGateway network port, see the IP address information on the nameplate. In order for the InGateway to access the Ethernet PLC through the network port, the network port must be in the same network segment as the PLC.

3.2 Software environment preparation

3.2.1 EC Series

When using DSA, the firmware version should be 'V2.0.10' or later for the EC942 and 'V2.0.1' or later for the EC312

Update the firmware version as shown in the figure (the firmware version will take effect after the firmware version is restarted):


3.3.2 IG Series

When using DSA, the SDK version should be py3sdk-V1.4.5 or later. Please refer to the table for the minimum firmware version requirements:

IG Series

The firmware version number of the lowest legacy naming convention

The firmware version number of the minimum new version of the naming convention

IG974

V2.0.0.r14106

V2.0.3

IG902

V2.0.0.r14047

V2.0.3

IG532

V2.0.0.r14238

V2.0.1

IG504

none

V2.0.5

IG502

V2.0.0.r14045

V2.0.5



Update the firmware version as shown in the image:


Update the SDK as shown in the image:


3.3 Install and run DSA

3.3.1 EC series

3.3.1.1 Installation and Running of DSA

Please refer to the following procedure to install and run DSA in EC series:

Click the "Add" button and select the DSA package file to be installed, then click Confirm.


After a successful import, you can view the imported App as shown in the following diagram:


3.3.1.2 Updating the DSA configuration file

If the installed App supports modifying the runtime method by importing a configuration file, you can follow the process below to update the App's runtime configuration: 


After a successful import, it will run according to the imported configuration file.


3.3.1.3 Updating the DSA version

To update the DSA version simply import the new version of the DSA package on the following page as shown below:


After the update is completed, it will appear as shown below:


3.3.1.4 View/Download Logs

View/download the logs during the DSA run in the screen shown:


After selecting the log level in "Level", logs lower than this level will not be displayed and saved. Log level sorting: ERROR>WARN>INFO>DEBUG>All.

To download the log, click the "Download" button.

3.3.2 IG Series

3.3.2.1 Installation and operation of the DSA

Refer to the following procedure to install and run DSA in IG Series:

You need to ensure that the Python SDK is installed and the Python Edge Engine is enabled before installing the DSA, as shown below:


Click the "Add" button and select the App package file you need to install, then click confirm.


After a successful import, you can view the imported DSA as shown in the diagram below:


Check the “Enable” box to run the App.


Once enabled, the App will run on IG series products and automatically run every time the device is powered on.


3.3.2.2 Updating the DSA configuration file

If you need to update the global configuration file of the DSA, you can refer to the following procedure:


Restart the DSA after a successful import and it will run according to the imported configuration file after the restart is complete.


3.3.2.3 Update the version of DSA

To update the version of DSA, you typically only need to import the new version of the App.


After the update is completed, the interface will appear as shown in the diagram below:


3.3.2.4 View/Download Logs

View/download the logs during the running of the DSA in the interface as shown:


After setting the log level, logs higher than this level will be displayed and saved. The log level is set in the Parameter Settings interface, and the log level is sorted: ERROR>WARN>INFO>DEBUG.



4. Quick start

This tutorial takes the Modbus TCP protocol as an example to get a quick start on the simple and practicalities of using the DSA to capture ModRSsim2 analogue device data and upload the data directly to the EMQX MQTT public cloud service and convert it to Modbus TCP slaves for Modbus poll collection, as well as edge measurement data processing. The overall flow of the configuration is shown below:


4.1 Install Modbus Simulator

The tutorial uses ModRSsim2 as the Modbus TCP Slave. Run the ModRSsim2.exe software and configure the port number as shown in the diagram:



4.2 Southbound Acquisition Configuration

4.2.1 Configuring the Southbound Controller

After running device_supervisor, add a southbound controller. In the controller protocol, select the Modbus TCP protocol and configure the relevant parameters.



  1. Name: Controller name, for example: Modbus TCP
  1. Controller Protocol: Select Modbus TCP
  1. IP Address: Fill in the IP address of the PC where the Modbus simulator is installed;
  1. Port Number: Default port 502;
  1. Slave Address: Default is 1


4.2.2 Add Measuring Point

In the list of measuring points, add the device measuring points needed for collection and configure the measuring point's name, address, data type, etc., as shown in the diagram below: 



Once configured, click “Confirm” to add the measuring points. After creating the measuring points, wait a few seconds; if the controller connection status is still disconnected, perform the following actions to find the reason:

  1. The IP address, port number, and slave were correct when the controller was created;
  2. Check if the gateway can access the IP and port of the simulator.

4.3 Viewing Acquisition Data

After the southbound acquisition configuration is complete, you can see the status and acquisition data of the controller and the measurement point in the measurement point monitoring page, as shown in the following figure:


4.4 Northbound Cloud Service Configuration

4.4.1 Configuring the MQTT Cloud Service

Enable the MQTT cloud service and configure the server address, MQTT client ID, port number, and other parameters as shown in the diagram:



  1. Server Address: MQTT server address, for example, EMQX MQTT public cloud server address broker.emqx.io
  1. Client ID: Custom client ID, which is the unique identifier for connecting to the server.
  1. Port Number: MQTT server port number, for example, EMQX MQTT public cloud server port 1883

Once configured, click submit and wait a few seconds. The MQTT connection status should be visible in the status bar as connected successfully. If it constantly shows as connecting, perform the following actions to find the reason:
  1. Check if the device can access the Internet;
  2. Check if the server address and port and other configuration information are correct.

If the connection drops after a while, check if the MQTT client ID has been used, or consider changing the client ID.

4.4.2 Configure MQTT Publish/Subscribe Scripts

After the MQTT connection is successful, add a publishing script as shown below:


  1. Name: Custom publishing script name
  1. Trigger Source Type: For example, select "Measuring Point Group"
  1. Group/Label: Select the group where the measuring point is located. The example uses the default group.
  1. Topic: Publish topic, the example uses inhand_pub
  1. Qos(MQTT): supports 0, 1, 2
  1. QuickFunction: Just use the default

As shown in the figure below, add a subscription script:



  1. Name: Custom publishing script name
  1. Topic: Publish topic, the example uses inhand_pub
  1. Qos(MQTT): supports 1
  1. Payload type: Select Plaintext in the tutorial
  1. QuickFunction:
# Enter your python code.
import json
from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.measure import write_plc_values


def write_callback(message, userdata):
    logger.debug("write plc response: %s, userdata:%s" % (message, userdata))


def main(topic, payload, cloudName):
    logger.debug("subscribe topic: %s, payload: %s, cloudName: %s" % (topic, payload, cloudName))
    write_plc_values(message=json.loads(payload), callback=write_callback, userdata="")

4.5View data/write values on EMQX public cloud client

The tutorial uses the client tool provided by the EMQX official website to connect to the public EMQX broker to view the data uploaded by the gateway to the MQTT Broker.

On the EMQX official website (https://www.emqx.com/en/mqtt/public-mqtt5-broker), choose to use the MQTT client tool online for testing

Click "New Connection" in the pop-up window that opens. After filling in the Name field in the pop-up interface, the rest of the configuration does not need to be modified. Finally, click "Connect".


In the MQTT client, write the value of the simulator collected by the gateway, as shown in the following figure, modify the value of the measurement point "WORD" collected by the gateway to 10, Paylaod:{"WORD": 10}

4.6 Northbound Protocol Conversion Configuration

4.6.1 Configuring the Modbus TCP Slave

Click Protocol Conversion, find the Modbus TCP Slave menu bar, select "Configuration", set the information and submit. As shown in the figure below:


4.6.2 Configuring the Modbus Mapping Table

Adopt the default slave address 1, click "Batch Add", set the starting mapping address, select the measurement point under the corresponding controller and click submit, as shown in the following figure:


When the addition is complete, it is shown in the following figure:


The Mapped Address column shows the register address information for the corresponding measurement point.

4.7 Collecting Gateway Data with Modbus Poll

Use Modbus Poll software as Master to collect the data from the gateway, set the connection information to the IP address and port number of the gateway, the slave address is set to 1, the start address of the register read is 40001, and the length of the register is 4, as shown in the following figure:


The data read after successful setup is the same as the data seen on the page of the Measure Monitor, as shown in the figure below:


4.8 Edge measurement data processing

4.8.1 Periodic trigger QuickFunctions

In the Custom QuickFunctions menu bar, click to add a "Periodic trigger" QuickFunctions, set to run in 10-second cycles, the function code for the recall of a southbound collection of data, as shown in the figure below:



# Enter your python code.
from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.measure import recall2

def recall2_callback(message, userdata):
    logger.info("recall2 response message: %s, userdata:%s" % (message, userdata))


def main():
    logger.info("Timer start")

    recall2(callback=recall2_callback, userdata="")

    logger.info("Timer end")
Once the setup is complete click submit and the script will run in 10 second cycles, each time it runs, recall2 is called to read the data collected from the southward direction.

4.8.2 Local Subscription Message Trigger QuickFunctions

In the Custom QuickFunctions menu bar, click to add a "Local Subscription Message Trigger" quickfunction, subscribe to the theme is: ds2/eventbus/south/read/+, the theme is the south to the driver to release the controller measurement point value of the message bus, used to get to the south of the cycle acquisition data, as follows shown in the figure:


After the settings are completed, submit. Each time a round of data is collected in the southward direction, this script will be triggered once and the collected data will be output to the log.

4.8.3 Power trigger QuickFunctions

In the Custom QuickFunctions menu, click to add a "Power trigger" quickfunction to indicate that the script will be triggered once when the DSA starts up, as shown in the following figure:

Once set up, the script is triggered to run once when the DSA starts.

5. Concept

Name

Description

Controller

The controller refers to the component on the gateway page that enables and manages various collection protocols.

(Southbound) Driver

The (southbound) driver refers to the software program in the gateway that communicates with PLC devices. It is usually developed specifically for certain manufacturers or device types and communicates using the device manufacturer's management protocols or APIs, such as Modbus, OPC, etc.

Measuring Point

A measuring point refers to a collection point for PLC devices configured on the gateway.

Grouping

Grouping refers to dividing measuring point data or alarm items into different groups within the gateway according to different needs and application scenarios for easier management.

Historical Database

Store the historical collected data of the measurement points in the sqlite3 database.

QuickFunction

The publishing, subscribing and custom quick functions configured in DSA are executed in the form of independent threads.

Protocol Conversion

Protocol conversion refers to forwarding data collected from the southbound direction through other protocols.

Alarm

An alarm refers to the configuration of alarm conditions for collected data within the gateway, which triggers an alarm when activated.

Event Bus

The event bus refers to the message channel used for communication between various services within the gateway using MQTT messages.

Data Transformation

The collected data can configure data operations and mapping values in the gateway. 

Functional characteristics

1. Measuring point monitoring

1.1 Monitoring list

In the "Monitoring List" interface, you can add controllers and measuring points to collect PLC data, and view the status and configuration information of the controller as well as data collection information.

On the current page, the controller can be edited, copied, deleted, etc.; the measuring points can be added, imported, exported, deleted, etc.

The page display of the monitoring list is as shown in the figure:

1.1.1 Add/Edit Controller

Click the "Add"/"Edit" button, select the controller protocol, such as Modbus RTU, and configure the controller's slave address, communication method, polling cycle and other parameters on the add controller page. Note: Controller names cannot be repeated.

In the advanced settings, the controller's message processing can be configured. For example, in the advanced settings of the Modbus RTU controller, parameters such as byte order, timeout time, and communication time can be configured.

1.1.2 Copy Controller

In industrial settings, there are often many similar PLC configuration parameters and measuring point configurations. To achieve rapid configuration, we have introduced the "Copy Controller" function. This feature allows us to quickly add controllers and measurement point configurations with similar settings, avoiding repetitive configuration tasks. Click on the "..." in the top right corner of the controller card to display more controller actions, then click "Copy". After configuring one controller, you can quickly add a second one; the copy controller will duplicate all the measurement points under the controller.



After clicking the "Copy" button, you can modify the differing configurations as needed, such as the controller name, slave address, etc., and then submit.



Upon completion of the copy, as shown in the diagram, the system will automatically generate measurement points and controller information identical to the first controller:


1.1.3 Disable/Enable Controller

When collecting data from multiple PLC devices and the gateway controller status or collected data is abnormal, we enable only the problematic controller for easy log viewing and real-time communication packet inspection. Click on the "..." in the top right corner of the controller card to display more controller actions, and select "Disable". After that, the controller will no longer perform data collection and reporting.


After disabling, the controller card will turn gray, as shown in the diagram.


When you want to re-enable the controller, click on the "..." in the top right corner of the controller card and select "Enable". The controller will then resume data collection and reporting.

1.1.4 Real-Time Communication Messages

When the controller status displays as abnormal or there is abnormal data collection, viewing the real-time communication messages between the gateway controller and the PLC devices becomes crucial. DSA supports displaying channel real-time communication messages. Select a controller at will, click "..." in the upper right corner of the controller card, and click "Real-time Communication Messages" to display all communication message interactions of the current channel.For example, if two Modbus RTU protocol controllers are enabled and both use an RS485 communication port, the real-time communication messages will show the communication messages of both controllers.

The display effect of real-time communication messages is as follows (Note: If you need to download communication messages, you need to enable "Store Communication Messages" in the advanced settings of the controller configuration before the "Download" button will be displayed. Communication messages of all controllers The text is displayed and saved in HEX format):

1.1.5 Add Measuring Point

In the "Measuring Point List," you can add measuring points to collect data from PLC devices. Click the "Add" button, and in the pop-up box, configure the measuring point parameters, such as adding a measurement point under a Modbus RTU protocol controller and configuring the measurement point name, address, data type, etc. (Note: The measurement point name must be unique within its controller).

In the "Measuring Point List," the "Import" button allows you to import the measurement points from a CSV file into the current gateway; the "Export" button enables you to export the current gateway's measurement point configurations to a CSV file. For details on the specific measurement point CSV file, refer to the Measuring Point CSV File Parameter Description.

1.2 Group

Group allows you to manage measuring points in the monitoring list by dividing them into groups. After the measuring points are grouped, the storage of historical data and measuring point reporting intervals are managed according to the configured groups. If you need to configure different reporting intervals for the measuring points or need to report corresponding data of the measuring points according to different MQTT topics, you can add a new group to manage the measuring points with different requirements. (Note: The default group cannot be deleted)

The group interface is shown in the figure:

For specific group CSV files, please refer to the Grouping CSV File Parameter Description

Add a new group on the group page. The interface is as follows:


Add group parameters Introduction:

  1. Name: Group name
  1. Reporting Interval: the reporting interval of the measuring point in the group.
  1. Periodically Upload Onchange Data :When enabled, Onchange data with unchanged values will also upload data according to the Onchange reporting cycle. The default is off.
  1. Onchange Reporting Interval: A fixed reporting interval for Onchange data.
               Historical Data is a data storage function provided by DSA. DSA can create data tables for measuring point groups and insert the grouped data into the database according to the specified storage strategy. It can be configured by the following parameters:
  1. Max Number: The maximum number of historical data stored in a single group.
  1. Storage policy: Storage interval of historical data
  1. Same AS the Reporting Interval: Store historical data according to reporting interval.
  1. Independent Storage Interval: customize the storage interval of historical data.
  1. Storage Method: The storage method of historical data. Switching the storage path will clear the stored historical data
  1. Gateway Storage: Historical data is stored in the storage space of the gateway itself.
  1. USB: Historical data is stored in a USB storage space external to the gateway.
  1. SD Card: Historical data is stored in the SD card storage space external to the gateway.

After adding a group, when adding a measuring point, you can choose to associate the measuring point with the group or select the measuring point in the list of measuring points to add to the specified group. The measuring points in the group will report data according to the reporting interval of the group.


Click "Export Historical Data" to export the group's historical data in CSV format


Click "Clear Historical Data" to clear the historical data stored in this group.

1.3 Historical Database

The historical database is used to store the historical data of the measuring points. After enabling the "Store Historical Data" function in the configuration of the measuring points, the data of the measuring points can be stored in the historical database. The historical data of measuring points is stored according to the groups they belong to. This arrangement makes it more convenient to locate and export historical data for specific measuring points.

2. Alarm

2.1 Real-time Alarms

After configuring alarm rules and when alarms are triggered, the real-time alarm page will display all triggered alarm items. 

In the real-time alarm table, some parameters from the alarm configuration, such as "Name," "Controller," "Alarm Level," etc., will be shown.

  1. Status: The current trigger status of the alarm item, displayed as "Triggered"
  2. Value: The value at the moment the alarm was triggered
  3. Time: The time when the alarm was triggered
  4. Action: An option to navigate to the "Historical Alarms" page for more details

Below is an example of a real-time alarm display interface.

2.2 Alarm Rules

Alarm rules can help us monitor the value of measuring points on the gateway side, and remind us in time when it exceeds the normal range. For example, in industrial scenarios, the range of voltage and current values and the start and stop status of some equipment need to be focused on. When we configure the alarm rules for collecting these data measuring points on the gateway side, if an alarm is triggered, the MQTT cloud service can be used to report the notification in time to avoid unnecessary losses.

On the alarm rules page, configure the alarm rules by clicking the "Add" button. In the pop-up box, set up the alarm rule parameters. The parameters include:

  1. Name: Alarm name
  2. Controller: The controller to which the alarm measuring point belongs
  3. Measuring point name: The name of the measuring point that triggered the alarm
  4. Alarm level: From low to high support "Remind", "Warning", "Secondary", "Important", "Serious"
  5. Alert Condition:
  1. Judgment condition: Support "=", "! = ", ">", "≥", "<", "≤"
  1. Logical conditions:
  1. No logic condition: The alarm is judged only by a single judgment condition
  1. && : Judging an alarm by two judging conditions
  1. | | : To determine an alarm, use a logical OR relationship between two conditions. This means that the alarm is triggered if either of the two conditions is met.
  1. Alarm content: the alarm content
  2. Alarm label: The alarm label is used to classify the alarm and facilitate quick selection when the alarm is uploaded to the cloud

The following picture shows an alarm with alarm level of alert, which belongs to the default tag. This alarm is generated when the value of the measuring point is >30 and <50; When it is not in this range, no alarm will be generated or the alarm will be eliminated.


In the "Alarm Rules" page, "Import" and "Export" CSV files of alarm rules refer to the Alarm Rules CSV file parameter description

The "Add to Label" function can help us quickly switch multiple alarm items to the alarm label. The following picture is the batch addition of alarm items to the "group_test" alarm label.

2.3 History Alarms

The historical alarms page can help us view the history of all alarm items, including triggered and recovered alarms. This function can help us understand the reason and time when the gateway side triggers/recovers the alarm items.

In the current page, you will see information about all the historical alarms that have been triggered and recovered.

The current page displays parameters that include those configured on the "Alarm Rules" page, such as "Name," "Controller," "Alarm Level," and "Alarm Content." Other parameters in the table are as follows:

  1. "Status" : There are two states, which are "triggered" and "Restored". "Triggered" means that the current alarm item is triggering an alarm; "Restored" means that the current alarm item has returned to normal.
  2. "Value" : The value of the alarm item at the moment the current state has been triggered or has been restored.
  3. "Time" : The time when the alarm was triggered or restored.
  4. "Operation" : Click the "Details" button to see the detailed information when the current alarm item is triggered or restored, and the "Delete" button can delete the current alarm item in the history of alarms.

2.4 Alarm Label

The alarm label can help us manage the alarm items. When the alarm item triggers an alarm, the MQTT message needs to be reported. Directly selecting the alarm label can quickly include all the alarm items under the alarm label. And when we need to report MQTT messages with different topics, we can add an alarm label to group different alarm items, and then select the corresponding label in different MQTT topics.

Go to the alarm label page to view the content of the alarm label.

In the table on the current page, there will be an alarm label named "default" by default (Note: this label cannot be deleted, and the rest of the added alarm labels can be deleted).

After clicking the "Add" button, configure the name of the alarm label in the pop-up box. (Note: This name is unique throughout the alarm label and cannot be repeated).


In the "Alarm Label" page, "Import" and "Export" Alarm rule CSV files, please refer to the Alarm label CSV file parameter introduction

Note: When deleting a label, the alarm items belonging to the current label in the "Alarm Rule" will be deleted together

3. Cloud

In industrial scenarios, the collected data needs to be reported to the cloud platform to help enterprises achieve centralized management, intelligent analysis and remote management of data. In DSA, we can enable and configure corresponding cloud services in the cloud service interface to help customers quickly connect to use mainstream cloud services.

3.1 MQTT Cloud Services

In the current page, you can view the connection status and configuration information of the current MQTT cloud service, and you can edit, import, export and other operations on the MQTT cloud service. Click the "Add" button to add a new MQTT cloud platform. For example, when we need to report data to multiple cloud platforms at the same time, we can add a new MQTT platform to connect to the cloud platform to report data. (Note: the name of the MQTT platform cannot be repeated, and the name of the default MQTT cloud platform is "Default"). As shown in the figure, add an MQTT platform with the name "test" :

The interface after adding is as shown in the figure:

After checking Enable cloud services, MQTT cloud services can be selected in the "Cloud Types" of the configuration interface. "Cloud Types" : The currently supported cloud platforms are "MQTT", "MQTT SparkPlugB", "iSCADA Cloud", "Eagle Energy Manager", "Alibaba Cloud", "AWS IoT", "Azure IoT".


  1. "Clear Offline Cache" : This function can clear MQTT messages that failed to be published after the MQTT Cloud service went offline. For example, when we debug the MQTT function and the offline data generated do not want to be reported to the cloud platform, we can use this function to clear the offline data (Note: only messages with Qos greater than or equal to 1 are cached).
  1. "Import" : Select the configuration file of the MQTT cloud service to import the MQTT configuration in the file and the script in the message management. This function can quickly configure and enable the cloud service. For example, when configuring the same cloud service on different gateways, the configuration file exported after configuring one gateway can be directly imported into other gateways for use.
  1. "Export" : Click to export the configuration of the cloud and the script in the message management to a "cloud.json" file.
In the "cloud measuring point Settings" interface, you can shield the measuring point (after shielding, the measuring point will not be reported), modify the name of the cloud measuring point and other operations.


  1. "Cloud Measuring Point Name" : The name of the measuring point reported to the cloud platform is reported with the name in the current configuration item
  1. "Mute" : After muted, the measuring point will no longer be reported to the cloud platform
  1. "Import" and "Export" can respectively import the configuration information of the upper cloud measuring point Settings to the current gateway, or export the upper cloud measuring point information of the current gateway (note: the CSV file in the upper cloud measuring point Settings only saves the change of the name of the upper cloud measuring point or the muted measuring point). For the specific introduction of CSV file parameters, please refer to the Description of CSV fileparameters for Settings of Upper cloud measuring points
  1. "Message Management" : Here you can add publish script and subscribe script. Only when the script is added, can the message be published to the cloud platform and subscribe to the message of the cloud platform (Note: after enabling the MQTT SparkPlugB cloud service, the message is added by default and cannot be added but can only be modified)

3.2 MindSphere IoT

4. Protocol

In industrial settings, data often exhibits diversity and complexity, and different application scenarios may require different communication protocols to meet their specific needs. DSA's protocol conversion functionality enables data to be uploaded in various application scenarios through different protocols. For example, using the Modbus TCP Slave protocol, data collected by controllers can be forwarded to SCADA servers.


The status page allows you to view the connection and running status of the current protocol (Note: not all protocols have status pages, such as BACnet Server protocol)


The configuration page can configure and view the connection parameters and add the mapping table function for the current protocol. For example, in the Modbus TCP Slave configuration interface, you can configure the Modbus TCP Slave port number, the maximum number of connections and other parameters. In the mapping table, you can perform add/edit, import/export and other operations.

For the specific mapping table CSV file, please refer to the Mapping table CSV file parameter introduction

For specific protocol configuration, please refer to the Appendix: Protocol conversion

5. Parameter Settings

In the parameter setting screen, you can configure the general Settings of the gateway. Such as setting gateway serial port parameters, storage configuration and custom parameters.

5.1Serial port Settings

In the serial port Settings page, you can configure the parameters of the serial port, such as the configuration of the serial port baud rate, data bits, etc.

The parameters of serial port Settings are shown in the figure:

The parameters are explained as follows (same for RS232 and RS485) :

  1. Baud Rate: support 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 39400, 57600, 115200, 230400. The default is 9600
  1. Data Bits: 8 and 7 are supported. The default is 8
  1. Parity: supports no check, odd check and even check. The default is no parity
  1. Stop bit: 1 and 2 are supported. The default is 1

Click the "Submit" button to save your configuration after you've modified it.

5.2 Storage Configuration

In the storage configuration interface, you can configure the log storage of the gateway, the MQTT offline data storage and the communication packet storage of the controller.

The parameters of storage configuration are shown in the figure:


The parameters are explained as follows:

  • Log level: The log level of the log output, the log below this level will not be displayed in the log. The log level from lowest to highest supports DEBUG,INFO,WARNING,ERROR. The default is INFO
  • Historical alarm max: The maximum number of historical alarms in an alarm. Default 2000
  • Offline Data storage Method: Support USB,SD card, gateway storage. The default is gateway storage
  • Offline Data Max: The maximum number of offline data storage. Default 10000
  • Offline Data Upload Period: The frequency of offline data reporting after offline data and other MQTT connections. Default 200ms
  • Offline Data Report Timeout:When publishing a message, if no confirmation or reply is received, the waiting time by default is 1000ms.
  • Offline Data Report Strategy:It can be set as "Offline Data Priority" or "Realtime Data Priority", and the default is "Offline Data Priority".
  • Offline Data Retransmission Policy: Support "continuous retry" and "retry limit reached discard". The default is "continuous retry".
    • "Always retransmit" : The offline data will be retransmitted until the response from the server is received.
    • "retry limit reached discard" : After the specified number of retransmissions, if the response from the server is not received, the offline data will be discarded and the next one will be sent.
  • After selecting "retry limit reached discard", one option will appear:
    • Maximum retry count: The maximum number of times you can republish after a failure to publish. The default is 3
  • Communication Message Storage Method: Support USB,SD card, Gateway storage. The default is Gateway storage
  • Max Stored Communication Messages:2000 by default

After modifying the configuration, click the "Submit" button to save the configuration. If you do not want to save the current changes, click the "Reset" button to restore the last saved configuration

5.3 Custom Parameter

Custom parameters are to define some global parameters, which can be used in cloud service configuration, fast function scripts. Set a global parameter to use, you can modify it more conveniently and quickly. For example, when a parameter needs to be used in multiple custom fast functions, if a custom parameter is used, then when the parameter value is changed, only the parameter value of the custom parameter interface is changed.

5.3.1Configure custom parameters

The parameters for custom parameters look like this:

By default, there are two parameters (note: these two parameters cannot be deleted or modified) :

  1. SN: The SN code of the device
  1. MAC: The MAC address of the device

If you want to add custom parameters, click the "Add" button, fill in the "Parameters" and "Parameters value" in the pop-up window, and click the "Confirm" button to add the modified value.

The "Import" and "Export" buttons can import the custom parameter configuration file to the current gateway and export the custom parameter of the current gateway into a configuration file respectively. For the specific CSV file, please refer to: Custom parameters CSV file parameter introduction

5.3.2Use custom parameters

You can add your own common parameters in custom parameters to be used as wildcards in cloud services and custom fast functions. The method is ${parameter name}, as shown in the following figure:

Custom parameters can also be used in scripts to get all custom parameters via the get_global_parameter() function.

An example script is as follows: (This script can output all the custom parameters in a log)

from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.global_dict import get_global_parameter

def main():
    logger.debug('get global dict: %s' % get_global_parameter()) 

The output will be:

6. Custom QuickFunctions

In the custom quickfunctions screen, you can add Python scripts to implement private logic (new scripts are enabled in a threaded manner). Custom fast function scripts support three trigger modes: periodic trigger; Local Subscription Message Trigger; QuickFunction start trigger.

The custom quick function interface button is introduced as shown below:

6.1 Periodic Trigger

A period-triggered quickfunction will trigger the script to run after the period ends

Below is a custom quickfunction that adds a 10-second cycle trigger, using the default script. This script will log "Timer start" and "Timer end" every 10 seconds.

The instructions for each parameter are as follows:

  1. Name: Any non-repeating name
  1. Mode: Select periodic trigger
  1. Periodic: The period that triggers this quickfunction. Units can be chosen: hours, minutes, seconds, the default is seconds.
  1. Entry Function: Stay the same as the entry function name in the script
  1. QuickFunction: Use Python code to customize the task logic of this periodic trigger script.

6.2Local Subscription Message Trigger

Local subscribe message trigger triggers the run script once when subscribed to the Topic that needs to be subscribed. The Topic on the gateway Event Bus can be looked from the  Event BUS

Below is the local subscribe message fast function that adds a subscribe controller write value message. This script will be triggered when a value is written to the controller. With the default script, the write value message will be printed to the log

The parameters are described as follows:

  1. Name: Any non-repeating name
  1. Mode: Select local subscribe message to trigger
  1. Subscribe to Topic: Subscribe to the Topic of gateway internal messages
  1. Entry Function: Keep the same name as the entry function in the script
  1. Function code: Use Python code to customize the task logic of this periodic trigger script.

6.3QuickFunction start trigger

The QuickFunction start trigger, only when the fast function start is complete, triggers the run script once.

The diagram below shows how to add a quickfunction in the QuickFunction Start Trigger mode. Using the default script, "QuickFunction start" will be printed in the logs when the quickfunction is initiated.

The parameters are described as follows:

  1. Name: Any non-repeating name
  2. Mode: Select Quickfunction start trigger
  3. Entry Function: Keep the same name as the entry function in the script
  4. QuickFunction: Use Python code to customize the task logic of this periodic script.


7. Third-party library management

This feature is only supported on IG. The third-party libraries and the description file lib.info are packaged and compressed together on the IG gateway, and can be imported and installed at this page. lib.info describes the information of the library file in the format of json as follows:

{
  "name": "rsa", //library name
  "version": "4.9", //library version number
  "desc": "", //library descriptive information
  "files": "rsa" //library file paths, more than one separated by spaces
}

Then put the lib.info file and the library file information together in a compressed package as a .zip or .tar.gz file, and then import and install it.

Appendix: List of southbound drivers

ABB

*ABB Robot

ABB Robot is a range of industrial robotic products manufactured by ABB for use in a variety of applications on automated production lines.ABB Robot communicates with external devices, control systems or host computers via the TCP/IP protocol for data exchange, control and monitoring functions.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: select *ABB Robot
  • IP address: IP address
  • Port: port information
  • Username: Login username information configured on the robot side
  • Password: Password information configured on the robot side
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measurement points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication message settings:
    • Store Communication Message: Controllers with this function enabled will store communication messages, and the path and number of stored messages can be set in the "Default Parameters" on the "Parameter Settings" page. If you want to download the stored communication messages, you can go to the "Realtime communication messages" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and then click the "Download" button to download the messages.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Read Type: read the specific parameter type of the robot, the following types are supported:
    • Current control status
    • current error state
    • Physical joint information
    • Speed ratio Information
    • Current working mode
    • Local input IO
    • Local output IO
    • Local input IO2
    • Local output IO2
    • Logging
    • System information
    • Target coordinate information
    • Servo enable State
    • Current program running status
    • Task list
  • Data Type: only STRING (8-bit string) is supported
  • Size: the length of the string for the point
  • Character Encoding Format: consistent with the robot side of the character encoding format, support: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG and GB2312 encoding.
  • Read/Write: only Read is supported
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud

AllenBrandly (Rockwell)

EtherNet/IP (CompactLogix)

EtherNet/IP is an industrial Ethernet protocol, which is used to realize communication and data exchange between devices in industrial control systems. It is based on the standard TCP/IP protocol stack, and added to it the application layer protocol used in the field of industrial automation, providing the support of real-time, reliability and security.

Adding a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  2. Protocol: Select EtherNet/IP (CompactLogix)
  3. IP Address: IP address
  4. Port: Port information
  5. Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  6. Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  7. Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  8. Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Advanced Settings:
  1. Timeout Settings:
  1. Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  1. Connect Timeout: the timeout time for establishing the connection.
  1. Communication Message Settings:
  1. Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  1. Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  2. Address: the address of the measuring point
  3. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
    1. BIT: 0 or 1
    2. BYTE: An 8-bit unsigned number
    3. SINT: 8-bit signed number
    4. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    5. INT: 16-bit signed integer
    6. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    7. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    8. FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    9. STRING: 8-bit string
    10. BCD16:16-bit BCD code
  4. Read Bit Data: When the data type is selected other than BIT,FLOAT,STRING, the value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  5. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  6. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  7. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT, the maximum is 6 digits
  8. Read and write permissions:
    1. Read: read-only, not writable
    2. Read/Write: Readable and writable
    3. Write: Only write, not read
  9. Mode:
    1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
    2. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
    3. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  10. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  11. Unit: Measuring point unit
  12. Description: Description of the measuring point
  13. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  14. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measuring point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  15. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measuring point is not BIT or STRING, and the bitwise value is not enabled, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  16. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  17. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
  18. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
  19. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
  20. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
  21. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
  22. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  23. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
  24. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
  25. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
  26. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  27. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
  28. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
  29. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  30. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
  31. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
  32. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
  33. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  34. PT: Additional PT multiplier
  35. CT: Additional CT magnification
  36. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
  37. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
  38. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.
  39. Enable Package Reporting: This field is visible when the controller enables group packet reporting. When the measuring point is enabled, it will report data in accordance with the packet reporting logic set by the controller in addition to the group reporting data
  40. Example description of measuring point address:

A1: Consistent with the PLC address, pay attention to the data type should also be consistent;

Program:MainProgram.A1: If the variable is local, prefix it with the program name;

slot=2; A1: Addresses can also carry additional slot information;

i=A[0] : If A in PLC is based on A bool array of uint type, each bit in A can be accessed using this way;

B[0] : If B is an array, each element can be accessed using an index

EtherNet/IP (Micro)

EtherNet/IP (Micro) is a variant of the EtherNet/IP protocol designed for smaller devices and resource-constrained environments. Compared with the standard EtherNet/IP protocol, EtherNet/IP (Micro) uses a more simplified message format and lightweight communication mechanism in the communication process to reduce resource consumption and communication overhead.

Adding a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  1. Protocol: Select EtherNet/IP (MIcro)
  1. IP Address: IP address
  1. Port: Port information
  1. Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  1. Enable Multiple Polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  1. Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  1. Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Advanced Settings:
  1. Timeout Settings:
  1. Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  1. Connect Timeout: the timeout time for establishing the connection.
  1. Slot:PLC slot
  1. Communication Message Settings:
  1. Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.

Adding measuring points

  1. Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  2. Address: the address of the measuring point
  3. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
    1. BIT: 0 or 1
    2. BYTE: An 8-bit unsigned number
    3. SINT: 8-bit signed number
    4. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    5. INT: 16-bit signed integer
    6. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    7. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    8. BCD16:16-bit BCD code
    9. FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    10. STRING: 8-bit string
    11. BCD16:16-bit BCD code
  4. Read Bit Data: When the data type is selected other than BIT,FLOAT,STRING, the value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  5. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  6. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  7. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT, the maximum is 6 digits
  8. Read and write permissions:
    1. Read: read-only, not writable
    2. Read/Write: Readable and writable
    3. Write: Only write, not read
  9. Mode:
    1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
    2. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
    3. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  10. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  11. Unit: Measuring point unit
  12. Description: Description of the measuring point
  13. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  14. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measuring point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  15. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measuring point is not BIT or STRING, and the bitwise value is not enabled, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  16. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  17. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
  18. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
  19. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
  20. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
  21. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
  22. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  23. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
  24. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
  25. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
  26. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  27. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
  28. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
  29. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  30. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
  31. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
  32. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
  33. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  34. PT: Additional PT multiplier
  35. CT: Additional CT magnification
  36. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
  37. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
  38. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.
  39. Enable Package Reporting: This field is visible when the controller enables group packet reporting. When the measuring point is enabled, it will report data in accordance with the packet reporting logic set by the controller in addition to the group reporting data
  40. Example description of measuring point address:
A1: Consistent with the PLC address, pay attention to the data type should also be consistent;
Program:MainProgram.A1: If the variable is local, prefix it with the program name;
slot=2; A1: Addresses can also carry additional slot information;
i=A[0] : If A in PLC is based on A bool array of uint type, each bit in A can be accessed using this way;
B[0] : If B is an array, each element can be accessed using an index

EtherNet/IP (MicroLogix)

EtherNet/IP (MicroLogix) refers to the use of EtherNet/IP protocol for communication in the MicroLogix controller family

Adding a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  1. Protocol: Select EtherNet/IP (MIcroLogix)
  1. IP Address: IP address
  1. Port: Port information
  1. Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  1. Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  1. Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  1. Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Advanced Settings:
  1. Timeout Settings:
  1. Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  1. Connect Timeout: the timeout time for establishing the connection.
  1. Communication Message Settings:

Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.


Adding measuring points
Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  1. Address: the address of the measuring point
  2. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
    1. BIT: 0 or 1
    2. BYTE: An 8-bit unsigned number
    3. SINT: 8-bit signed number
    4. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    5. INT: 16-bit signed integer
    6. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    7. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    8. FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    9. STRING: 8-bit string
  3. Read Bit Data: When the data type is selected other than BIT,FLOAT,STRING, the value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  4. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  5. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  6. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT, the maximum is 6 digits
  7. Read and write permissions:
    1. Read: read-only, not writable
    2. Read/Write: Readable and writable
    3. Write: Only write, not read
  8. Mode:
    1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
    2. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
    3. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  9. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  10. Unit: Measuring point unit
  11. Description: Description of the measuring point
  12. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  13. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measuring point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  14. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measuring point is not BIT or STRING, and the bitwise value is not enabled, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  15. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  16. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
  17. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
  18. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
  19. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
  20. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
  21. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  22. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
  23. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
  24. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
  25. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  26. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
  27. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
  28. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  29. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
  30. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
  31. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
  32. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  33. PT: Additional PT multiplier
  34. CT: Additional CT magnification
  35. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
  36. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
  37. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.
  38. Enable Package Reporting: This field is visible when the controller enables group packet reporting. When the measuring point is enabled, it will report data in accordance with the packet reporting logic set by the controller in addition to the group reporting data
  39. Example description of measuring point address:

A9:0: ASCII

B2:0: Bit

N2:0:Integer

L17:0:Long Integer

ST2:0:String

F8:5:Floating

S:1/15:Status

C2:0:Counter

T2:0:Timer

I:0/15:Input

O:0/15:Output


EtherNet/IP (Unconnected)

EtherNet/IP (Unconnected) refers to a method of communication used in the EtherNet/IP protocol. Unconnected means that there is no need to establish a persistent connection when communicating, and each communication is independent and immediate. This method is similar to the connectionless communication method in the UDP protocol, which is more lightweight and flexible, and is suitable for some scenarios with less stringent real-time requirements.

Adding a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  2. Protocol: Select EtherNet/IP (Unconnected)
  3. IP Address: IP address
  4. Port : Port information
  5. Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  6. Enable Multiple Polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  7. Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  8. Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Advanced Settings:
  1. Timeout Settings:
  1. Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  1. Connect Timeout: the timeout time for establishing the connection.
  1.      Slot:PLC slot
  2. Communication Message Settings:
  1.     Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.

Adding measuring points

Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  1. Symbol: the address of the measuring point
  2. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
    1. BIT: 0 or 1
    2. BYTE: An 8-bit unsigned number
    3. SINT: 8-bit signed number
    4. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    5. INT: 16-bit signed integer
    6. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    7. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    8. FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    9. STRING: 8-bit string
  3. Read Bit Data: When the data type is selected other than BIT,FLOAT,STRING, the value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  4. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  5. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  6. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT, the maximum is 6 digits
  7. Read and write permissions:
    1. Read: read-only, not writable
    2. Read/Write: Readable and writable
    3. Write: Only write, not read
  8. Mode:
    1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
    2. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
    3. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  9. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  10. Unit: Measuring point unit
  11. Description: Description of the measuring point
  12. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  13. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measuring point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  14. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measuring point is not BIT or STRING, and the bitwise value is not enabled, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  15. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  16. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
    3. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
    4. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
    5. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  17. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  18. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
    1. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
    2. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  19. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    4. PT: Additional PT multiplier
    5. CT: Additional CT magnification
  20. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
    1. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
    2. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.
  21. Enable Package Reporting: This field is visible when the controller enables group packet reporting. When the measuring point is enabled, it will report data in accordance with the packet reporting logic set by the controller in addition to the group reporting data
  22. Example description of measuring point address:

A1: Consistent with the PLC address, pay attention to the data type should also be consistent;

Program:MainProgram.A1: If the variable is local, prefix it with the program name;

slot=2; A1: Addresses can also carry additional slot information;

i=A[0] : If A in PLC is based on A bool array of uint type, each bit in A can be accessed using this way;

B[0] : If B is an array, each element can be accessed using an index


*SLC Net

SLC Net stands for "Symbian Limited Compatibility Network" and it is the network communication protocol for Symbian OS. Symbian OS is a kind of operating system that has been widely used in smart phones and mobile devices. It provides a wealth of functions and application support.

Adding controllers
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  2. Protocol: Select *SLC Net
  3. IP Address: IP address
  4. Port: Port information
  5. Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  6. Enable Multiple Polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  7. Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  8. Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Advanced Settings:
  1. Timeout Settings:
  1. Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  1. Connect Timeout: the timeout time for establishing the connection.
  1. Communication Message Settings:
  1. Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.


Adding measuring points

Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  1. Address: the address of the measuring point
  2. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
    1. BIT: 0 or 1
    2. BYTE: An 8-bit unsigned number
    3. SINT: 8-bit signed number
    4. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    5. INT: 16-bit signed integer
    6. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    7. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    8. FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    9. STRING: 8-bit string
    10. BCD16:16-bit BCD code
  3. Read Bit Data: When the data type is selected other than BIT,FLOAT,STRING, the value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  4. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  5. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  6. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT, the maximum is 6 digits
  7. Read and write permissions:
    1. Read: read-only, not writable
    2. Read/Write: Readable and writable
    3. Write: Only write, not read
  8. Mode:
    1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
    2. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
    3. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  9. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  10. Unit: Measuring point unit
  11. Description: Description of the measuring point
  12. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  13. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measuring point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  14. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measuring point is not BIT or STRING, and the bitwise value is not enabled, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  15. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  16. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
    3. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
    4. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
    5. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  17. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  18. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
    1. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
    2. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  19. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    4. PT: Additional PT multiplier
    5. CT: Additional CT magnification
  20. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
    1. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
    2. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.
  21. Enable Package Reporting: This field is visible when the controller enables group packet reporting. When the measuring point is enabled, it will report data in accordance with the packet reporting logic set by the controller in addition to the group reporting data
  22. Example description of measuring point address:

A9:0: ASCII variable

B2:0: Bit variable

N2:0: Integer variables

F8:5: Floating point

S:1/15: Status variable

ST2:0: String

C2:0: Counter

I:0/15: Input

O:0/15: Output

R9:0: Control

T2:0: Timer

L9:0: Long Integer

BACnet

BACnet IP

BACnet is a communication protocol used in building automation and control systems for data communication and control between building devices. Communication is based on the Internet Protocol (IP).BACnet IP uses a standard IP network as the communication medium to connect building devices via network devices such as Ethernet or Wi-Fi for data exchange and control between devices.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: select BACnet IP
  • IP address: IP address
  • Port: port information
  • Device ID: Bacnet ID of the captured device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain points under the controller to use that polling cycle. This feature can be used to differentiate between measurement points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measurement points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
    • Open Continuous Collection: whether to collect measurement points under the controller in batch or not. When batch collection is enabled, it will read all the measurement points with consecutive addresses in one reading request, which can effectively improve the collection efficiency.
    • Continuous Collection Address: When batch acquisition is enabled, you need to configure the maximum number of measurement points allowed to be acquired at one time.
    • APDU Timeout: Application Protocol Data Unit (APDU) timeout period;
    • Continuous Collection Address: the number of times the communication fails and attempts to repeat the communication;
  • Communication time setting:
    • Communication Interval Time: The interval time between message interactions, i.e., after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval time before sending the next request message.
  • Communication message settings:
    • Store Communication Message: Controllers with this function enabled will store communication messages, and the path and number of stored messages can be set in the "Default Parameters" on the "Parameter Settings" page. If you want to download the stored communication messages, you can go to the "Realtime communication messages" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and then click the "Download" button to download the messages.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Object Type: the following types are supported
    • Analog Input
    • Analog Output
    • Analog Value
    • Binary Input
    • Binary Output
    • Binary Value
    • Multi-state Input
    • Multi-state Output
    • Multi-state Value
    • Loop
    • Trend Log
    • Proprietary Min
  • Instance Number: the example number of the corresponding object type
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
    • LONG: 64-bit signed integer
  • Read Bit Data: When the data type selection is not FLOAT,STRING, you can read the value of any bit of data in the integer when it is enabled.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on value by bit.
  • Negative Value: When turn on value by bit, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Decimal Places: the length of the data after the decimal point of the measurement point when the data type is FLOAT, maximum 6 digits
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
    • Write: Write only, not read
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. Stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: If the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING and bitwise value is not enabled, simple arithmetic processing is supported through data arithmetic, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. Values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected.

BACnet MS/TP

BACnet MS/TP (Master-Slave/Token-Passing) is a variant of the BACnet protocol used to communicate in serial networks in building automation systems.MS/TP is a common BACnet physical layer protocol typically used to connect building devices such as sensors, actuators, and controllers via serial communication for data exchange and control.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: select BACnet MS/TP
  • Communication Mode: support RS232 and RS485, default use RS485
  • Device ID: Bacnet ID of the captured device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain points under the controller to use that polling cycle. This feature can be used to differentiate between measurement points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measurement points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
    • Open Continuous Collection: whether to collect measurement points under the controller in batch or not. When batch collection is enabled, it will read all the measurement points with consecutive addresses in one reading request, which can effectively improve the collection efficiency.
    • Continuous Collection Address: When batch acquisition is enabled, you need to configure the maximum number of measurement points allowed to be acquired at one time.
    • APDU Timeout: Application Protocol Data Unit (APDU) timeout period;
    • Continuous Collection Address: the number of times the communication fails and attempts to repeat the communication;
  • Communication time setting:
    • Communication Interval Time: The interval time between message interactions, i.e., after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval time before sending the next request message.
  • Communication message settings:
    • Store Communication Message: Controllers with this function enabled will store communication messages, and the path and number of stored messages can be set in the "Default Parameters" on the "Parameter Settings" page. If you want to download the stored communication messages, you can go to the "Realtime communication messages" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and then click the "Download" button to download the messages.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Object Type: the following types are supported
    • Analog Input
    • Analog Output
    • Analog Value
    • Binary Input
    • Binary Output
    • Binary Value
    • Multi-state Input
    • Multi-state Output
    • Multi-state Value
    • Loop
    • Trend Log
    • Proprietary Min
  • Instance Number: the example number of the corresponding object type
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
    • LONG: 64-bit signed integer
  • Read Bit Data: When the data type selection is not FLOAT,STRING, you can read the value of any bit of data in the integer when it is enabled.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on value by bit.
  • Negative Value: When turn on value by bit, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Decimal Places: the length of the data after the decimal point of the measurement point when the data type is FLOAT, maximum 6 digits
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
    • Write: Write only, not read
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. Stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: If the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING and bitwise value is not enabled, simple arithmetic processing is supported through data arithmetic, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. Values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected.

Beckhoff

*ADS

A communication protocol and communication mechanism commonly used in Beckhoff industrial automation systems, ADS is a high-performance, real-time communication protocol for communication between Beckhoff controllers, Engineering Stations and other ADS-enabled devices.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: select *ADS
  • IP address: IP address information of the device
  • Port number: port information of the device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain points under the controller to use that polling cycle. This feature can be used to differentiate between test points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled
  • AMS Port: port number of Ams router, TwinCAT2:801,811,831 TwinCAT3:851,852,853
  • Target Net Id: network ID number of the target, example: 192.168.100.1.1.1.
  • Sender Net Id: network ID number of the sender, example: 192.168.100.1.1.1, not the ip address. The actual value needs to be set on TwinCAT.
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measurement points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: Controllers with this function enabled will store communication messages, and the path and number of stored messages can be set in the "Default Parameters" on the "Parameter Settings" page. If you want to download the stored communication messages, you can go to the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and then click the "Download" button to download the messages.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measurement point address
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
  • Read Bit Data: When the data type selection is not FLOAT,STRING, you can read the value of any bit of data in the integer when it is enabled.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on value by bit.
  • Negative Value: When turn on value by bit, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Decimal Places: the length of the data after the decimal point of the measurement point when the data type is FLOAT, maximum 6 digits
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. Stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: If the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING and bitwise value is not enabled, simple arithmetic processing is supported through data arithmetic, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. Values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

CJT188

CJT188-2004

CJT188-2004 is a Chinese communication standard for data transmission and communication in monitoring and control systems. This standard is mainly applicable to monitoring and control systems in the fields of electric power systems, power transmission and distribution equipment, substations, etc., in order to realise data exchange, monitoring and control between equipment.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: select CJT188-2004
  • Meter address: Meter number
  • Meter Type: select from drop-down box
    • 10: Cold water meter
    • 11: Domestic hot water meter
    • 12: Drinking water meters
    • 13 Central water meter
    • 20: Calorimeters (heat metering)
    • 21: Calorimeters (cooling capacity)
    • 22: Calorimeters (heat and cooling)
    • 30: Gas meters
    • 40: Customised meters
  • Endpoint: support RS232 and RS485, RS485 is used by default.
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain points under the controller to use that polling cycle. This feature can be used to differentiate between measurement points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measurement points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
  • Communication time setting:
    • Communication Interval Time: the interval between message interactions, i.e. after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval before sending the next request message.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Please select from the drop down box
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
    • LONG: 64-bit signed integer
  • Read Bit Data: When the data type selection is not FLOAT,STRING, you can read the value of any bit of data in the integer when it is enabled.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on value by bit.
  • Negative Value: When turn on value by bit, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Decimal Places: the length of the data after the decimal point of the measurement point when the data type is FLOAT, maximum 6 digits
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. Stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: If the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING and bitwise value is not enabled, simple arithmetic processing is supported through data arithmetic, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. Values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected.

Delta

Delta TCP

Delta TCP refers to the communication method based on the TCP/IP protocol used by Delta Electronics.Delta TCP can be used for data acquisition and processing applications. By connecting to a data acquisition device or database system, real-time acquisition, storage and analysis of equipment data can be achieved to monitor and optimise the production process.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: Select Delta TCP
  • Station No: device identifier, consistent with the device, range 0-255
  • IP address: IP address information of the device
  • Port: information about the port number of the device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • PLC Type: Delta's series information, support DVP or AS series
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain points under the controller to use that polling cycle. This feature can be used to differentiate between test points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Timeout Setting:
    • Timeout: When collecting measurement points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: Controllers with this function enabled will store communication messages, and the path and number of stored messages can be set in the "Default Parameters" on the "Parameter Settings" page. If you want to download the stored communication messages, you can go to the "Realtime communication messages" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and then click the "Download" button to download the messages.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measurement point address
  • Data Type: The following data types are supported:
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Read Bit Data: When the data type selection is not FLOAT,STRING, you can read the value of any bit of data in the integer when it is enabled.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on value by bit.
  • Negative Value: When turn on value by bit, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Decimal Places: the length of the data after the decimal point of the measurement point when the data type is FLOAT, maximum 6 digits
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. Stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: If the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING and bitwise value is not enabled, simple arithmetic processing is supported through data arithmetic, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. Values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected.

Delta Serial

Delta Serial refers to the serial communication method used by Delta Electronics. It can be used for data acquisition and processing applications. By connecting with data acquisition equipment or database systems, real-time acquisition, storage and analysis of equipment data can be achieved to monitor and optimise production processes.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: Select Delta Serial
  • Station No: device identifier, consistent with the device, range 0-255
  • Communication Mode: support RS232 and RS485, default use RS485
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • PLC Type: Delta's series information, support DVP or AS series
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain points under the controller to use that polling cycle. This feature can be used to differentiate between test points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Timeout Setting:
  • Timeout: When collecting measurement points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
  • Communication time setting:
    • Communication Interval Time: The interval time between message interactions, i.e., after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval time before sending the next request message.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: Controllers with this function enabled will store communication messages, and the path and number of stored messages can be set in the "Default Parameters" on the "Parameter Settings" page. If you want to download the stored communication messages, you can go to the "Realtime communication messages" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and then click the "Download" button to download the messages.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measurement point address
  • Data Type: The following data types are supported:
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Read Bit Data: When the data type selection is not FLOAT,STRING, you can read the value of any bit of data in the integer when it is enabled.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on value by bit.
  • Negative Value: When turn on value by bit, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Decimal Places: the length of the data after the decimal point of the measurement point when the data type is FLOAT, maximum 6 digits
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. Stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: If the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING and bitwise value is not enabled, simple arithmetic processing is supported through data arithmetic, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. Values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected.

Delta Serial ASCII

Delta Serial refers to the serial communication method used by Delta Electronics. It uses ASCII code as the encoding format for data. It can be used for data acquisition and processing applications. By connecting to a data acquisition device or database system, real-time acquisition, storage and analysis of equipment data can be achieved to monitor and optimise the production process.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: Select Delta Serial ASCII
  • Station No: device identifier, consistent with the device, range 0-255
  • Communication Mode: support RS232 and RS485, default use RS485
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • PLC Type: Delta's series information, support DVP or AS series
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain points under the controller to use that polling cycle. This feature can be used to differentiate between test points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Timeout Setting:
  • Timeout: When collecting measurement points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
  • Communication time setting:
    • Communication Interval Time: The interval time between message interactions, i.e., after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval time before sending the next request message.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: Controllers with this function enabled will store communication messages, and the path and number of stored messages can be set in the "Default Parameters" on the "Parameter Settings" page. If you want to download the stored communication messages, you can go to the "Realtime communication messages" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and then click the "Download" button to download the messages.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measurement point address
  • Data Type: The following data types are supported:
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Read Bit Data: When the data type selection is not FLOAT,STRING, you can read the value of any bit of data in the integer when it is enabled.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on value by bit.
  • Negative Value: When turn on value by bit, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Decimal Places: the length of the data after the decimal point of the measurement point when the data type is FLOAT, maximum 6 digits
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. Stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: If the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING and bitwise value is not enabled, simple arithmetic processing is supported through data arithmetic, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. Values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected.

Delta Serial over TCP

Delta Serial over TCP is a method of transmitting Serial Communication over a TCP/IP network. Delta Electronics typically uses this method for remote monitoring, remote control, and data acquisition of its equipment.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Controller Protocol: Select Delta Serial over TCP
  • Station number: device identifier, consistent with the device, range 0-255
  • IP address: IP address information of the device
  • Port number: information about the port number of the device
  • Polling period: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • PLC type: Delta's series information, support DVP or AS series
  • Enable Multiple Polling Cycles: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain points under the controller to use that polling cycle. This feature can be used to differentiate between test points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  • Polling Cycle 2: i.e. the additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Timeout Time Setting
    • Acquisition timeout: When collecting measurement points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
    • Connection Timeout Time: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication message settings:
    • Stored communication messages: Controllers with this function enabled will store communication messages, and the path and number of stored messages can be set in the "Default Parameters" on the "Parameter Settings" page. If you want to download the stored communication messages, you can go to the "Real-time communication messages" page of the specified controller in the "Monitoring" page, and then click the "Download" button to download the messages.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measurement point address
  • Data Type: The following data types are supported:
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Read Bit Data: When the data type selection is not FLOAT,STRING, you can read the value of any bit of data in the integer when it is enabled.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on value by bit.
  • Negative Value: When turn on value by bit, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Decimal Places: the length of the data after the decimal point of the measurement point when the data type is FLOAT, maximum 6 digits
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. Stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: If the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING and bitwise value is not enabled, simple arithmetic processing is supported through data arithmetic, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. Values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected.

DLT meter

DLT645-1997

    DLT645-1997 is a version of the Chinese national standard GB/T 645-1997 "Multi-function Meter Communication Protocol". This standard specifies the communication protocol and data format between the multi-function meter and the external equipment, which is used for data exchange and communication between the meter and the monitoring system.

Adding a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  2. Protocol: Select DLT645-1997
  3. Slave: Table Number
  4. Endpoint: Support RS485 and RS232
  5. Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  6. Enable Multiple Polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  7. Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  8. Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Advanced Settings:
  1. Timeout Settings:
    1. Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  1. Communication time setting:
    1. Communication Interval Time: The interval time between message exchanges, i.e., after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval before sending the next request message.
  1. Communication Message Settings:
    1. Store of Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  1. Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  2. Address: The address of the measuring point, the address format supports 0000 or 00-00.
  3. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
    1. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    2. INT: 16-bit signed integer
    3. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    4. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    5. FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    6. DOUBLE: A 64-bit floating point number
    7. STRING: 8-bit string
  4. Read Bit Data: When the data type is selected other than FLOAT,STRING, the value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  5. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  6. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  7. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT, the maximum is 6 digits
  8. Read and write permissions:
    1. Read: read-only, not writable
    2. Read/Write: Readable and writable
  9. Mode:
    1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
    2. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
    3. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  10. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  11. Unit: Measuring point unit
  12. Description: Description of the measuring point
  13. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  14. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measuring point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  15. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measuring point is not BIT or STRING, and the bitwise value is not enabled, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  16. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  17. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
    3. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
    4. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
    5. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  18. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  19. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
    1. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
    2. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  20. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    4. PT: Additional PT multiplier
    5. CT: Additional CT magnification
  21. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
    1. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
    2. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.
    DLT645-2007

DLT645-2007 is a version of the Chinese national standard GB/T 645-2007 "Multi-function Meter Communication Protocol". This standard is an important version of the DLT645 series of standards, which is used to specify the communication protocol and data format between the multifunctional electric energy meter and the external equipment.

Adding a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  2. Protocol: Select DLT645-2007
  3. Slave: Table Number
  4. Endpoint: Support RS485 and RS232
  5. Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  6. Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  7. Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  8. Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Advanced Settings:
  1. Timeout Settings:
    1. Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  2. Communication time setting:
    1. Communication Interval Time: The interval time between message exchanges, i.e., after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval before sending the next request message.
    2. Initialization on Open: Whether to perform the operation of activation command when opening the serial port. After opening, add FE FE FE FE to the packet frame header.
  1. Communication Message Settings:
    1. Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  1.      Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  1. Address: The address of the measuring point, the address format supports 0000 or 00-00.
  1. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
  1. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
  1. INT: 16-bit signed integer
  1. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
  1. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
  1. FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
  1. DOUBLE: A 64-bit floating point number
  1. STRING: 8-bit string
  1. Read Bit Data: When the data type is selected other than FLOAT,STRING, the value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  1. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  1. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  1. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT, the maximum is 6 digits
  1. Read and write permissions:
  1. Read: read-only, not writable
  1. Read/Write: Readable and writable
  1. Mode:
  1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
  1. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
  1. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  1. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  1. Unit: Measuring point unit
  1. Description: Description of the measuring point
  1. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  1. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measuring point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  1. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measuring point is not BIT or STRING, and the bitwise value is not enabled, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  1. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  1. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
  1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
  1. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
  1. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
  1. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
  1. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  1. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
  1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
  1. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
  1. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  1. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
  1. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
  1. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  1. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
  1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
  1. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
  1. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  1. PT: Additional PT multiplier
  1. CT: Additional CT magnification
  1. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
  1. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
  1. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.
    DLT645-2007 over TCP

DLT645-2007 over TCP refers to the DLT645-2007 communication protocol applied to TCP/IP network communication mode. DLT645-2007 is a version of the multi-function meter communication protocol, and TCP is a common transmission control protocol used to achieve reliable data transmission in the network. The communication mode of DLT645-2007 over TCP can make full use of the reliability and stability of TCP protocol to ensure the safe transmission and reliable reception of data. This method is suitable for remote monitoring and management of electric energy data scenarios, such as power system monitoring, energy management systems, etc.

Adding a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  1. Protocol: Select DLT645-2007 over TCP
  1. Station No: Table number
  1. IP Address: The IP address of the meter
  1. Port: The port information of the meter
  1. Polling Interval: It is the time interval of collecting data (seconds), for example, it is set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  1. Enable Multiple Polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain measurement points under the controller to use the polling cycle. This function can be used to distinguish the measurement points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  1. Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling cycles;
  1. Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Advanced Settings:
  1. Timeout Settings:
    1. Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
    2. Connect Timeout: the timeout time for establishing the connection.
    3. Initialize activation: Whether to activate the command when opening the serial port. After opening, add FE FE FE FE to the packet frame header.
  1. Communication Timing Settings:
    1. Communication Interval: The interval time between message exchanges, i.e., after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval before sending the next request message.
  1. Communication Message Settings:
    1. Storage of communication messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  1. Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  2. Address: Address of measuring point, address format only supports 00-00 format (" - "must be added).
  3. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
    1. BIT: 0 or 1
    2. BYTE: An 8-bit unsigned integer
    3. SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    4. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    5. INT: 16-bit signed integer
    6. BCD16:16-bit BCD code
    7. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    8. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    9. FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    10. DOUBLE: A 64-bit floating point number
    11. STRING: 8-bit string
  4. Read Bit Data: When the data type is selected other than FLOAT,STRING, the value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  5. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  6. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  7. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT, the maximum is 6 digits
  8. Read and write permissions:
    1. Read: read-only, not writable
    2. Read/Write: Readable and writable
  9. Mode:
    1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
    2. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
    3. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  10. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  11. Unit: Measuring point unit
  12. Description: Description of the measuring point
  13. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  14. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measuring point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  15. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measuring point is not BIT or STRING, and the bitwise value is not enabled, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  16. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  17. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
    3. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
    4. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
    5. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  18. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  19. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
    1. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
    2. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  20. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    4. PT: Additional PT multiplier
    5. CT: Additional CT magnification
  21. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
    1. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
    2. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.

*DLT698

DLT698 is an implementation of Chinese national standard GB/T 26880-2011 "Power information acquisition system communication protocol", it is based on the IEC 62056 series standard (DLT645) power information acquisition system communication protocol. DLT698 is mainly used for data acquisition, transmission and management in electric power information acquisition system. It is a general communication protocol in electric power industry.

Adding a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  2. Protocol: Select *DLT698
  3. Station No: Support RS485 and RS232
  4. Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  5. Enable Multiple Polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  6. Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  7. Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Advanced Settings:
  1. Timeout Settings:
    1. Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  1. Communication Timing Settings:
    1. Communication Interval Time: The interval time between message exchanges, i.e., after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval before sending the next request message.
  1. Communication Message Settings:
    1. Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  1. Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  2. Address: Address of measuring point, address format only supports 00-00 format (" - "must be added).
  3. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
    1. BIT: 0 or 1
    2. BYTE: An 8-bit unsigned integer
    3. SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    4. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    5. INT: 16-bit signed integer
    6. BCD16:16-bit BCD code
    7. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    8. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    9. FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    10. DOUBLE: A 64-bit floating point number
    11. STRING: 8-bit string
  4. Read Bit Data: When the data type is selected other than FLOAT,STRING, the value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  5. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  6. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  7. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT, the maximum is 6 digits
  8. Read and write permissions:
    1. Read: read-only, not writable
    2. Read/Write: Readable and writable
  9. Mode:
    1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
    2. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
    3. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  10. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  11. Unit: Measuring point unit
  12. Description: Description of the measuring point
  13. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  14. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measuring point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  15. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measuring point is not BIT or STRING, and the bitwise value is not enabled, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  16. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  17. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
    3. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
    4. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
    5. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  18. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  19. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
    1. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
    2. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  20. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    4. PT: Additional PT multiplier
    5. CT: Additional CT magnification
  21. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
    1. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
    2. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.

DNP3

DNP3 TCP

DNP3 TCP (Distributed Network Protocol 3 over TCP/IP) is a reliable and efficient communication protocol for remote monitoring and control systems, and is oriented towards communication protocols for remote monitoring and control systems, which are applicable to the automation of infrastructure such as electric power systems and water systems.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: select DNP3 TCP
  • IP address: IP address information of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • Master address: The master address is a unique identifier that identifies the location and identity of the master device in the communications network.
  • Slave: The slave address is the unique identifier of the slave device in the communication network, which is used to identify the identity and location of the slave device.
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • class 1 Poll Interval: the time interval during which the master periodically sends Class 1 data requests to the slave
  • class 2 Poll Interval: the time interval during which the master periodically sends class 2 data requests to the slave
  • class 3 Poll Interval: the time interval during which the master periodically sends class 3 data requests to the slave
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measurement points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
    • Max Timeouts: the number of times a failed capture was recaptured
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
    • Unsolicited Mode: Receive Active Reporting Messages is usually an event report or an exception report that is sent to the master by a slave on its own initiative. The gateway processes the unsolicited messages only after they are enabled.
    • Mode of Operation:
    • Direct Operate: The control commands sent by the master will be directly transmitted to the slave, which will immediately execute the corresponding operation and return the execution result to the master.
    • Select then Operate: The control commands sent by the master will be transmitted to the slave, which will execute the corresponding operation and return the execution result to the master. However, the slave will not complete the operation immediately, but wait for the master to send an acknowledgement signal or a selection signal. The slave will complete the operation only after the master sends an acknowledgement or selection signal.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: Controllers with this function enabled will store communication messages, and the path and number of stored messages can be set in the "Default Parameters" on the "Parameter Settings" page. If you want to download the stored communication messages, you can go to the "Realtime communication messages" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and then click the "Download" button to download the messages.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Register Type: select from the drop-down box
  • Register Address: address of the measurement point, range: integer 0-65535
  • Data Type: different data types are supported according to the selected address type, please select according to the supported data types in the drop-down box
  • Read Bit Data: When the data type selection is not FLOAT,STRING, you can read the value of any bit of data in the integer when it is enabled.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on value by bit.
  • Negative Value: When Negative Value and data type BIT are turned on, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Decimal Places: the length of the data after the decimal point of the measurement point when the data type is FLOAT, maximum 6 digits
  • Read/Write:The read/write privilege is different according to the address type. After selecting the address type, please select the actual supported read/write permissions from the drop-down box.
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. Stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: If the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING and bitwise value is not enabled, simple arithmetic processing is supported through data arithmetic, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. Values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected.

DNP3 UDP

DNP3 UDP is an application of the DNP3 protocol on the transport layer of the UDP network.UDP is a connectionless oriented transport protocol that provides simple data transfer services and is usually used in scenarios that require high real-time performance, small data transfer volumes, and low data reliability requirements. For example, in applications such as remote monitoring, telemetry, and remote control, DNP3 UDP can be used for data transmission for real-time monitoring and control.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: select DNP3 UDP
  • IP address: IP address information of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • Master address: The master address is a unique identifier that identifies the location and identity of the master device in the communications network.
  • Slave: The slave address is the unique identifier of the slave device in the communication network, which is used to identify the identity and location of the slave device.
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • class 1 Poll Interval: the time interval during which the master periodically sends Class 1 data requests to the slave
  • class 2 Poll Interval: the time interval during which the master periodically sends class 2 data requests to the slave
  • class 3 Poll Interval: the time interval during which the master periodically sends class 3 data requests to the slave
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measurement points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
    • Max Timeouts: the number of times a failed capture was recaptured
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
    • Unsolicited Mode: Receive Active Reporting Messages is usually an event report or an exception report that is sent to the master by a slave on its own initiative. The gateway processes the unsolicited messages only after they are enabled.
    • Mode of Operation:
    • Direct Operate: The control commands sent by the master will be directly transmitted to the slave, which will immediately execute the corresponding operation and return the execution result to the master.
    • Select then Operate: The control commands sent by the master will be transmitted to the slave, which will execute the corresponding operation and return the execution result to the master. However, the slave will not complete the operation immediately, but wait for the master to send an acknowledgement signal or a selection signal. The slave will complete the operation only after the master sends an acknowledgement or selection signal.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: Controllers with this function enabled will store communication messages, and the path and number of stored messages can be set in the "Default Parameters" on the "Parameter Settings" page. If you want to download the stored communication messages, you can go to the "Realtime communication messages" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and then click the "Download" button to download the messages.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Register Type: select from the drop-down box
  • Register Address: address of the measurement point, range: integer 0-65535
  • Data Type: different data types are supported according to the selected address type, please select according to the supported data types in the drop-down box
  • Read Bit Data: When the data type selection is not FLOAT,STRING, you can read the value of any bit of data in the integer when it is enabled.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on value by bit.
  • Negative Value: When Negative Value and data type BIT are turned on, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Decimal Places: the length of the data after the decimal point of the measurement point when the data type is FLOAT, maximum 6 digits
  • Read/Write:The read/write privilege is different according to the address type. After selecting the address type, please select the actual supported read/write permissions from the drop-down box.
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. Stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: If the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING and bitwise value is not enabled, simple arithmetic processing is supported through data arithmetic, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. Values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected.

DNP3 RTU

In DNP3 RTU, RTU is a kind of remote terminal unit, which is used for tasks such as data acquisition, monitoring and control, etc. DNP3 RTU is an RTU device based on the DNP3 protocol, which is usually used for real-time monitoring and control of electric power systems, water systems, gas systems and other industrial control fields.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: select DNP3 RTU
  • Endpoint:support RS232 and RS485, RS485 is used by default.
  • Master address: The master address is a unique identifier that identifies the location and identity of the master device in the communications network.
  • Slave: The slave address is the unique identifier of the slave device in the communication network, which is used to identify the identity and location of the slave device.
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • class 1 Poll Interval: the time interval during which the master periodically sends Class 1 data requests to the slave
  • class 2 Poll Interval: the time interval during which the master periodically sends class 2 data requests to the slave
  • class 3 Poll Interval: the time interval during which the master periodically sends class 3 data requests to the slave
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measurement points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
    • Max Timeouts: the number of times a failed capture was recaptured
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
    • Unsolicited Mode: Receive Active Reporting Messages is usually an event report or an exception report that is sent to the master by a slave on its own initiative. The gateway processes the unsolicited messages only after they are enabled.
    • Mode of Operation:
    • Direct Operate: The control commands sent by the master will be directly transmitted to the slave, which will immediately execute the corresponding operation and return the execution result to the master.
    • Select then Operate: The control commands sent by the master will be transmitted to the slave, which will execute the corresponding operation and return the execution result to the master. However, the slave will not complete the operation immediately, but wait for the master to send an acknowledgement signal or a selection signal. The slave will complete the operation only after the master sends an acknowledgement or selection signal.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: Controllers with this function enabled will store communication messages, and the path and number of stored messages can be set in the "Default Parameters" on the "Parameter Settings" page. If you want to download the stored communication messages, you can go to the "Realtime communication messages" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and then click the "Download" button to download the messages.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Register Type: select from the drop-down box
  • Register Address: address of the measurement point, range: integer 0-65535
  • Data Type: different data types are supported according to the selected address type, please select according to the supported data types in the drop-down box
  • Read Bit Data: When the data type selection is not FLOAT,STRING, you can read the value of any bit of data in the integer when it is enabled.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on value by bit.
  • Negative Value: When Negative Value and data type BIT are turned on, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Decimal Places: the length of the data after the decimal point of the measurement point when the data type is FLOAT, maximum 6 digits
  • Read/Write:The read/write privilege is different according to the address type. After selecting the address type, please select the actual supported read/write permissions from the drop-down box.
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. Stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: If the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING and bitwise value is not enabled, simple arithmetic processing is supported through data arithmetic, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. Values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected.

EFORT

*EFORT Robot

EFORT Robot is a series of industrial robots produced by EFORT Intelligent Equipment Co., Ltd. which can exchange data, control, monitor and access the robot remotely via TCP/IP protocol.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: Select *EFORT Robot
  • IP address: IP address information of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain points under the controller to use that polling cycle. This feature can be used to differentiate between test points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measurement points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: Controllers with this function enabled will store communication messages, and the path and number of stored messages can be set in the "Default Parameters" on the "Parameter Settings" page. If you want to download the stored communication messages, you can go to the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and then click the "Download" button to download the messages.

Adding measuring points

  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Read Type: only robot details are supported
  • Data Type: only STRING type is supported
  • Size: the length of the string for the point
  • Character Encoding Format: consistent with the robot side of the character encoding format, support: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG and GB2312 encoding.
  • Read/Write: only Read is supported
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Goup: Group to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. Stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.

Euromap

*Euromap-63

Euromap-63 is a standard protocol for communication between industrial robots and injection moulding machines. The injection moulding machine can send relevant data of the injection process to the industrial robot, such as information on mould opening and closing status, injection speed, temperature, etc. The industrial robot can perform corresponding actions based on these data, such as adjusting the gripping position and speed of action in time, in order to achieve efficient operation of the automated production line.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: select *Euromap-63
  • Folder Name: ftp shared folder path of the gateway
  • Minimum Session Number: The smallest available session number value defined. It marks the beginning of the range of available session numbers.
  • Maximum Session Number: The maximum available session number value defined. It marks the end of the range of available session numbers.
  • Character Encoding: UTF8 only
  • Includes CYCLIC: when enabled, data is recorded cyclically, otherwise data is recorded only once
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain points under the controller to use that polling cycle. This feature can be used to differentiate between measurement points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measurement points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measurement point address
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
  • Read Bit Data: When the data type selection is not FLOAT,STRING, you can read the value of any bit of data in the integer when it is enabled.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on value by bit.
  • Negative Value: When turn on value by bit, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Decimal Places: the length of the data after the decimal point of the measurement point when the data type is FLOAT, maximum 6 digits
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. Stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: If the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING and bitwise value is not enabled, simple arithmetic processing is supported through data arithmetic, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. Values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

FANUC

*FANUC Robot

FANUC Robot is a series of industrial robot products produced by Japan's FANUC company, its robot products are widely used in automotive manufacturing, electronics manufacturing, metal processing, logistics and other fields.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: Select *FANUC Robot
  • IP address: IP address information of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain points under the controller to use that polling cycle. This feature can be used to differentiate between measurement points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measurement points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: Controllers with this function enabled will store communication messages, and the path and number of stored messages can be set in the "Default Parameters" on the "Parameter Settings" page. If you want to download the stored communication messages, you can go to the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and then click the "Download" button to download the messages.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Read type: only Robot Details are supported
  • Data Type: only STRING type is supported
  • Size: the length of the string for the point
  • Character Encoding Format: consistent with the robot side of the character encoding format, support: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG and GB2312 encoding.
  • Read and write permissions: only Read is supported
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Group to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. Stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.

*FANUC CNC 0i

FANUC CNC 0i is a type of numerical control system manufactured by FANUC Corporation in Japan. This type of CNC system is mainly used to control metalworking machine tools, such as CNC lathes, CNC milling machines, CNC grinding machines, etc., so that they can automate machining operations.FANUC CNC 0i CNC systems usually have a network communication function, allowing data monitoring and communication through the TCP/IP protocol. The TCP/IP protocol allows the user to establish a network connection with the FANUC CNC 0i system, monitor its status, read data, and send commands.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: Select *FANUC CNC 0i
  • IP address: IP address information of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain points under the controller to use that polling cycle. This feature can be used to differentiate between measurement points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measurement points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: Controllers with this function enabled will store communication messages, and the path and number of stored messages can be set in the "Default Parameters" on the "Parameter Settings" page. If you want to download the stored communication messages, you can go to the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and then click the "Download" button to download the messages.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Read Type: select from the drop-down box
  • Data Type: different data types are supported according to the selected read type, which cannot be changed
  • Read Bit Data: When the data type selection is not FLOAT,STRING, you can read the value of any bit of data in the integer when it is enabled.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on value by bit.
  • Negative Value: When Negative Value and data type BIT are turned on, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Decimal Places: the length of the data after the decimal point of the measurement point when the data type is FLOAT, maximum 6 digits
  • Read/Write:The read/write privilege is different according to the address type. After selecting the address type, please select the actual supported read/write permissions from the drop-down box.
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. Stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: If the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING and bitwise value is not enabled, simple arithmetic processing is supported through data arithmetic, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. Values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected.

FATEK

FATEK Programe Port

The Programe Port provides a physical connection, usually a port, through which communication with the FATEK PLC can take place. This programming port is the interface used to connect the PLC to a programming device (e.g. a programmer or PC) for programming, debugging and data transfer.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: Select FATEK Programe Port
  • Slave: unique identification of the slave device
  • Communication Mode: support RS485 and RS232, RS485 is used by default.
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain points under the controller to use that polling cycle. This feature can be used to differentiate between test points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measurement points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set collection timeout, the collection still fails.
  • Communication time setting:
    • Communication Interval Time: The interval time between message interactions, i.e., after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval time before sending the next request message.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: Controllers with this function enabled will store communication messages, and the path and number of stored messages can be set in the "Default Parameters" on the "Parameter Settings" page. If you want to download the stored communication messages, you can go to the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and then click the "Download" button to download the messages.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Register Type: select from the drop-down box
  • Register Address: Address of the measuring point
  • Data Type: Different Data types are supported depending on the Register type selected. After selecting the Register type, choose the Data type from the drop-down box
  • Read Bit Data: When the data type selection is not FLOAT,STRING, you can read the value of any bit of data in the integer when it is enabled.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on value by bit.
  • Negative Value: When Negative Value and data type BIT are turned on, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Decimal Places: the length of the data after the decimal point of the measurement point when the data type is FLOAT, maximum 6 digits
  • Read/Write:The read/write privilege is different according to the address type. After selecting the address type, please select the actual supported read/write permissions from the drop-down box.
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. Stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: If the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING and bitwise value is not enabled, simple arithmetic processing is supported through data arithmetic, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. Values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected.

FATEK Programe Port over TCP

FATEK PLC products typically support a variety of communication methods, including programming and data communication over Ethernet (TCP/IP). By mapping the FATEK Programe Port onto a TCP/IP network, users can connect to the PLC over the network and use the appropriate programming software or tools to program, monitor and debug with the PLC.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: Select FATEK Programe Port over TCP
  • IP address: IP address information of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • Slave: unique identification of the slave device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain points under the controller to use that polling cycle. This feature can be used to differentiate between test points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measurement points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set collection timeout, the collection still fails.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: Controllers with this function enabled will store communication messages, and the path and number of stored messages can be set in the "Default Parameters" on the "Parameter Settings" page. If you want to download the stored communication messages, you can go to the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and then click the "Download" button to download the messages.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Register Type: select from the drop-down box
  • Register Address: Address of the measuring point
  • Data Type: Different Data types are supported depending on the Register type selected. After selecting the Register type, choose the Data type from the drop-down box
  • Read Bit Data: When the data type selection is not FLOAT,STRING, you can read the value of any bit of data in the integer when it is enabled.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on value by bit.
  • Negative Value: When Negative Value and data type BIT are turned on, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Decimal Places: the length of the data after the decimal point of the measurement point when the data type is FLOAT, maximum 6 digits
  • Read/Write:The read/write privilege is different according to the address type. After selecting the address type, please select the actual supported read/write permissions from the drop-down box.
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. Stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: If the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING and bitwise value is not enabled, simple arithmetic processing is supported through data arithmetic, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. Values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected.

Fuji

*SPB

The SPB series PLCs are a series of programmable logic controller (PLC) products manufactured by Fuji.The SPB series PLCs usually support a variety of communication protocols and network connections, such as Ethernet, serial communications, etc., to facilitate data exchange and communication with other devices or higher-level systems.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: Select *SPB
  • Station No: the station number of the device
  • Communication Mode: support RS485 and RS232, RS485 is used by default.
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain points under the controller to use that polling cycle. This feature can be used to differentiate between test points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measurement points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set collection timeout, the collection still fails.
  • Communication time setting:
    • Communication Interval Time: The interval time between message interactions, i.e., after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval time before sending the next request message.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: Controllers with this function enabled will store communication messages, and the path and number of stored messages can be set in the "Default Parameters" on the "Parameter Settings" page. If you want to download the stored communication messages, you can go to the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and then click the "Download" button to download the messages.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measurement point address
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

*SPB over TCP

A communication method that encapsulates communication data from Fuji SPB series programmable logic controllers (PLCs) using serial communication protocols (e.g., RS-232, RS-485) and transmits it over a TCP/IP network.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: Select *SPB over TCP
  • Station No: the station number of the device
  • IP address: IP address information of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain points under the controller to use that polling cycle. This feature can be used to differentiate between test points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measurement points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set collection timeout, the collection still fails.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: Controllers with this function enabled will store communication messages, and the path and number of stored messages can be set in the "Default Parameters" on the "Parameter Settings" page. If you want to download the stored communication messages, you can go to the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and then click the "Download" button to download the messages.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measurement point address
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

*SPH Net

Fuji's SPH Net is one of Fuji Electric's (Fuji Electric) product lines, and it is a proprietary communication protocol.SPH Net is typically used to connect PLCs (Programmable Logic Controllers) and other automation equipment for data exchange and control.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: Select *SPH Net
  • Station No: the station number of the device
  • IP address: IP address information of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain points under the controller to use that polling cycle. This feature can be used to differentiate between test points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measurement points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set collection timeout, the collection still fails.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: Controllers with this function enabled will store communication messages, and the path and number of stored messages can be set in the "Default Parameters" on the "Parameter Settings" page. If you want to download the stored communication messages, you can go to the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and then click the "Download" button to download the messages.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measurement point address
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

GE

*SRTP

SRTP is a specific sub-protocol of the SNP protocol, which stands for Real-Time Protocol of SNP (Series Network Protocol).SRTP is usually used for real-time data transmission with high speed and low latency, and is suitable for application scenarios with high real-time requirements, such as control systems and data acquisition, and so on.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: Select *SRTP
  • IP address: IP address information of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain points under the controller to use that polling cycle. This feature can be used to differentiate between test points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measurement points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set collection timeout, the collection still fails.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: Controllers with this function enabled will store communication messages, and the path and number of stored messages can be set in the "Default Parameters" on the "Parameter Settings" page. If you want to download the stored communication messages, you can go to the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and then click the "Download" button to download the messages.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measurement point address
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

HJ212

HJ212-2005-Serial

HJ212-2005 is the earliest version of the HJ212 standard, which was released in 2005. It defines the communication protocol between the monitoring equipment and the data acquisition system, including data frame format, data transmission method, communication parameters, etc.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: select HJ212-2005-Serial
  • Endpoint: support RS232 and RS485, RS485 is used by default.
  • MN: unique identification of the device
  • Password: Access password
  • ST: the system code of the collected points, e.g. the system code for surface water detection is 21.
  • Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain measurement points under the controller to use that polling cycle. This feature can be used to differentiate between test points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: Controllers with this function enabled will store communication messages, and the path and number of stored messages can be set in the "Default Parameters" on the "Parameter Settings" page. If you want to download the stored communication messages, you can go to the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and then click the "Download" button to download the messages.
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measurement points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Monitoring Factor Coding:support "-Rtd" and "-Flag" two kinds of numbered factors.
  • Data types: Data type is supported if the monitoring factor coding is "-Rtd":
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
    • LONG: 64-bit signed integer
    • If the monitoring factor coding is "-Flag", only the STRING type is supported
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected
    • Enable Package Reporting: This field is visible when the controller enables group packet reporting. When the measuring point is enabled, it will report data in accordance with the packet reporting logic set by the controller in addition to the group reporting data

HJ212-2017-Serial

HJ212-2017 is an update and improvement of the original HJ212 standard, released in 2017. It optimises and extends the 2005 protocol, making data transmission more stable, reliable and efficient.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: select HJ212-2017-Serial
  • Endpoint: support RS232 and RS485, RS485 is used by default.
  • MN: unique identification of the device
  • Password: Access password
  • Status expiration time: if no new message is received from the controller or measurement point within the specified time, the status will be automatically updated to offline.
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: Controllers with this function enabled will store communication messages, and the path and number of stored messages can be set in the "Default Parameters" on the "Parameter Settings" page. If you want to download the stored communication messages, you can go to the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and then click the "Download" button to download the messages.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Monitoring Factor Coding:support "-Rtd" and "-Flag" two kinds of numbered factors.
  • Data types: Data type is supported if the monitoring factor coding is "-Rtd":
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
    • LONG: 64-bit signed integer
    • If the monitoring factor coding is "-Flag", only the STRING type is supported
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected
  • Enable Package Reporting: This field is visible when the controller enables group packet reporting. When the measuring point is enabled, it will report data in accordance with the packet reporting logic set by the controller in addition to the group reporting data

IEC 60870

IEC 101

IEC 101 is a standard protocol developed by the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) for telecommunication. It is a communication protocol for monitoring and control of power systems, which is mainly used for applications such as remote monitoring, control, data acquisition and protection in power systems.

Adding a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  2. Protocol: IEC 101 is selected
  3. Communication Mode: support “Balanced Transmission” and “Unbalanced Transmission”, “Unbalanced Transmission” only supports one side of the communication at the same time to send data, belongs to half duplex, suitable for RS485 scenario, “Balanced Transmission” can support both sides of the communication to send data at the same time, belongs to full duplex, suitable for RS232 scenario
  4. Link Address Size: support 1 and 2. The number of bits or bytes used to represent the address of a device in the link layer
  5. Link Address: A unique identifier used in the link layer to identify a communicating device
  6. ASDU Size: The byte length of the application service data unit, which is the length of the CA public address, the ASDU field is used to distinguish different sub-stations on this link. If more than one substation needs to be collected, more than one controller needs to be configured. 1 and 2 are supported, the default is 2, in bytes
  7. ASDU Address: Application service data unit public address, also known as CA public address. An address or identifier used in a protocol to identify and distinguish between different ASdus
  8. IOA Size: information object address byte length, the length of IOA determines the number and range of monitoring points, the default is 2, unit byte
  9. COT Size: transmission cause byte length, determines the number of transmission causes that can be represented, the default is 2, unit byte
  10. Originator Address: Used to identify the address of the device or system that sends the data packet, identifying the source of the data packet
  11. Endpoint: support RS485 and RS232
  12. General Interrogation Interval: the time interval during which the system regularly sends the total call command
  13. Counter Interrogation Interval: The time interval at which the control system regularly sends the power total call command
  14. Description: Note information can be added to this controller
Advanced Settings:
  1. Timeout: The timeout time of the device response after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  1. Link confirmation timeout: the maximum time for the initiator to wait for a response from the receiver when a packet is interacting
  1. Clock Sysc: When enabled, a clock synchronization command is periodically sent to the slave device to inform the device of the current system time or calibration value
  1. Clock Sync Interval: The frequency at which clock synchronization commands are sent
  1. Operate Mode: supports "Direct Operate" and "Select then Operate ". The "Direct Operate" command is sent directly by the master station to the remote device, and the device performs the corresponding operation immediately after receiving the command, without waiting for additional confirmation or response. In the " Select then Operate" mode, the master station first sends a selection command to the remote device, which indicates that the device is ready to perform a specific action, but does not execute it immediately for the time being. Upon receiving the selection command, the device will place the action in the pending state and send an acknowledgement response to the master indicating that the selection command has been accepted. The master then sends another action command that instructs the device to perform a specific action. After receiving the operation command, the device performs the corresponding operation and sends an acknowledgement response to the master station, indicating that the operation has been performed.
  1. Communication message Settings:
  1. Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.

Adding measuring points

  1. Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  2. Register Type: Select the Type Identification (TI) of IEC101 from the dropdown menu.
  3. IOA Size: Identifies the address of the information object, an integer from 1 to 16777215
  4. Data type: Depending on the address type, the data types supported in the data type are also different. After you select an address type, select the actual supported data type from the drop-down list.
  5. Read Bit Data: When the data type is selected other than FLOAT,STRING, the value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  6. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  7. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  8. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT, the maximum is 6 digits
  9. Read and write permissions: Depending on the address type, the supported read and write permissions are different. After you select an address type, select the actual supported read and write permissions from the drop-down list.
  10. Mode:
    1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
    2. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
    3. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  11. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  12. Unit: Measuring point unit
  13. Description: Description of the measuring point
  14. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  15. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measuring point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  16. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measuring point is not BIT or STRING, and the bitwise value is not enabled, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  17. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  18. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
    3. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
    4. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
    5. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  19. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  20. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
    1. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
    2. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  21. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    4. PT: Additional PT multiplier
    5. CT: Additional CT magnification
  22. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
    1. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
    2. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.

IEC 104

IEC 104 is an international standard protocol for remote communication in power systems. It was developed by the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) and is a communication protocol for monitoring, controlling, and protecting power systems. The IEC 104 protocol is built on top of the TCP/IP network protocol and usually uses TCP or UDP as the transport layer protocol to achieve reliable transmission of data in the network. It adopts a distributed and object-oriented communication model, and supports client-server and multicast communication modes.

IEC 104 protocol is mainly used for communication between remote terminal unit (RTU), remote control device, remote communication device and other equipment. It provides an efficient and reliable data transmission mechanism, which supports a variety of data types and function codes, such as telemetry data collection, remote communication information transmission, remote operation execution, etc.

Adding a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway

  1. Protocol: Select IEC 104
  2. IP Address: Master IP address
  3. ASDU address: The byte length of the application service data unit, that is, the length of the CA public address, the ASDU field is used to distinguish between different sub-stations on this link. If multiple substations need to be collected, multiple controllers need to be configured

  1. Port: Master port information
  2. COT Size: Transfer cause byte length, determines the number of transfer causes that can be represented, the default is 2
  3. General Interrogation Interval: The time interval during which the system sends the total call command on a regular basis
  4. Counter Interrogation Interval: The time interval at which the control system regularly sends the power total call command
Advanced Settings:
  1. K Value: The maximum number of I format (information) APDU (k) that has not been confirmed. Range 1-32, default 12.
  2. W value: Receiver acknowledges after receiving w I format (information) APdus, range 1-32, default 8.
  3. T0 Timeout (S) : T0 timeout is the timeout that the master waits for a response from the slave after sending the start frame. If no response frame is received from the slave within the T0 timeout period, the master will consider the communication failed and act accordingly. Range 1-3000, default is 30 in seconds.
  4. T1 Timeout (S) : t1 stipulates that after the sender sends an I format packet or U format (control) packet, it must be accepted by the receiver within the time of t1, otherwise the sender considers that the TCP connection has a problem and should re-establish the connection. Range 1-3000, default is 15 in seconds.
  5. T2 Timeout (S) : t2 stipulates that after receiving an I format packet, if the receiver does not receive a new I format packet after t2 time, it must send an S format (monitoring) frame to the sender to acknowledge the received I format packet. Range 1-3000, default is 10, in seconds. Note: T2 < T1
  6. T3 Timeout (S) : t3 stipulates that the dispatcher or the sub-station RTU will retrigger the timer t3 every time it receives an I frame, S frame or U frame. If no packet is received within t3, it will send a test link frame to the other side. Range 1-3000, default is 20, the unit is seconds. Note: T3 > T1
  7. Clock Sys: When enabled, a clock synchronization command will be sent to the slave device periodically to inform the device of the current system time or calibration value
  8. Clock Sync Interval: The frequency at which clock synchronization commands are sent
  9. Operate Mode: Support "direct operation" and "select operation". The "Direct operation" command is sent directly by the master station to the remote device, and the device performs the corresponding operation immediately after receiving the command, without waiting for additional confirmation or response. In the "Operation after Selection" mode, the master station first sends a selection command to the remote device, which indicates that the device is ready to perform a specific action, but does not execute it immediately for the time being. Upon receiving the selection command, the device will place the action in the pending state and send an acknowledgement response to the master indicating that the selection command has been accepted. The master then sends another action command that instructs the device to perform a specific action. After receiving the operation command, the device performs the corresponding operation and sends an acknowledgement response to the master station, indicating that the operation has been performed.
  10. Communication Message Settings:
  1. Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  1.      Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  2. Register Type: Select the Type Identification (TI) of IEC104 from the dropdown menu.
  3. IOA Size: Identifies the address of the information object, an integer from 1 to 16777215
  4. Data type: Depending on the address type, the data types supported in the data type are also different. After you select an address type, select the actual supported data type from the drop-down list.
  5. Read Bit Data: When the data type is selected other than FLOAT,STRING, the value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  6. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  7. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  8. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT, the maximum is 6 digits
  9. Read and write permissions: Depending on the address type, the supported read and write permissions are different. After you select an address type, select the actual supported read and write permissions from the drop-down list.
  10. Mode:
    1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
    2. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
    3. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  11. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  12. Unit: Measuring point unit
  13. Description: Description of the measuring point
  14. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  15. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measuring point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  16. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measuring point is not BIT or STRING, and the bitwise value is not enabled, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  17. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  18. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
    3. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
    4. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
    5. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  19. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  20. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
    1. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
    2. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  21. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    4. PT: Additional PT multiplier
    5. CT: Additional CT magnification
  22. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
    1. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
    2. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.

IEC 61850

IEC 61850 MMS

The IEC 61850 standard is a set of standards for power system automation, of which MMS is a part, defining the format and transmission of communication messages.IEC 61850 MMS provides a flexible communication mechanism that can be used for exchanging, controlling and monitoring data between different devices in a power system.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: select IEC 61850 MMS
  • IP Address: IP address information of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • Enable Authentication: when enabled, a password is required for authentication
    • Password: Password for authentication
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measuring points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain points under the controller to use that polling cycle. This feature can be used to differentiate between test points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling Interval (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling Interval are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Timeout time setting:
    • Timeout: When collecting measuring points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set Timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
    • Connect Timeout Time: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
    • Scan Timeout: The maximum time an MMS client waits for a response from the MMS server after sending a request.
    • AP Title: Specifies the ACSE application ID, must be 3 - 10 integers (including integers), separated by commas. The default value is "1,1,1,999,1".
    • AE Qualifier: Specifies the ACSE AE qualifier. The range is 0 - 65535 and the default value is 12.
    • P selector: configures the server OSI-PSEL and is used to establish a remote server connection. It specifies an array of bytes represented as pairs of hexadecimal digits separated by zero or more spaces. The maximum size is 50 bytes (or 100 hexadecimal characters). The default value is "00 00 00 01".
    • S selector: configures the server OSI-SSEL and is used to establish a remote server connection. It specifies an array of bytes represented as pairs of hexadecimal digits separated by zero or more spaces. The maximum size is 50 bytes (or 100 hexadecimal characters). The default value is "00 01".
    • T selector: configures the server OSI-TSEL and is used to establish a remote server connection. It specifies an array of bytes represented as pairs of hexadecimal digits separated by zero or more spaces. The maximum size is 50 bytes (or 100 hexadecimal characters). The default value is "00 01".
  • Control Parameter:
    • Initiator Class: class of the originator of the MMS message
    • Initiator Identity: Identity of the originator of the MMS message
    • Test Mode: When enabled, test mode is enabled
    • Synchronization Check: when enabled, synchronization check is enabled
    • Interlock Check: when enabled, interlock checking is enabled
  • Communication message Settings:
    • Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Object references: Object references allow you to pinpoint various objects in the IEC 61850 data model and access their properties and values.
  • Functional Constraint:
    • ST: This represents a status message whose value can be read, replaced, reported and logged, but not written.
    • MX: This represents a metric information whose value can be read, replaced, reported and logged, but not written.
    • CO: This indicates control information whose value can be manipulated and read.
    • SP: This indicates a setpoint message whose value can be controlled and read. The controlled value takes effect immediately.
    • SV: This represents a substitution message whose value can be written to replace the value attribute and read.
    • CF: This represents a configuration message whose value can be written and read. The value being controlled takes effect immediately or is delayed.
    • DC: This represents a descriptive message whose value can be written and read.
    • SG: Logical devices that implement the SGCB class use the Functional Constraints SG to maintain multiple grouped values for all DataAttributes instances. Each group contains a value for each DataAttribute that has a Functional Constraint SG that will be the currently active value. The "FC=SG" DataAttribute cannot be written.
    • SE: This represents a DataAttribute that can be edited by the SGCB service.
    • EX: This indicates extension information that provides a reference to the namespace. Extensions are used in conjunction with extension definitions for LNs, DATA, and DataAttributes. The value of a DataAttribute with FC=EX cannot be written.
    • BR: This indicates the BRCB's report control information, which can be written and read.
    • RP: This indicates that the report control information of the URCB can be written and read.
    • LG: It indicates the log control information of the LCB, which can be written and read.
    • GO: This indicates the control information of the GoCB that can be written and read.
    • GS: This indicates the control information of the GoCB that can be written and read.
    • MS: This represents the sample value control information for an MSVCB, which can be written and read.
    • US: this indicates sample value control information for the UNICAST-SVC instance that can be written and read.
  • Data Types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
    • ULONG: 64 unsigned integer
    • LONG: 64-bit signed integer
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:Read and Write Permissions: Read and Write Permissions support different read and write permissions based on the functional constraint. Select the read/write permission from the drop-down box after selecting the functional constraint.
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
    • Write: Write only, not read
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected
    • Enable Package Reporting: This field is visible when the controller enables group packet reporting. When the measuring point is enabled, it will report data in accordance with the packet reporting logic set by the controller in addition to the group reporting data

INOVANCE

*INOVANCE Serial

Inovance Serial is a protocol for communication between Inovance devices, typically used to connect Inovance PLCs (Programmable Logic Controllers), HMIs (Human Machine Interfaces), or other devices for data transfer and communication.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: select *INOVANCE Serial
  • Station No: equipment Identifier
  • Communication Mode: support RS485 and RS232, default use RS485
  • PLC Type: INOVANCE's series information, support AM,H3U,H5U series
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling Interval and select certain points under the controller to use that polling Interval. This feature can be used to differentiate between test points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Byte Order:
    • 32 Bit Int: select from the drop-down box
    • String Byte Order: select from the drop-down box
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measuring points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
  • Communication time setting:
    • Communication Interval Time: The interval time between message interactions, i.e., after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval time before sending the next request message.
  • Communication message Settings:
    • Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measurement point address
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

*INOVANCE TCP

The communication protocol used by Inovance industrial automation devices is based on TCP/IP networks. With Inovance TCP, Inovance devices can communicate with other devices (e.g. PLCs, HMIs, SCADA systems, etc.) over a TCP/IP network. This communication method provides a reliable, real-time data exchange mechanism that allows users to remotely monitor, control and manage the Inovance devices to realise various functions of the industrial automation system, such as data acquisition, remote control, troubleshooting and so on.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: select *INOVANCE TCP
  • Station No: equipment Identifier
  • IP Address: IP address information of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • PLC Type: INOVANCE's series information, support AM,H3U,H5U series
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling Interval and select certain points under the controller to use that polling Interval. This feature can be used to differentiate between test points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Byte Order:
    • 32 Bit Int: select from the drop-down box
    • String Byte Order: select from the drop-down box
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measuring points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication message Settings:
    • Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measurement point address
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

*INOVANCE Serial over TCP

A communication method that transmits the serial communication protocol originally used by Inovance industrial automation equipment over a TCP/IP network. Serial data is converted to TCP/IP data so that it can be transmitted over an Ethernet network. This feature allows remote communication between serial devices while utilising the existing Ethernet network infrastructure.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: select *INOVANCE Serial over TCP
  • Station No: equipment Identifier
  • IP Address: IP address information of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • PLC Type: INOVANCE's series information, support AM,H3U,H5U series
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling Interval and select certain points under the controller to use that polling Interval. This feature can be used to differentiate between test points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Byte Order:
    • 32 Bit Int: select from the drop-down box
    • String Byte Order: select from the drop-down box
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measuring points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication message Settings:
    • Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measurement point address
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

KEBA

KEBA Socket

The KEBA Socket protocol is a communication protocol developed by the Austrian automation company KEBA to communicate with its industrial automation devices. This protocol is typically used to connect to KEBA devices over a network (usually Ethernet) for data exchange and control. In the KEBA Socket Protocol, the gateway is used as a TCP Server.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: Select KEBA Socket
  • Port: port information of the device
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Address of the measurement point.
  • Data type: measuring point data type, including:
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
    • LONG: 64-bit signed integer
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

KEYENCE

*KEYENCE MC 3E

Keyence KV Series PLC Ethernet Communication Protocol (MC 3E Frame)

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: Select *KEYENCE MC 3E
  • Communication Mode: support Binary and ASCII
  • IP address: IP address information of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain points under the controller to use that polling cycle. This feature can be used to differentiate between test points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measuring points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication message Settings:
    • Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measurement point address
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

*Nano

KEYENCE's Nano Series PLC is a family of small programmable logic controllers (PLCs) manufactured by the company. These PLCs are typically used to control simple automation tasks such as the control of small machines, equipment and workstations. Their features typically include compact size, ease of installation and programming, and reliability and stability for a variety of industrial environments.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: Select *KEYENCE MC 3E
  • Communication Mode: support RS485 and RS232, RS485 is used by default.
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain points under the controller to use that polling cycle. This feature can be used to differentiate between test points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Continuous Collection: whether or not to batch acquisition of measurement points under the controller, such as modbus protocol, after enabling batch acquisition, it will read all the measurement points with consecutive addresses in one read request, which can effectively improve the acquisition efficiency.
    • Continuous Collection Address:When Continuous Collection is enabled, you need to configure the maximum number of measurement points allowed to be acquired at one time.
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measuring points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
  • Communication time setting:
    • Communication Interval Time: The interval time between message interactions, i.e., after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval time before sending the next request message.
  • Communication message Settings:
    • Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measurement point address
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

*Nano over TCP

KEYENCE Nano Series PLCs use the TCP/IP protocol for communication functions or options. The TCP/IP protocol allows the Nano Series PLC to communicate with other devices (such as PCs, HMIs, sensors, etc.) for data exchange, remote monitoring and control, and other functions.

Adding a controller
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: Select *Nano over TCP
  • IP address: IP address information of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain points under the controller to use that polling cycle. This feature can be used to differentiate between test points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Continuous Collection: whether or not to batch acquisition of measurement points under the controller, such as modbus protocol, after enabling batch acquisition, it will read all the measurement points with consecutive addresses in one read request, which can effectively improve the acquisition efficiency.
    • Continuous Collection Address:When Continuous Collection is enabled, you need to configure the maximum number of measurement points allowed to be acquired at one time.
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measuring points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication message Settings:
    • Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measurement point address
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

Modbus

Modbus ASCII

Modbus ASCII is a Modbus communication protocol based on ASCII character encoding for data exchange and device control in serial communication. It is a variant of the Modbus protocol and usually runs on serial communication media such as RS-232 or RS-485. The Modbus ASCII protocol is commonly used in industrial control systems for data exchange between devices and control operations. It supports a variety of function codes, including read/write registers, read/write coils, etc., which can be used to realize the monitoring and control of remote devices. The Modbus ASCII protocol is simple and easy to use, and is suitable for smaller scale systems and devices

Adding a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  2. Protocol: Select Modbus ASCII
  3. Slave: The unique identification of the slave device
  4. Endpoint: Support RS485 and RS232, default use RS485
  5. Polling Interval: It is the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, it is set to 10S, then all the measurement points under the controller are polled every 10S
  6. Enable Multiple Polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain measurement points under the controller to use the polling cycle. This function can be used to distinguish the measurement points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  7. Polling Interval 2: An additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled.
  8. Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Advanced Settings:
  1. Byte order:
  1. 16 Bit Int: Both AB and BA are supported, and AB endianness is used by default
  1. 32 Bit Int: Supports ABCD, CDAB, DCBA, BADC, defaults to ABCD byte order
  1. 32 Bit Float: ABCD, CDAB, DCBA, BADC are supported, and ABCD byte order is used by default
  1. 64 Bit Int: supports ABCDEFGH, GHEFCDAB, HGEFDCBA, BADCFEHG, defaults to ABCDEFGH
  1. 64 Bit Float: ABCDEFGH, GHEFCDAB, HGEFDCBA, BADCFEHG are supported
Byte order, ABCDEFGH is used by default
  1. Enable Package Reporting: Measurement points under controllers with this feature enabled can be configured for individual polling cycles (in milliseconds). Measurement points that have " Enable Package Reporting " enabled collect data according to the set polling cycle and frequency, and publish the aggregated data to the local MQTT topic "ds2/eventbus/south/upload/msec/data/{controllerName}". A quick function with the mode "Local Subscription Message Trigger" can be added on the "Custom Quick Functions" page to subscribe to this topic, where the grouped data can be processed within the quick function.
  2. Packet Data Polling Interval: The polling period for group packet data.
  3. Millisecond Data uploading: How many times the group packet data is polled, it is reported uniformly.
  4. Continuous Collection: Whether to carry out batch acquisition of the measurement points under the controller. For example, in the modbus protocol, after starting batch acquisition, all the measurement points with continuous addresses will be read in one read request, which can effectively improve the collection efficiency.
  1. Continuous Collection Address: After enabling continuous collection, the maximum number of measurement points allowed to be collected at one time should be configured.
  1. Timeout Settings:
  1. Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measurement point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  1. Communication time setting:
  1. Communication Interval Time: the interval time of packet interaction, that is, after receiving the response of the device, it will wait for a communication interval before sending the next request packet.
  2. Write function code settings:
  1. Coil Outputs Write Function Code: Supports 15 (to write multiple coil registers at once) and 05 (to write a single coil register at a time), 15 is used by default
  1. Holding Register Write Function Code: Supports 16 (write multiple hold registers at a time) and 06 (write a single hold register at a time), uses 16 by default
  1. Communication Message Settings:
  1. Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  1. Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  2. Address: the address of the measuring point. Support 0X (coil register), 1X (discrete register), 3X (input register), 4X (hold register)
  3. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
    1. BIT: 0 or 1
    2. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    3. INT: 16-bit signed integer
    4. BCD16:16-bit BCD code
    5. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    6. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    7. BCD32:32-bit BCD code
    8. FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    9. DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    10. ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
    11. LONG: 64-bit signed integer
    12. STRING: 8-bit string
  4. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE ,the maximum is 6 digits
  5. Size: The length of the STRING when the data type is String
  6. Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16 little endian, UTF-16 big endian, GB2312 little endian, GB2312 big endian. Only data type selection STRING is valid.
  7. Read Bit Data: The value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  8. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  9. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  10. Value mapping:When enabled, maps the 0 and 1 values of a BIT point to False and True
  11. Read and write permissions:
    1. Read: read-only, not writable
    2. Read/Write: Readable and writable
    3. Write: Only write, not read
  12. Mode:
    1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
    2. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
    3. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  13. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  14. Unit: Measuring point unit
  15. Description: Description of the measuring point
  16. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  17. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage strategy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  18. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  19. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  20. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
    3. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
    4. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
    5. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  21. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  22. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
    1. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
    2. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  23. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    4. PT: Additional PT multiplier
    5. CT: Additional CT magnification
  24. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
    1. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
    2. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.
    3. Enable Package Reporting: This field is visible when the controller enables group packet reporting. When the measuring point is enabled, it will report data in accordance with the packet reporting logic set by the controller in addition to the group reporting data

Modbus RTU

Modbus RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) is a commonly used serial communication protocol, which is used for data exchange and control operations between devices in industrial control systems. It is a variant of the Modbus protocol and usually runs on serial communication media (such as RS-232, RS-485). The Modbus RTU protocol supports a variety of function codes, including read/write hold registers, read/write coils, etc., which can be used to monitor and control remote devices. It has been widely used in the field of industrial control, because of its simple to use, low cost, reliable and stable characteristics, suitable for all sizes and types of industrial control systems.

Adding a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  2. Protocol: Select Modbus RTU
  3. Slave: The unique identification of the slave device
  4. Endpoint: Support RS485 and RS232, default use RS485
  5. Polling Interval: It is the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, it is set to 10S, then all the measurement points under the controller are polled every 10S
  6. Enable Multiple Polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain measurement points under the controller to use the polling cycle. This function can be used to distinguish the measurement points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  7. Polling Interval 2: An additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled.
  8. Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Advanced Settings:
  1. Byte order:
  1. 16 Bit Int: Both AB and BA are supported, and AB endianness is used by default
  1. 32 Bit Int: Supports ABCD, CDAB, DCBA, BADC, defaults to ABCD byte order
  1. 32 Bit Float: ABCD, CDAB, DCBA, BADC are supported, and ABCD byte order is used by default
  1. 64 Bit Int: supports ABCDEFGH, GHEFCDAB, HGEFDCBA, BADCFEHG, defaults to ABCDEFGH
  1. 64 Bit Float: ABCDEFGH, GHEFCDAB, HGEFDCBA, BADCFEHG are supported
  1. Byte order, ABCDEFGH is used by default
  1. Enable Package Reporting: Measurement points under controllers with this feature enabled can be configured for individual polling cycles (in milliseconds). Measurement points that have " Enable Package Reporting " enabled collect data according to the set polling cycle and frequency, and publish the aggregated data to the local MQTT topic "ds2/eventbus/south/upload/msec/data/{controllerName}". A quick function with the mode "Local Subscription Message Trigger" can be added on the "Custom Quick Functions" page to subscribe to this topic, where the grouped data can be processed within the quick function.Packet Data Polling Interval: The polling period for group packet data.
  2. Packet Data Polling Interval: The polling period for group packet data.
  3. Millisecond Data uploading: How many times the group packet data is polled, it is reported uniformly.
  4. Continuous Collection: Whether to carry out batch acquisition of the measurement points under the controller. For example, in the modbus protocol, after starting batch acquisition, all the measurement points with continuous addresses will be read in one read request, which can effectively improve the collection efficiency.
  1. Continuous Collection Address: After enabling continuous collection, the maximum number of measurement points allowed to be collected at one time should be configured.
  1. Timeout Settings:
  1. Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measurement point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  1. Communication time setting:
  1. Communication Interval Time: the interval time of packet interaction, that is, after receiving the response of the device, it will wait for a communication interval before sending the next request packet.
  1. Write function code settings:
  1. Coil Outputs Write Function Code: Supports 15 (to write multiple coil registers at once) and 05 (to write a single coil register at a time), 15 is used by default
  1. Holding Register Write Function Code: Supports 16 (write multiple hold registers at a time) and 06 (write a single hold register at a time), uses 16 by default
  1. Communication Message Settings:
  1. Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  1. Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  2. Address: the address of the measuring point. Support 0X (coil register), 1X (discrete register), 3X (input register), 4X (hold register)
  3. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
    1. BIT: 0 or 1
    2. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    3. INT: 16-bit signed integer
    4. BCD16:16-bit BCD code
    5. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    6. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    7. BCD32:32-bit BCD code
    8. FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    9. DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    10. ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
    11. LONG: 64-bit signed integer
    12. STRING: 8-bit string
  4. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE ,the maximum is 6 digits
  5. Size: The length of the STRING when the data type is String
  6. Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16 little endian, UTF-16 big endian, GB2312 little endian, GB2312 big endian. Only data type selection STRING is valid.
  7. Read Bit Data: The value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  8. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  9. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  10. Value mapping:When enabled, maps the 0 and 1 values of a BIT point to False and True
  11. Read and write permissions:
    1. Read: read-only, not writable
    2. Read/Write: Readable and writable
    3. Write: Only write, not read
  12. Mode:
    1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
    2. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
    3. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  13. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  14. Unit: Measuring point unit
  15. Description: Description of the measuring point
  16. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  17. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage strategy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  18. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  19. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  20. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
    3. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
    4. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
    5. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  21. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  22. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
    1. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
    2. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  23. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    4. PT: Additional PT multiplier
    5. CT: Additional CT magnification
  24. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
    1. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
    2. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.
    3. Enable Package Reporting: This field is visible when the controller enables group packet reporting. When the measuring point is enabled, it will report data in accordance with the packet reporting logic set by the controller in addition to the group reporting data

Modbus RTU over TCP

Modbus RTU over TCP refers to a way to wrap the Modbus RTU protocol in the TCP/IP network protocol for transmission. In this mode, Modbus RTU data frames are encapsulated in TCP packets and transmitted over the TCP/IP network. In Modbus RTU over TCP, Modbus RTU data frames are encapsulated in the data part of the TCP packet and transmitted over a TCP connection. After receiving the TCP packet, the receiver parses it out of the Modbus RTU data frame before processing and responding. This method retains the original characteristics of Modbus RTU protocol, while taking advantage of the reliability and flexibility provided by TCP/IP network, and is suitable for industrial control systems of all sizes and complexities.

Adding a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  2. Protocol: Select Modbus RTU over TCP
  3. IP Address: The IP address of the slave
  4. Port :The port information of the slave
  5. Slave: The unique identification of the slave device
  6. Endpoint: Support RS485 and RS232, default use RS485
  7. Polling Interval: It is the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, it is set to 10S, then all the measurement points under the controller are polled every 10S
  8. Enable Multiple Polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain measurement points under the controller to use the polling cycle. This function can be used to distinguish the measurement points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  9. Polling Interval 2: An additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled.
  10. Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Advanced Settings:
  1. Byte order:
  1. 16 Bit Int: Both AB and BA are supported, and AB endianness is used by default
  1. 32 Bit Int: Supports ABCD, CDAB, DCBA, BADC, defaults to ABCD byte order
  1. 32 Bit Float: ABCD, CDAB, DCBA, BADC are supported, and ABCD byte order is used by default
  1. 64 Bit Int: supports ABCDEFGH, GHEFCDAB, HGEFDCBA, BADCFEHG, defaults to ABCDEFGH
  1. 64 Bit Float: ABCDEFGH, GHEFCDAB, HGEFDCBA, BADCFEHG are supported
Byte order, ABCDEFGH is used by default
  1. Enable Package Reporting: Measurement points under controllers with this feature enabled can be configured for individual polling cycles (in milliseconds). Measurement points that have " Enable Package Reporting " enabled collect data according to the set polling cycle and frequency, and publish the aggregated data to the local MQTT topic "ds2/eventbus/south/upload/msec/data/{controllerName}". A quick function with the mode "Local Subscription Message Trigger" can be added on the "Custom Quick Functions" page to subscribe to this topic, where the grouped data can be processed within the quick function.Packet Data Polling Interval: The polling period for group packet data.
  2. Packet Data Polling Interval: The polling period for group packet data.
  3. Millisecond Data uploading: How many times the group packet data is polled, it is reported uniformly.
  4. Continuous Collection: Whether to carry out batch acquisition of the measurement points under the controller. For example, in the modbus protocol, after starting batch acquisition, all the measurement points with continuous addresses will be read in one read request, which can effectively improve the collection efficiency.
  1. Continuous Collection Address: After enabling continuous collection, the maximum number of measurement points allowed to be collected at one time should be configured.
  1. Timeout Settings:
  1. Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measurement point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  1. Communication time setting:
  1. Communication Interval Time: the interval time of packet interaction, that is, after receiving the response of the device, it will wait for a communication interval before sending the next request packet.
  1. Write function code settings:
  1. Coil Outputs Write Function Code: Supports 15 (to write multiple coil registers at once) and 05 (to write a single coil register at a time), 15 is used by default
  1. Holding Register Write Function Code: Supports 16 (write multiple hold registers at a time) and 06 (write a single hold register at a time), uses 16 by default
  1. Communication Message Settings:
  1. Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  1. Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  2. Address: the address of the measuring point. Support 0X (coil register), 1X (discrete register), 3X (input register), 4X (hold register)
  3. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
    1. BIT: 0 or 1
    2. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    3. INT: 16-bit signed integer
    4. BCD16:16-bit BCD code
    5. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    6. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    7. BCD32:32-bit BCD code
    8. FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    9. DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    10. ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
    11. LONG: 64-bit signed integer
    12. STRING: 8-bit string
  4. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE ,the maximum is 6 digits
  5. Size: The length of the STRING when the data type is String
  6. Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16 little endian, UTF-16 big endian, GB2312 little endian, GB2312 big endian. Only data type selection STRING is valid.
  7. Read Bit Data: The value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  8. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  9. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  10. Value mapping:When enabled, maps the 0 and 1 values of a BIT point to False and True
  11. Read and write permissions:
    1. Read: read-only, not writable
    2. Read/Write: Readable and writable
    3. Write: Only write, not read
  12. Mode:
    1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
    2. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
    3. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  13. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  14. Unit: Measuring point unit
  15. Description: Description of the measuring point
  16. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  17. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage strategy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  18. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  19. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  20. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
    3. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
    4. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
    5. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  21. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  22. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
    1. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
    2. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  23. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    4. PT: Additional PT multiplier
    5. CT: Additional CT magnification
  24. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
    1. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
    2. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.
    3. Enable Package Reporting: This field is visible when the controller enables group packet reporting. When the measuring point is enabled, it will report data in accordance with the packet reporting logic set by the controller in addition to the group reporting data

Modbus TCP

Modbus TCP is an Ethernet-based version of the Modbus protocol that uses the TCP/IP protocol for communication. Unlike the traditional Modbus RTU protocol, Modbus TCP allows devices to communicate directly over Ethernet without any dedicated hardware or communication interfaces. Therefore, Modbus TCP has a higher communication rate and a wider range of applications.

Adding a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  2. Protocol: Select Modbus TCP
  3. IP Address: The IP address of the slave
  4. Port :The port information of the slave
  5. Slave: The unique identification of the slave device
  6. Endpoint: Support RS485 and RS232, default use RS485
  7. Polling Interval: It is the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, it is set to 10S, then all the measurement points under the controller are polled every 10S
  8. Enable Multiple Polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain measurement points under the controller to use the polling cycle. This function can be used to distinguish the measurement points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  9. Polling Interval 2: An additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled.
  10. Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Advanced Settings:
  1. Byte order:
  1. 16 Bit Int: Both AB and BA are supported, and AB endianness is used by default
  1. 32 Bit Int: Supports ABCD, CDAB, DCBA, BADC, defaults to ABCD byte order
  1. 32 Bit Float: ABCD, CDAB, DCBA, BADC are supported, and ABCD byte order is used by default
  1. 64 Bit Int: supports ABCDEFGH, GHEFCDAB, HGEFDCBA, BADCFEHG, defaults to ABCDEFGH
  1. 64 Bit Float: ABCDEFGH, GHEFCDAB, HGEFDCBA, BADCFEHG are supported
Byte order, ABCDEFGH is used by default
  1. Enable Package Reporting: Measurement points under controllers with this feature enabled can be configured for individual polling cycles (in milliseconds). Measurement points that have " Enable Package Reporting " enabled collect data according to the set polling cycle and frequency, and publish the aggregated data to the local MQTT topic "ds2/eventbus/south/upload/msec/data/{controllerName}". A quick function with the mode "Local Subscription Message Trigger" can be added on the "Custom Quick Functions" page to subscribe to this topic, where the grouped data can be processed within the quick function.Packet Data Polling Interval: The polling period for group packet data.
  2. Packet Data Polling Interval: The polling period for group packet data.
  3. Millisecond Data uploading: How many times the group packet data is polled, it is reported uniformly.
  4. Continuous Collection: Whether to carry out batch acquisition of the measurement points under the controller. For example, in the modbus protocol, after starting batch acquisition, all the measurement points with continuous addresses will be read in one read request, which can effectively improve the collection efficiency.
  1. Continuous Collection Address: After enabling continuous collection, the maximum number of measurement points allowed to be collected at one time should be configured.
  1. Timeout Settings:
  1. Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measurement point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  1. Communication time setting:
  1. Communication Interval Time: the interval time of packet interaction, that is, after receiving the response of the device, it will wait for a communication interval before sending the next request packet.
  1. Write function code settings:
  1. Coil Outputs Write Function Code: Supports 15 (to write multiple coil registers at once) and 05 (to write a single coil register at a time), 15 is used by default
  1. Holding Register Write Function Code: Supports 16 (write multiple hold registers at a time) and 06 (write a single hold register at a time), uses 16 by default
  1. Communication Message Settings:
  1. Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measurement points
  1. Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  2. Address: the address of the measuring point. Support 0X (coil register), 1X (discrete register), 3X (input register), 4X (hold register)
  3. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
    1. BIT: 0 or 1
    2. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    3. INT: 16-bit signed integer
    4. BCD16:16-bit BCD code
    5. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    6. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    7. BCD32:32-bit BCD code
    8. FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    9. DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    10. ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
    11. LONG: 64-bit signed integer
    12. STRING: 8-bit string
  4. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE ,the maximum is 6 digits
  5. Size: The length of the STRING when the data type is String
  6. Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16 little endian, UTF-16 big endian, GB2312 little endian, GB2312 big endian. Only data type selection STRING is valid.
  7. Read Bit Data: The value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  8. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  9. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  10. Value mapping:When enabled, maps the 0 and 1 values of a BIT point to False and True
  11. Read and write permissions:
    1. Read: read-only, not writable
    2. Read/Write: Readable and writable
    3. Write: Only write, not read
  12. Mode:
    1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
    2. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
    3. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  13. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  14. Unit: Measuring point unit
  15. Description: Description of the measuring point
  16. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  17. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage strategy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  18. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  19. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  20. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
    3. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
    4. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
    5. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  21. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  22. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
    1. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
    2. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  23. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    4. PT: Additional PT multiplier
    5. CT: Additional CT magnification
  24. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
    1. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
    2. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.
    3. Enable Package Reporting: This field is visible when the controller enables group packet reporting. When the measuring point is enabled, it will report data in accordance with the packet reporting logic set by the controller in addition to the group reporting data

Modbus RTU Slave

A Modbus RTU Slave is a party that exists as a passive device in the Modbus RTU communication protocol, which receives and responds to commands from the Master and provides data to the master.

In the controller of the gateway, the Modbus RTU Slave is used as a read-only collector, and the registers in the Slave are configured to passively wait for the data packets sent by the master.

Adding a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  1. Protocol: Modbus RTU Slave is selected
  1. Slave: The unique identification of the slave device
  1. Endpoint: Support RS485 and RS232, default use RS485
  1. Status expiration time: When the controller or the measurement point does not receive a new message within the specified time, the state will be automatically updated to offline
  1. Advanced Settings:
  1. Byte order:
  1. 16 Bit Int: Both AB and BA are supported, and AB endianness is used by default
  1. 32 Bit Int: Supports ABCD, CDAB, DCBA, BADC, defaults to ABCD byte order
  1. 32 Bit Float: ABCD, CDAB, DCBA, BADC are supported, and ABCD byte order is used by default
  1. 64 Bit Int: supports ABCDEFGH, GHEFCDAB, HGEFDCBA, BADCFEHG, defaults to ABCDEFGH
  1. 64 Bit Float: ABCDEFGH, GHEFCDAB, HGEFDCBA, BADCFEHG are supported
Byte order, ABCDEFGH is used by default
  1. Communication Message Settings:
  1. Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measurement points

  1. Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  1. Address: the address of the measuring point. Support 0X (coil register), 4X (hold register)
  1. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
  1. BIT: 0 or 1
  1. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
  1. INT: 16-bit signed integer
  1. BCD16:16-bit BCD code
  1. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
  1. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
  1. BCD32:32-bit BCD code
  1. FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
  1. DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
  1. ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
  1. LONG: 64-bit signed integer
  1. STRING: 8-bit string
  1. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE ,the maximum is 6 digits
  1. Size: The length of the STRING when the data type is String
  1. Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16 little endian, UTF-16 big endian, GB2312 little endian, GB2312 big endian. Only data type selection STRING is valid.
  1. Read Bit Data: The value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  1. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  1. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  1. Value mapping:When enabled, maps the 0 and 1 values of a BIT point to False and True
  1. Read and write permissions:
  1. Read: read-only, not writable
  1. Read/Write: Readable and writable
  1. Write: Only write, not read
  1. Mode:
  1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
  1. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
  1. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  1. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  1. Unit: Measuring point unit
  1. Description: Description of the measuring point
  1. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  1. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage strategy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  1. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  1. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  1. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
  1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
  1. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
  1. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
  1. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
  1. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  1. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
  1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
  1. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
  1. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  1. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
  1. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
  1. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  1. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
  1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
  1. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
  1. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  1. PT: Additional PT multiplier
  1. CT: Additional CT magnification
  1. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
  1. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
  1. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.
  1. Enable Package Reporting: This field is visible when the controller enables group packet reporting. When the measuring point is enabled, it will report data in accordance with the packet reporting logic set by the controller in addition to the group reporting data

MITSUBISHI

*FX Links

MITSUBISHI FX Links is a communication protocol for connecting MITSUBISHI FX Series Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs).FX Links is typically used to connect a PC, HMI (Human Machine Interface) or other device to communicate with a MITSUBISHI FX Series PLC.

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select *FX Links
  • Station No: consistent with the device. Range: 0-255
  • Communication Mode: Support RS485 and RS232,default use RS485
  • Sum Check Code: If the PLC device is configured with the relevant sum check information, the controller and the device remain consistent.
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Advanced Settings:
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  • Communication time setting:
    • Communication Interval Time: The interval time between message exchanges, i.e., after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval before sending the next request message.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measuring point address,Address example: M0.
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
    • LONG: 64-bit signed integer
    • STRING: 8-bit string
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

*FX Links over TCP

FX Links over TCP is a communication method that encapsulates MITSUBISHI's FX Links protocol for transmission over a TCP/IP network. Normally, the FX Links protocol is based on serial communication, but with FX Links over TCP, it is possible to connect to and communicate with a MITSUBISHI FX-series Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) over a TCP/IP network.

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select *FX Links over TCP
  • Station No: consistent with the device. Range: 0-255
  • Sum Check Code: If the PLC device is configured with the relevant sum check information, the controller and the device remain consistent.
  • IP Address: IP address of the device
  • Port number: port information of the device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Advanced Settings:
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
    • Connect Timeout:Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measuring point address,Address example: M0.
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
    • LONG: 64-bit signed integer
    • STRING: 8-bit string
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

*FX Serial over TCP

A communication method that encapsulates the communication data of MITSUBISHI FX series programmable logic controllers (PLCs) using serial communication protocols (such as RS-232 and RS-485) and transmits it over a TCP/IP network.

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select *FX Serial over TCP
  • IP Address: IP address of the device
  • Port number: port information of the device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Version New:The read telegrams of the new version of the protocol are adapted and configured according to the PLC device information
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
    • Connect Timeout:Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measuring point address,Address example: M0.
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
    • LONG: 64-bit signed integer
    • STRING: 8-bit string
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

MC 1E

Mitsubishi PLC MC Protocol is a protocol used for data communication between Mitsubishi PLC and the host computer, also known as Mitsubishi Communication Protocol.This protocol supports various communication methods such as serial port and Ethernet, and can realise real-time data collection and exchange.

1E frame, the message format of the A-series Ethernet interface module. In Ethernet communication, A-1E is an earlier version of communication with a limited range of operations on the address (D0~D6143, D9000~D9255 in the data register area).

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select MC 1E
  • Communication Data Code: communication message format, support binary and ASCII, default is Binary
  • Communication Mode: TCP only
  • IP Address: IP address of the device
  • Port number: port information of the device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
    • Connect Timeout:Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measuring point address,Address example: M0.
  • Address Type:Support
    • M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register
    • X: Input relay,
    • Y: Output Relay, Y: Output Relay, Y: Output Relay, Y: Output Relay
    • SM: SM Special Relay,
    • S: Stepping relay,
    • L: Latching Relay, L: Latching Relay, L: Latching Relay, L: Latching Relay
    • F: Alarms.
    • V: Edge Relay, V: Edge Relay, V: Edge Relay, V: Edge Relay
    • B: Link Relay.
    • SB: Special link relays,
    • DX: Direct Input,
    • DY: Direct Output,
    • TS: Timer contact,
    • TC: Timer Coil.
    • SS: Accumulation timer contact,
    • SC: Totalising Timer Coil,
    • CS: Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts
    • CC: Counter Coil, Counter Coil, Counter Coil, Counter Coil
    • D: data register, the
    • SD: special data register, the
    • W: link register,
    • SW: special link register, the
    • R: file register, the
    • Z: Variable address registers, the
    • ZR: ZR file register, the
    • TN: Timer value at that time.
    • SN: the accumulated timer value at that time.
    • CN: Counter current value
  • Please note if the address type is the following:
    • TS,TC,SS,CS,CC: only BIT data types are supported.
    • D,SD,W,SW,R,Z,ZR,TN,SN,CN do not support the BIT data type.
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
    • LONG: 64-bit signed integer
    • STRING: 8-bit string
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

MC 3E

Mitsubishi PLC MC Protocol is a protocol used for data communication between Mitsubishi PLC and the host computer, also known as Mitsubishi Communication Protocol.This protocol supports various communication methods such as serial port and Ethernet, and can realise real-time data collection and exchange.

3E frame, the message format of QnA series Ethernet interface module, is compatible with the message format of SLMP. qna-3E can access the D0~D12287 data

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select MC 3E
  • Communication Data Code: communication message format, support binary and ASCII, default is Binary
  • Communication Mode: Support TCP and UDP
  • IP Address: IP address of the device
  • Port number: port information of the device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
    • Connect Timeout:Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measuring point address,Address example: M0.
  • Address Type:Support
    • M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register
    • X: Input relay,
    • Y: Output Relay, Y: Output Relay, Y: Output Relay, Y: Output Relay
    • SM: SM Special Relay,
    • S: Stepping relay,
    • L: Latching Relay, L: Latching Relay, L: Latching Relay, L: Latching Relay
    • F: Alarms.
    • V: Edge Relay, V: Edge Relay, V: Edge Relay, V: Edge Relay
    • B: Link Relay.
    • SB: Special link relays,
    • DX: Direct Input,
    • DY: Direct Output,
    • TS: Timer contact,
    • TC: Timer Coil.
    • SS: Accumulation timer contact,
    • SC: Totalising Timer Coil,
    • CS: Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts
    • CC: Counter Coil, Counter Coil, Counter Coil, Counter Coil
    • D: data register, the
    • SD: special data register, the
    • W: link register,
    • SW: special link register, the
    • R: file register, the
    • Z: Variable address registers, the
    • ZR: ZR file register, the
    • TN: Timer value at that time.
    • SN: the accumulated timer value at that time.
    • CN: Counter current value
  • Please note if the address type is the following:
    • TS,TC,SS,CS,CC: only BIT data types are supported.
    • D,SD,W,SW,R,Z,ZR,TN,SN,CN do not support the BIT data type.
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
    • LONG: 64-bit signed integer
    • STRING: 8-bit string
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

MC 3C

3C Frame, QnA Series Serial Communication Module Special Protocol (Qna Frame). Mitsubishi PLC MC Protocol is a protocol used for data communication between Mitsubishi PLC and the host computer, also known as Mitsubishi Communication Protocol.This protocol supports various communication methods such as serial port and Ethernet, which enables real-time data collection and exchange.

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select MC 3C
  • Pattern: Supports Pattern 1 (otc), Pattern 1 (hex),Pattern 4 (otc),Pattern 4 (hex)
  • Station No: consistent with the device. Range: 0-255
  • Communication Mode: Support RS485 and RS232,default use RS485
  • Sum Check Code: If the PLC device is configured with the relevant sum check information, the controller and the device remain consistent.
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  • Communication time setting:
    • Communication Interval Time: The interval time between message exchanges, i.e., after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval before sending the next request message.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measuring point address,Address example: M0.
  • Address Type:Support
    • M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register
    • X: Input relay,
    • Y: Output Relay, Y: Output Relay, Y: Output Relay, Y: Output Relay
    • SM: SM Special Relay,
    • S: Stepping relay,
    • L: Latching Relay, L: Latching Relay, L: Latching Relay, L: Latching Relay
    • F: Alarms.
    • V: Edge Relay, V: Edge Relay, V: Edge Relay, V: Edge Relay
    • B: Link Relay.
    • SB: Special link relays,
    • DX: Direct Input,
    • DY: Direct Output,
    • TS: Timer contact,
    • TC: Timer Coil.
    • SS: Accumulation timer contact,
    • SC: Totalising Timer Coil,
    • CS: Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts
    • CC: Counter Coil, Counter Coil, Counter Coil, Counter Coil
    • D: data register, the
    • SD: special data register, the
    • W: link register,
    • SW: special link register, the
    • R: file register, the
    • Z: Variable address registers, the
    • ZR: ZR file register, the
    • TN: Timer value at that time.
    • SN: the accumulated timer value at that time.
    • CN: Counter current value
  • Please note if the address type is the following:
    • TS,TC,SS,CS,CC: only BIT data types are supported.
    • D,SD,W,SW,R,Z,ZR,TN,SN,CN do not support the BIT data type.
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
    • LONG: 64-bit signed integer
    • STRING: 8-bit string
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

MC 3C over TCP

MC 3C over TCP is a mode in which the MC 3C protocol is encapsulated in a TCP/IP network protocol for transmission. In this mode, MC 3C data frames are encapsulated in TCP messages and transmitted over a TCP/IP network.

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select MC 3C over TCP
  • IP Address: IP address of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • Pattern: Supports Pattern 1 (otc), Pattern 1 (hex),Pattern 4 (otc),Pattern 4 (hex)
  • Station No: consistent with the device. Range: 0-255
  • Sum Check Code: If the PLC device is configured with the relevant sum check information, the controller and the device remain consistent.
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
    • Connect Timeout:Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measuring point address,Address example: M0.
  • Address Type:Support
    • M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register
    • X: Input relay,
    • Y: Output Relay, Y: Output Relay, Y: Output Relay, Y: Output Relay
    • SM: SM Special Relay,
    • S: Stepping relay,
    • L: Latching Relay, L: Latching Relay, L: Latching Relay, L: Latching Relay
    • F: Alarms.
    • V: Edge Relay, V: Edge Relay, V: Edge Relay, V: Edge Relay
    • B: Link Relay.
    • SB: Special link relays,
    • DX: Direct Input,
    • DY: Direct Output,
    • TS: Timer contact,
    • TC: Timer Coil.
    • SS: Accumulation timer contact,
    • SC: Totalising Timer Coil,
    • CS: Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts
    • CC: Counter Coil, Counter Coil, Counter Coil, Counter Coil
    • D: data register, the
    • SD: special data register, the
    • W: link register,
    • SW: special link register, the
    • R: file register, the
    • Z: Variable address registers, the
    • ZR: ZR file register, the
    • TN: Timer value at that time.
    • SN: the accumulated timer value at that time.
    • CN: Counter current value
  • Please note if the address type is the following:
    • TS,TC,SS,CS,CC: only BIT data types are supported.
    • D,SD,W,SW,R,Z,ZR,TN,SN,CN do not support the BIT data type.
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
    • LONG: 64-bit signed integer
    • STRING: 8-bit string
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

*MC R

MC Protocol for Mitsubishi's R Series. Mitsubishi PLC MC Protocol is a protocol used for data communication between Mitsubishi PLC and the host computer, also known as Mitsubishi Communication Protocol.This protocol supports various communication methods such as serial port and Ethernet, which can realise real-time data collection and exchange.

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select *MC R
  • IP Address: IP address of the device
  • Port No: port information of the device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
    • Connect Timeout:Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measuring point address,Address example: M0.
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
    • LONG: 64-bit signed integer
    • STRING: 8-bit string
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

MITSUBISHI Programe Port

The Programe Port provides a physical connection, usually a port, through which communication with a Mitsubishi PLC can take place. This programming port is the interface used to connect the PLC to a programming device such as a programmer or PC for programming, debugging and data transfer.

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select MITSUBISHI Programe Port
  • Communication Mode: support RS485 and RS232, default use RS485
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Version New: the read telegrams of the new version of the protocol are adjusted and configured according to the PLC device information
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  • Communication time setting:
    • Communication Interval Time: The interval time between message interactions, i.e., after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval time before sending the next request message.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measuring point address,Address example: M0.
  • Address Type:Support
    • M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register, M: Internal Register
    • X: Input relay,
    • Y: Output Relay, Y: Output Relay, Y: Output Relay, Y: Output Relay
    • SM: SM Special Relay,
    • S: Stepping relay,
    • L: Latching Relay, L: Latching Relay, L: Latching Relay, L: Latching Relay
    • F: Alarms.
    • V: Edge Relay, V: Edge Relay, V: Edge Relay, V: Edge Relay
    • B: Link Relay.
    • SB: Special link relays,
    • DX: Direct Input,
    • DY: Direct Output,
    • TS: Timer contact,
    • TC: Timer Coil.
    • SS: Accumulation timer contact,
    • SC: Totalising Timer Coil,
    • CS: Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts, Counter Contacts
    • CC: Counter Coil, Counter Coil, Counter Coil, Counter Coil
    • D: data register, the
    • SD: special data register, the
    • W: link register,
    • SW: special link register, the
    • R: file register, the
    • Z: Variable address registers, the
    • ZR: ZR file register, the
    • TN: Timer value at that time.
    • SN: the accumulated timer value at that time.
    • CN: Counter current value
  • Please note if the address type is the following:
    • TS,TC,SS,CS,CC: only BIT data types are supported.
    • D,SD,W,SW,R,Z,ZR,TN,SN,CN do not support the BIT data type.
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
    • LONG: 64-bit signed integer
    • STRING: 8-bit string
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

OMRON

*C-Mode

OMRON's C-Mode is a communication protocol specific to its industrial automation devices.C-Mode is a protocol used by OMRON for communication between devices, and is typically used to connect OMRON's PLCs (Programmable Logic Controllers) or other devices for data transfer and communication.

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select *C-Mode
  • Station No: consistent with the PLC device. Range: 0-255
  • Communication Mode: Support RS485 and RS232,default use RS485
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Byte Order:
    • 32 Bit Int: supports ABCD/CDAB/DCBA/BADC
    • String reversal: support AB / BA, for example, the string "1234" if reversed to BA after the "2143".
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  • Communication time setting:
    • Communication Interval Time: The interval time between message exchanges, i.e., after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval before sending the next request message.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measuring point address,Address example: TIM0.
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

*C-Mode over TCP

OMRON industrial automation equipment uses the C-Mode communication protocol for communication using a TCP/IP network. In this case, packets of the C-Mode communication protocol are encapsulated in TCP/IP packets and transmitted over the TCP/IP network. This communication method enables OMRON equipment to be remotely monitored, controlled, and data exchanged over the network.

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select *C-Mode over TCP
  • Station No: consistent with the PLC device. Range: 0-255
  • IP Address: IP address of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Byte Order:
    • 32 Bit Int: supports ABCD/CDAB/DCBA/BADC
    • String reversal: support AB / BA, for example, the string "1234" if reversed to BA after the "2143".
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  • Communication time setting:
    • Communication Interval Time: The interval time between message exchanges, i.e., after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval before sending the next request message.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measuring point address,Address example: TIM0.
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

EtherNet/IP (CompactLogix)

EtherNet/IP is an Ethernet-based industrial communication protocol that allows real-time data exchange and communication between devices.CompactLogix PLCs support the EtherNet/IP protocol through the Ethernet interface, which allows them to communicate with other devices that support the same protocol (e.g. HMIs, SCADA systems, drives, etc.).

Adding Controllers
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: select EtherNet/IP (CompactLogix)
  • IP Address: IP address of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling Interval and select certain points under the controller to use that polling Interval. This feature can be used to differentiate between test points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling Interval (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling Interval are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measuring points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measuring point address,Address example: A1.
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

EtherNet/IP (Unconnected)

In EtherNet/IP, the Unconnected method allows data communication between devices in a connectionless manner. This means that the sender can send data directly to the receiver without having to establish a connection beforehand. Each message contains the identifier of the target device as well as the data to be transferred, and the receiver can process the message as soon as it is received.

Adding Controllers
  • Name: name of the controller, unique in the list of controllers across the gateway
  • Protocol: select EtherNet/IP (Unconnected)
  • IP Address: IP address of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval (in seconds) for collecting data, for example, if it is set to 10S, all the measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S.
  • Enable Multiple Polling Interval: When enabled, you can configure an additional polling Interval and select certain points under the controller to use that polling Interval. This feature can be used to differentiate between test points that require high and low frequency acquisition, making efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: i.e. the additional polling Interval (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling Interval are enabled
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller.

Advanced Settings:

  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: When collecting measuring points, after initiating a read request to the device, the device responds to the timeout time, if the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still a failure of this acquisition.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
    • Slot: PLC slot number
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measuring point address,Address example: A1.
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

FINS TCP

FINS is a communication protocol used by Omron industrial automation equipment. It is a protocol used to communicate between Omron devices, including PLCs (Programmable Logic Controllers), HMIs (Human Machine Interfaces), and so on.

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select FINS TCP
  • IP Address: IP address of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • Unit Number: PLC unit number, default is 0
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Byte Order:
    • 32 Bit Int: supports ABCD/CDAB/DCBA/BADC
    • String reversal: support AB / BA, for example, the string "1234" if reversed to BA after the "2143".
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  • Communication time setting:
    • Communication Interval Time: The interval time between message exchanges, i.e., after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval before sending the next request message.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Register Type: Support
    • D: Address type used to access data registers to store integer values
    • C: type of address used to access control registers that store control information, the
    • W: address type used to access the link registers to store the address of the instruction, the
    • H: Address type for accessing high-speed timers/counters for high-speed timing and counting,
    • A: for access to auxiliary relays, i.e. logic function elements, the
    • E0-EF:Access to the extended registers extends the PLC's address space.
  • Register Address: Address of the measuring point.
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

FINS UDP

FINS (Factory Interface Network Service) is a protocol for communication between Omron industrial automation devices. In contrast to FINS TCP, FINS UDP is a communication method that uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) as the transport layer, which is a connectionless, unreliable transport protocol that, unlike TCP, does not establish a connection and does not guarantee the reliability or sequentiality of the data. FINS UDP allows devices to communicate with each other via the UDP protocol, which is suitable for application scenarios where the requirements for real-time are high but the requirements for data reliability are relatively low. requirements but relatively low data reliability requirements.

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select FINS UDP
  • IP Address: IP address of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • Unit Number: PLC unit number, default is 0
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Byte Order:
    • 32 Bit Int: supports ABCD/CDAB/DCBA/BADC
    • String reversal: support AB / BA, for example, the string "1234" if reversed to BA after the "2143".
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  • Communication time setting:
    • Communication Interval Time: The interval time between message exchanges, i.e., after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval before sending the next request message.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
    • conversion is expected.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Register Type: Support
    • D: Address type used to access data registers to store integer values
    • C: type of address used to access control registers that store control information, the
    • W: address type used to access the link registers to store the address of the instruction, the
    • H: Address type for accessing high-speed timers/counters for high-speed timing and counting,
    • A: for access to auxiliary relays, i.e. logic function elements, the
    • E0-EF:Access to the extended registers extends the PLC's address space.
  • Register Address: Address of the measuring point.
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

HostLink

HostLink is a serial communication protocol commonly found in Omron industrial automation equipment. It is a communication protocol used to connect between Omron PLCs (Programmable Logic Controllers) and other devices such as PCs, HMIs, etc. The HostLink protocol typically communicates via a serial interface such as RS-232, RS-422, or RS-485. It defines the data format, transmission protocol, and communication specifications for communication to ensure compatibility and stability between devices.

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select HostLink
  • Station No: consistent with the PLC device. Range: 0-255
  • Communication Mode: Support RS485 and RS232,default use RS485
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Byte Order:
    • 32 Bit Int: supports ABCD/CDAB/DCBA/BADC
    • String reversal: support AB / BA, for example, the string "1234" if reversed to BA after the "2143".
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  • Communication time setting:
    • Communication Interval Time: The interval time between message exchanges, i.e., after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval before sending the next request message.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Register Type: Support
    • D: Address type used to access data registers to store integer values
    • C: type of address used to access control registers that store control information, the
    • W: address type used to access the link registers to store the address of the instruction, the
    • H: Address type for accessing high-speed timers/counters for high-speed timing and counting,
    • A: for access to auxiliary relays, i.e. logic function elements, the
    • E0-EF:Access to the extended registers extends the PLC's address space.
  • Register Address: Address of the measuring point.
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

*HostLink over TCP

HostLink over TCP refers to emulating the HostLink protocol for communication over a TCP/IP network. Normally, HostLink is carried out through serial communication, but by encapsulating HostLink packets in TCP packets, HostLink communication over TCP/IP network can be realised.

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select *HostLink over TCP
  • Station No: consistent with the PLC device. Range: 0-255
  • IP Address: IP address of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Byte Order:
    • 32 Bit Int: supports ABCD/CDAB/DCBA/BADC
    • String reversal: support AB / BA, for example, the string "1234" if reversed to BA after the "2143".
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Address of the measurement point. Address example: TIM0.
  • Data types: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

OPC

OPC DA

OPC DA stands for "OPC Data Access" and is a communication specification for enabling real-time data communication and exchange. It is based on Microsoft's COM/DCOM (Component Object Model/Distributed Component Object Model) technology, which aims to provide a standardized method for the development of OPC DA. It enables industrial automation equipment from different manufacturers to exchange data with OPC DA compatible software.

Adding controllers
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  1. Protocol: Select OPC DA
  1. IP Address: The IP address of the device
  1. Host Name: The server name defined when installing and configuring that server
  1. Polling Interval: is the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S
  1. Enable Multiple Polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain measurement points under the controller to use the polling cycle. This function can be used to distinguish the measurement points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  1. Polling Interval 2: An additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled.
  1. Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Advanced Settings:
  1. Enable package Reporting: Measurement points under controllers with this feature enabled can be configured for individual polling cycles (in milliseconds). Measurement points that have " Enable Package Reporting " enabled collect data according to the set polling cycle and frequency, and publish the aggregated data to the local MQTT topic "ds2/eventbus/south/upload/msec/data/{controllerName}". A quick function with the mode "Local Subscription Message Trigger" can be added on the "Custom Quick Functions" page to subscribe to this topic, where the grouped data can be processed within the quick function.Packet Data Polling Interval: The polling period for group packet data.
  1. Packet Data Polling Interval: The polling period for group packet data.
  1. Millisecond Data uploading: How many times the group packet data is polled, it is reported uniformly.
  1. Continuous Collection: Whether to carry out batch acquisition of the measurement points under the controller. For example, in the modbus protocol, after starting batch acquisition, all the measurement points with continuous addresses will be read in one read request, which can effectively improve the collection efficiency.
  1. Continuous Collection Address: After enabling batch acquisition, the maximum number of measurement points allowed to be collected at one time should be configured.
  1. Timeout Settings:
  1. Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measurement point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  1. Connection Timeout: the timeout time for establishing the connection.
  1. Communication Message Settings:
  1. Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  1. Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  1. Address: the address of the measuring point. 
  1. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
  1. BIT: 0 or 1
  1. BYTE: An 8-bit unsigned number
  1. SINT: 8-bit signed number
  1. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
  1. INT: 16-bit signed integer
  1. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
  1. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
  1. FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
  1. DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
  1. ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
  1. LONG: 64-bit signed integer
  1. STRING: 8-bit string
  1. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE ,the maximum is 6 digits
  1. Size: The length of the STRING when the data type is String
  1. Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16 little endian, UTF-16 big endian, GB2312 little endian, GB2312 big endian. Only data type selection STRING is valid.
  1. Read Bit Data: The value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  1. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  1. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  1. Value mapping:When enabled, maps the 0 and 1 values of a BIT point to False and True
  1. Read and write permissions:
  1. Read: read-only, not writable
  1. Read/Write: Readable and writable
  1. Write: Only write, not read
  1. Mode:
  1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
  1. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
  1. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  1. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  1. Unit: Measuring point unit
  1. Description: Description of the measuring point
  1. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  1. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage strategy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  1. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  1. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  1. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
  1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
  1. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
  1. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
  1. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
  1. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  1. Offset And Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
  1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
  1. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
  1. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  1. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
  1. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
  1. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  1. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
  1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
  1. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
  1. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  1. PT: Additional PT multiplier
  1. CT: Additional CT magnification
  1. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
  1. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
  1. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.
  1. Enable Package Reporting: This field is visible when the controller enables group packet reporting. When the measuring point is enabled, it will report data in accordance with the packet reporting logic set by the controller in addition to the group reporting data

OPC UA

OPC UA is a machine-to-machine communication protocol for industrial automation, developed and maintained by the OPC Foundation. OPC UA provides a standardized way to enable different devices and systems to communicate with each other.

Adding a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  1. Protocol: Select OPC UA
  1. Services URL: Fill in the server address plus port, for example: 192.168.2.1:4801
  1. Polling Interval: is the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all measurement points under the controller will be polled every 10S
  1. Enable Multiple Polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain measurement points under the controller to use the polling cycle. This function can be used to distinguish the measurement points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  1. Polling Interval 2: An additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled.
  1. Authentication: Support anonymous login, user name and password, authentication certificate three ways. The default is anonymous login.
  1. Security Policy:
  1. Message security mode (Note: when the security policy is None, message security mode can only be None; When the security policy is automatic detection, all three security modes can be selected; For other security policies, the message security mode can be selected among signature, signature and encryption.)
  1. Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Advanced Settings:
  1. Enable package Reporting: Measurement points under controllers with this feature enabled can be configured for individual polling cycles (in milliseconds). Measurement points that have " Enable Package Reporting " enabled collect data according to the set polling cycle and frequency, and publish the aggregated data to the local MQTT topic "ds2/eventbus/south/upload/msec/data/{controllerName}". A quick function with the mode "Local Subscription Message Trigger" can be added on the "Custom Quick Functions" page to subscribe to this topic, where the grouped data can be processed within the quick function.Packet Data Polling Interval: The polling period for group packet data.
  1. Packet Data Polling Interval: The polling period for group packet data.
  1. Millisecond Data uploading: How many times the group packet data is polled, it is reported uniformly.
  1. Continuous Collection: Whether to carry out batch acquisition of the measurement points under the controller. For example, in the modbus protocol, after starting batch acquisition, all the measurement points with continuous addresses will be read in one read request, which can effectively improve the collection efficiency.
    1. Continuous Collection Address: After enabling batch acquisition, the maximum number of measurement points allowed to be collected at one time should be configured.
  1. Timeout Settings:
  1. Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measurement point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  1. Connection Timeout: the timeout time for establishing the connection.
  1. Communication Message Settings:
  1. Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  1. Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  1. NS(Namespace Index):An integer value used to identify and distinguish different namespaces, ranging from 0-65535
  1. Address Type:String and Number are supported
  1. Identifier:If the address type is String, you can fill in any string; If it is a Number, integer values are supported
  1. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
  1. BIT: 0 or 1
  1. BYTE: An 8-bit unsigned number
  1. SINT: 8-bit signed number
  1. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
  1. INT: 16-bit signed integer
  1. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
  1. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
  1. FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
  1. DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
  1. ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
  1. LONG: 64-bit signed integer
  1. STRING: 8-bit string
  1. Is Array:Enable this feature if the measuring point is of array type.
  1. Array Index:Represents the position of the current point in the array, for example, the first element is indexed at 0, the second element is indexed at 1, and so on.
  1. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE ,the maximum is 6 digits
  1. Size: The length of the STRING when the data type is String
  1. Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16 little endian, UTF-16 big endian, GB2312 little endian, GB2312 big endian. Only data type selection STRING is valid.
  1. Read Bit Data: The value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  1. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  1. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  1. Value mapping:When enabled, maps the 0 and 1 values of a BIT point to False and True
  1. Read and write permissions:
  1. Read: read-only, not writable
  1. Read/Write: Readable and writable
  1. Mode:
  1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
  1. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
  1. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  1. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  1. Unit: Measuring point unit
  1. Description: Description of the measuring point
  1. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  1. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage strategy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  1. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  1. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  1. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
  1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
  1. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
  1. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
  1. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
  1. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  1. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
  1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
  1. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
  1. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  1. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
  1. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
  1. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  1. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
  1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
  1. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
  1. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  1. PT: Additional PT multiplier
  1. CT: Additional CT magnification
  1. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
  1. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
  1. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.
  1. Enable Package Reporting: This field is visible when the controller enables group packet reporting. When the measuring point is enabled, it will report data in accordance with the packet reporting logic set by the controller in addition to the group reporting data

*OPC UA PUBSUB

OPC UA PUBSUB is a communication mechanism in OPC UA (OPC Unified Architecture), which stands for "OPC UA Publisher/Subscriber". It is a communication method based on publish/subscribe model, which is used to publish and subscribe real-time data in industrial automation system.

Adding a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  1. Protocol: Select *OPC UA PUBSUB
  1. Middleware: Select the protocol used by OPCUA PUBSUB, which only supports UDP
  1. Publish Address: The destination address to send data to
  1. Subscribe address: The destination address from which data is received
  1. Publisher Id: A unique identifier that identifies the publisher, an unsigned 32-bit integer
  1. Subscribe Id: A unique identifier identifying the subscriber, unsigned 32-bit integer
  1. Status expiration time: When no new message is received by the controller or the measurement point within the specified time, the state will be automatically updated to offline
  1. Server Port: The port information of the server enabled by opcua pubsub. Note that the same port cannot be used with other services
  1. Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Adding measuring points
  1. Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  2. Sub Group Id: Keep the same as the Pub Group Id of the measurement point on the publishing side, ranging from 1-65535
  3. Sub Writer Id: Same as Pub Writer ld of this test point on publish side, range 1-65535
  4. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
    1. BIT: 0 or 1
    2. BYTE: An 8-bit unsigned number
    3. SINT: 8-bit signed number
    4. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    5. INT: 16-bit signed integer
    6. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    7. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    8. FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    9. DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    10. ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
    11. LONG: 64-bit signed integer
    12. STRING: 8-bit string
  5. Is Array:Enable this feature if the measuring point is of array type.
    1. Array Index:Represents the position of the current point in the array, for example, the first element is indexed at 0, the second element is indexed at 1, and so on.
  6. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE ,the maximum is 6 digits
  7. Size: The length of the STRING when the data type is String
  8. Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16 little endian, UTF-16 big endian, GB2312 little endian, GB2312 big endian. Only data type selection STRING is valid.
  9. Read Bit Data: The value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  10. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  11. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  12. Value mapping:When enabled, maps the 0 and 1 values of a BIT point to False and True
  13. Read and write permissions:
    1. Read: read-only, not writable
    2. Read/Write: Readable and writable
  14. Pub Group Id: The publication group ID to which the measurement point belongs, range: 1-65535
  15. Pub Writer Id: Publication write ID to which the measurement point belongs, range: 1-65535
  16. Mode:
    1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
    2. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
    3. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  17. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  18. Unit: Measuring point unit
  19. Description: Description of the measuring point
  20. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  21. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage strategy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  22. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  23. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  24. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
    3. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
    4. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
    5. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  25. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  26. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
    1. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
    2. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  27. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    4. PT: Additional PT multiplier
    5. CT: Additional CT magnification
    1. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
    2. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
  28. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.

Panasonic

Mewtocol

Panasonic's Mewtocol is a proprietary communication protocol used for communication between Panasonic industrial automation devices.Mewtocol is commonly used to connect Panasonic's PLCs for data transfer and control between devices.

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select Mewtocol
  • Station No: equipment identifier. Range: 1-255
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  • Communication time setting:
    • Communication Interval Time: The interval time between message exchanges, i.e., after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval before sending the next request message.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Register Type: select from the drop-down box
  • Register Address: Address of the measurement point.
  • Data Type: according to different Register types, the data type is different, the specific data type supported, after selecting the register type, select from the drop-down box
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

*Mewtocol over TCP

Panasonic industrial automation equipment uses a TCP/IP network to transmit the Mewtocol communication protocol. Normally, the Mewtocol protocol is designed based on serial communication (e.g. RS-232, RS-485, etc.), but with Mewtocol over TCP, it is possible to transmit Mewtocol data encapsulated in TCP packets over a TCP/IP network. This communication method allows Panasonic devices to communicate with each other over a standard TCP/IP network for remote monitoring, control and data transfer.

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select *Mewtocol over TCP
  • Station No: unique identifier of the device
  • IP Address: IP address of the device
  • Port: port information of the devic
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Address of the measurement point.
  • Data Type: measuring point data type, including:
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

*Panasonic MC 3E

Panasonic MC 3E is a PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) product line manufactured by Panasonic. These PLCs are typically used in industrial automation and control systems to perform a variety of control tasks such as logic control, data processing, and motion control. They usually support a variety of communication interfaces and communication protocols to facilitate data exchange and communication with other devices.

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select *Panasonic MC 3E
  • IP Address: IP address of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Address of the measurement point.
  • Data Type: measuring point data type, including:
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

SIEMENS 

*Fetch/Write

"Fetch/Write" refers to a data exchange operation commonly found in the field of industrial automation. It is commonly used to describe the process of fetching data (Fetch) from and writing data (Write) to a control device (e.g. PLC, sensor, etc.).

Adding a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  1. Protocol: Select *Fetch/Write
  1. IP Address: The IP address of the device
  1. Port: The port information of the device
  1. Polling Interval: It is the time interval of collecting data (seconds), for example, it is set to 10S, then all the measurement points under the controller are polled every 10S
  1. Enable Multiple Polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain measurement points under the controller to use the polling cycle. This function can be used to distinguish the measurement points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  1. Polling Interval 2: An additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled.
  1. Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Advanced Settings:
  1. Timeout Settings:
  1. Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measurement point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  1. Connect Timeout: the timeout time for establishing the connection.
  1. Communication Message Settings:
  1. Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points

  • Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: the address of the measuring point. Example: I1.6, Q1
  • Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: An 8-bit unsigned number
    • SINT: 8-bit signed number
    • BCD16:16-bit BCD code
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • ULONG: A 64-bit unsigned integer
    • LONG: 64-bit signed integer
    • STRING: 8-bit string
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE ,the maximum is 6 digits
  • Size: The length of the STRING when the data type is String
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16 little endian, UTF-16 big endian, GB2312 little endian, GB2312 big endian. Only data type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: The value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  • Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  • Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  • Value mapping:When enabled, maps the 0 and 1 values of a BIT point to False and True
  • Read and write permissions:
    • Read: read-only, not writable
    • Read/Write: Readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
    • Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
    • Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: Measuring point unit
  • Description: Description of the measuring point
  • Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage strategy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  • Data Calculation: When the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  • No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  • Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
    • Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    • Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
    • Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  • Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
    • Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
    • Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    • Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
    • Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
    • End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    • Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    • Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: Additional CT magnification
  • Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
    • Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
    • Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.
    • Mapping Value: The value of the measurement point after the expected conversion.
ISO on TCP

"ISO on TCP" refers to communication over TCP/IP networks using a set of standards defined by ISO (International Organization for Standardization). ISO is an international standard-setting organization responsible for developing standards for a variety of industries, including information technology, communications, manufacturing, and more.

In the field of industrial automation, ISO provides many standards related to communication and data exchange, some of which can be applied to TCP/IP networks. These standards usually cover the data exchange protocol, communication interface, data format and other aspects of the specification, so that different equipment and systems can exchange data and communication.

Adding a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  1. Protocol: Select ISO on TCP
  1. IP Address: The IP address of the device
  1. Port: The port information of the device
  1. Mode: Two are supported, Rack/Slot and TSAP
  1. Rack/Slot:
  1. Rack number: The rack number of the PLC
  1. Slot number: The slot number information of the PLC
  1. TSAP:
  1. Client TSAP: Usually includes Rack number, Slot number as well as specific TSAP address
  1. Server-side TSAP: Usually includes Rack number, Slot number, and specific TSAP address
  1. Polling Interval: It is the time interval of collecting data (seconds), for example, it is set to 10S, then all the measurement points under the controller are polled every 10S
  1. Enable Multiple Polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain measurement points under the controller to use the polling cycle. This function can be used to distinguish the measurement points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  1. Polling Interval 2: An additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled.
  1. Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Advanced Settings:
  1. Enable Package Reporting: Measurement points under controllers with this feature enabled can be configured for individual polling cycles (in milliseconds). Measurement points that have " Enable Package Reporting " enabled collect data according to the set polling cycle and frequency, and publish the aggregated data to the local MQTT topic "ds2/eventbus/south/upload/msec/data/{controllerName}". A quick function with the mode "Local Subscription Message Trigger" can be added on the "Custom Quick Functions" page to subscribe to this topic, where the grouped data can be processed within the quick function.
  1. Packet Data Polling Interval: The polling period for group packet data.
  1. Millisecond Data uploading: How many times the group packet data is polled, it is reported uniformly.
  1. Timeout Settings:
  1. Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measurement point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  1. Connect Timeout: the timeout time for establishing the connection.
  1. Communication Message Settings:
  1. Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  1. Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  1. Address Type:
  1. Rack/Slot mode:
  1. I: Input register
  1. Q: Output register
  1. M: Internal register
  1. DB: Data register
  1. TSAP mode:
  1. I: Input register
  1. Q: Output register
  1. M: Internal register
  1. V: Data register
  2. C: Counter register
  3. T: Timer register
  1. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
  1. BIT: 0 or 1
  1. BYTE: An 8-bit unsigned number
  1. SINT: 8-bit signed number
  1. BCD16:16-bit BCD code
  1. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
  1. INT: 16-bit signed integer
  1. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
  1. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
  1. FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
  1. DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
  1. ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
  1. LONG: 64-bit signed integer
  1. STRING: 8-bit string
  1. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE ,the maximum is 6 digits
  1. Size: The length of the STRING when the data type is String
  1. Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16 little endian, UTF-16 big endian, GB2312 little endian, GB2312 big endian. Only data type selection STRING is valid.
  1. Read Bit Data: The value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  1. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  1. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  1. Value mapping:When enabled, maps the 0 and 1 values of a BIT point to False and True
  1. Read and write permissions:
  1. Read: read-only, not writable
  1. Read/Write: Readable and writable
  1. Mode:
  1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
  1. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
  1. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  1. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  1. Unit: Measuring point unit
  1. Description: Description of the measuring point
  1. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  1. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage strategy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  1. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  1. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  1. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
  1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
  1. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
  1. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
  1. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
  1. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  1. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
  1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
  1. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
  1. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  1. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
  1. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
  1. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  1. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
  1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
  1. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
  1. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  1. PT: Additional PT multiplier
  1. CT: Additional CT magnification
  1. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
  1. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
  1. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.
  1. Enable Package Reporting: This field is visible when the controller enables group packet reporting. When the measuring point is enabled, it will report data in accordance with the packet reporting logic set by the controller in addition to the group reporting data

PPI

PPI (Point-to-Point Interface) is a serial communication interface protocol developed by Siemens Corporation to connect the Siemens S7 series programmable logic controller (PLC) and its peripheral devices. PPI is mainly used for simple data transmission and communication tasks, such as connecting HMI (Human-Machine Interface), programming devices, and other external devices.

Adding a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  1. Protocol: Select PPI
  1. Station Number: Consistent with the device, range 0-255
  1. Communication mode: support RS485 and RS232, default RS485
  1. Polling period: It is the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, it is set to 10S, then all the measurement points under the controller are polled every 10S
  1. Enable multi-polling cycle: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain measurement points under the controller to use the polling cycle. This function can be used to distinguish the measurement points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  1. Polling Interval 2: An additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled.
  1. Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Advanced Settings:
  1. Timeout Settings:
  1. Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measurement point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  1. Communication time setting:
  1. Communication Interval Time: the interval time of packet interaction, that is, after receiving the response of the device, it will wait for a communication interval before sending the next request packet.
  1. Communication Message Settings:
  1. Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  1. Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  1. Address Type:
  1. I: Input register
  1. Q: Output register
  1. M: Internal register
  1. V: Data register
  1. Address: The address of the measurement point.
  1. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
  1. BIT: 0 or 1
  1. BYTE: An 8-bit unsigned number
  1. SINT: 8-bit signed number
  1. BCD16:16-bit BCD code
  1. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
  1. INT: 16-bit signed integer
  1. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
  1. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
  1. FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
  1. DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
  1. ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
  1. LONG: 64-bit signed integer
  1. STRING: 8-bit string
  1. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE ,the maximum is 6 digits
  1. Size: The length of the STRING when the data type is String
  1. Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16 little endian, UTF-16 big endian, GB2312 little endian, GB2312 big endian. Only data type selection STRING is valid.
  1. Read Bit Data: The value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  1. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  1. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  1. Value mapping:When enabled, maps the 0 and 1 values of a BIT point to False and True
  1. Read and write permissions:
  1. Read: read-only, not writable
  1. Read/Write: Readable and writable
  1. Mode:
  1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
  1. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
  1. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  1. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  1. Unit: Measuring point unit
  1. Description: Description of the measuring point
  1. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  1. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage strategy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  1. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  1. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  1. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
  1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
  1. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
  1. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
  1. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
  1. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  1. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
  1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
  1. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
  1. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  1. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
  1. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
  1. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  1. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
  1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
  1. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
  1. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  1. PT: Additional PT multiplier
  1. CT: Additional CT magnification
  1. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
  1. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
  1. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.
  1. Enable Package Reporting: This field is visible when the controller enables group packet reporting. When the measuring point is enabled, it will report data in accordance with the packet reporting logic set by the controller in addition to the group reporting data

*PPI over TCP

"PPI over TCP" refers to the communication mode of transmitting PPI (Point-to-Point Interface) data over TCP/IP network. In traditional industrial automation systems, PPI is usually connected to Siemens S7 series programmable logic controllers (PLCS) and their peripheral devices through serial interfaces (such as RS485). However, with the development of industrial networks, more and more applications begin to use TCP/IP networks to replace the traditional serial connection for remote access and data exchange.

Adding a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  1. Protocol: Select *PPI over TCP
  1. Station No: The station number of the device, in the range 0-255
  1. IP Address: The IP address of the device
  1. Port: The port information of the device
  1. Polling Interval: It is the time interval of collecting data (seconds), for example, it is set to 10S, then all the measurement points under the controller are polled every 10S
  1. Enable Multiple Polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain measurement points under the controller to use the polling cycle. This function can be used to distinguish the measurement points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  1. Polling Interval 2: An additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled.
  1. Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Advanced Settings:
  1. Timeout Settings:
  1. Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measurement point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  1. Connection Timeout: the timeout time for establishing the connection.
  1. Communication Message Settings:
  1. Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measurement points
  1. Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  1. Address: The address of the measurement point. Example: I1, Q1
  1. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
  1. BIT: 0 or 1
  1. BYTE: An 8-bit unsigned number
  1. SINT: 8-bit signed number
  1. BCD16:16-bit BCD code
  1. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
  1. INT: 16-bit signed integer
  1. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
  1. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
  1. FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
  1. DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
  1. ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
  1. LONG: 64-bit signed integer
  1. STRING: 8-bit string
  1. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE ,the maximum is 6 digits
  1. Size: The length of the STRING when the data type is String
  1. Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16 little endian, UTF-16 big endian, GB2312 little endian, GB2312 big endian. Only data type selection STRING is valid.
  1. Read Bit Data: The value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  1. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  1. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  1. Value mapping:When enabled, maps the 0 and 1 values of a BIT point to False and True
  1. Read and write permissions:
  1. Read: read-only, not writable
  1. Read/Write: Readable and writable
  1. Mode:
  1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
  1. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
  1. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  1. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  1. Unit: Measuring point unit
  1. Description: Description of the measuring point
  1. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  1. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage strategy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  1. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  1. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  1. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
  1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
  1. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
  1. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
  1. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
  1. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  1. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
  1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
  1. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
  1. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  1. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
  1. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
  1. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  1. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
  1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
  1. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
  1. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  2. PT: Additional PT multiplier
  1. CT: Additional CT magnification
  1. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
  1. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
  1. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.
  1. Enable Package Reporting: This field is visible when the controller enables group packet reporting. When the measuring point is enabled, it will report data in accordance with the packet reporting logic set by the controller in addition to the group reporting data

*WebApi

Siemens' Web API (Web Application Programming Interface) is an HTTP-based interface for communication and data exchange with Siemens' industrial automation equipment and systems. It allows developers to access and manipulate data and functions on Siemens devices through network connections, enabling the monitoring, control, and integration of automation systems.

Adding a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  1. Controller Protocol: Select *WebApi
  1. IP Address: The IP address of the device
  1. Port: The port information of the device
  1. Polling Interval: It is the time interval of collecting data (seconds), for example, it is set to 10S, then all the measurement points under the controller are polled every 10S
  1. Enable Multiple Polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain measurement points under the controller to use the polling cycle. This function can be used to distinguish the measurement points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  1. Polling Interval 2: An additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled.
  1. Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Advanced Settings:
  1. Timeout Settings:
  1. Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measurement point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  1. Connection Timeout: the timeout time for establishing the connection.
  1. Communication Message Settings:
  1. Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measurement points
  1. Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  2. Address: The address of the measurement point. Example: I1, Q1
  3. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
    1. BIT: 0 or 1
    2. BYTE: An 8-bit unsigned number
    3. SINT: 8-bit signed number
    4. BCD16:16-bit BCD code
    5. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    6. INT: 16-bit signed integer
    7. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    8. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    9. FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    10. DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    11. ULONG: 64-bit unsigned integer
    12. LONG: 64-bit signed integer
    13. STRING: 8-bit string
  4. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE ,the maximum is 6 digits
  5. Size: The length of the STRING when the data type is String
  6. Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16 little endian, UTF-16 big endian, GB2312 little endian, GB2312 big endian. Only data type selection STRING is valid.
  7. Read Bit Data: The value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  8. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  9. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  10. Value mapping:When enabled, maps the 0 and 1 values of a BIT point to False and True
  11. Read and write permissions:
    1. Read: read-only, not writable
    2. Read/Write: Readable and writable
  12. Mode:
    1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
    2. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
    3. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  13. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  14. Unit: Measuring point unit
  15. Description: Description of the measuring point
  16. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  17. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage strategy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  18. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  19. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  20. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
    3. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
    4. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
    5. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  21. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  22. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
    1. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
    2. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  23. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    4. PT: Additional PT multiplier
    5. CT: Additional CT magnification
  24. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
    1. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
    2. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.

VIGOR

*VIGOR Serial

Serial communication protocol used by VIGOR industrial automation equipment. This protocol is commonly used to connect Von Vick's PLCs (Programmable Logic Controllers) or other devices for data transfer and communication between devices.

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select *VIGOR Serial
  • Station No: equipment identifier. Range: 1-255
  • Communication Mode: Support RS485 and RS232,default use RS485
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
  • Communication time setting:
    • Communication Interval Time: The interval time between message exchanges, i.e., after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval before sending the next request message.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measuring point address
  • Data Type: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

*VIGOR Serial over TCP

VIGOR industrial automation equipment uses a serial communication protocol that is transmitted over a TCP/IP network. This protocol allows data transfer that would otherwise be carried out via serial communications (e.g. RS-232, RS-485, etc.) to be converted and transmitted over a TCP/IP network. Remote monitoring, control and data exchange between devices is achieved over the network, making industrial automation systems more flexible and convenient.

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select *VIGOR Serial over TCP
  • Station No: equipment identifier. Range: 1-255
  • IP Address: IP address information of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measuring point address
  • Data Type: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

XINJE

*XINJE TCP(Private)

XINJE industrial automation equipment uses the proprietary TCP/IP communication protocol. This protocol was developed by XINJE specifically for communication between its devices.

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select *XINJIE TCP(private)
  • Station No: unique identifier of the device
  • IP Address: IP address of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • PLC Type: PLC series, support XC,XD,XL
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Byte Order:
    • 32 Bit Int: select from the drop-down box
    • String Byte Order: select from the drop-down box
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measuring point address
  • Data Type: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

*XINJE TCP (Modbus)

XINJE TCP (Modbus) refers to the TCP/IP communication method based on the Modbus protocol used by XINJE industrial automation devices.Modbus is a common industrial communication protocol used for data transmission and communication between devices in industrial control systems. With XINJE TCP (Modbus), XINJE devices can communicate with other devices over a TCP/IP network. This communication method provides a reliable, real-time data exchange mechanism, which allows users to remotely monitor, control and manage Xinjie devices, and realise various functions of industrial automation systems, such as data acquisition, remote control, and troubleshooting.

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select *XINJIE TCP(Modbus)
  • Station No: unique identifier of the device
  • IP Address: IP address of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • PLC Type: PLC series, support XC,XD,XL
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Byte Order:
    • 32 Bit Int: select from the drop-down box
    • String Byte Order: select from the drop-down box
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measuring point address
  • Data Type: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

*XINJE Serial

XINJE Serial refers to the serial communication protocol used by XINJE industrial automation devices. This protocol is typically used to connect XINJE PLCs (Programmable Logic Controllers), HMIs (Human Machine Interfaces), or other devices for data transfer and communication between devices.XINJE Serial protocol typically includes a set of communication specifications and data formats to ensure compatibility and stability between different devices. Through XINJE Serial, users can realise the functions of monitoring, controlling and data acquisition of XINJE devices.

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select *XINJIE Serial
  • Station No: unique identifier of the device
  • Communication Mode: support RS232 and RS485, RS485 is used by default.
  • PLC Type: PLC series, support XC,XD,XL
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Byte Order:
    • 32 Bit Int: select from the drop-down box
    • String Byte Order: select from the drop-down box
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
    • Communication time setting:
    • Communication Interval Time: The interval time between message interactions, i.e., after receiving a response from the device, it will wait for a communication interval time before sending the next request message.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measuring point address
  • Data Type: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

*XINJE Serial over TCP

Serial interface for connecting Cygnus industrial automation equipment to a TCP/IP network. This protocol allows serial communications to be transmitted over a TCP/IP network, allowing equipment to be remotely monitored and controlled over the network. Typically, this protocol allows connection to a Shinseki PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) or HMI (Human Machine Interface) device over a network for remote access, data acquisition and control.

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select *XINJIE Serial over TCP
  • Station No: unique identifier of the device
  • IP Address: IP address of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • PLC Type: PLC series, support XC,XD,XL
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Byte Order:
    • 32 Bit Int: select from the drop-down box
    • String Byte Order: select from the drop-down box
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  • Measuring Point Name: the name of the measurement point (the name of the measurement point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  • Address: Measuring point address
  • Data Type: The following data types are supported
    • BIT: 0 or 1
    • BYTE: 8-bit unsigned integer
    • SINT: 8-bit signed integer
    • WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    • INT: 16-bit signed integer
    • DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    • DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    • FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    • DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    • STRING: 8-bit string
    • BCD16: 16-bit BCD code
  • Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point of the measuring point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE, up to 6 digits.
  • Size: the length of the string when the data type is STRING.
  • Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16-LITTLE, UTF-16-BIG, GB2312. Only the Data Type selection STRING is valid.
  • Read Bit Data: Enabled to read the value of any bit of data in an integer.
  • Register Bit: The bit offset of the measurement point when reading bit data after turning on Read Bit Data.
  • Negative Value: When turn on Read Bit Data, you can choose whether or not to invert the read result.
  • Numerical mapping: maps 0 and 1 values of BIT-type points to False and True when enabled
  • Read/Write:
    • Read: read only, not write
    • Read/Write: readable and writable
  • Mode:
    • Periodic: data is reported regularly according to the reporting cycle of the subgroup to which it belongs.
    • Onchange: data is reported regularly according to a grouped reporting cycle only when there is a change in the value of the measurement point.
    • Never: local use only, no need to upload data from the cloud
  • Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be considered as no change in the value. If the data has configured data operation, then according to the value after the operation to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  • Unit: measurement point unit
  • Description: Description of the measurement point
  • Group: Subgroup to which the measurement point belongs
  • Store Historical Data: When enabled, a historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage policy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling the Python API.
  • Data Calculation: Simple arithmetic processing through data arithmetic is supported when the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, and the processed data values can be reported to the cloud platform. The values mapped to protocol conversions (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) are by default the raw data values collected rather than the calculated data values.
  • No: no arithmetic is performed, the collected raw data values are used
  • Ratio Conversion: The collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the scale in equal proportions according to the range of the upper and lower limits of the data, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. Calculation formula for the calculated data value = (upper limit of the ratio - lower limit of the ratio) / (upper limit of the data - lower limit of the data) * (original data value - lower limit of the data) + lower limit of the ratio
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Data High Limit: the upper data limit for a measurement point
    • Data Lower Limit: lower data limit value for the measurement point
    • High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after proportional operation
    • Lower Limit Of Proportion: the lower limit value of the data after proportional operation
  • Offset And Zoom: Calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset, the formula is calculated data value = (original data value * Magnification) + Offset
    • Decimal places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  • Bit Truncation: Intercepts a segment of bit data from the original data as a data value; this operation is not supported for FLOAT-type points.
    • Start Bit: Bit offset to start intercepting the original data
    • End Bit: Bit offset to end the interception of the original data
  • PT/CT: Calculate the raw data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, with the formula [(raw value*magnification)+offset]*PT*CT
    • Decimal Places: the number of decimal places to be retained after arithmetic operations
    • Magnification: the magnification needed to zoom in or out
    • Offset: the data value to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    • PT: Additional PT multiplier
    • CT: additional CT magnification
  • Value Mapping: Configurable conversion of specific values of measurement points to other values.
    • Source Value: The original measured point value collected.
    • Target Value: the value of the measurement point after the conversion is expected

Yokogawa

*Link TCP

A communication protocol used to connect Yokogawa industrial automation equipment. It is a communication protocol based on TCP/IP networks for data transfer and communication between devices in industrial control systems. Link TCP enables Yokogawa devices to exchange data with other devices and realise functions such as real-time monitoring, control and data acquisition.

Adding a controller
  • Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  • Protocol: Select *Link TCP
  • Station No: unique identifier of the device
  • IP Address: IP address of the device
  • Port: port information of the device
  • Polling Interval: the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, set to 10S, then all the measuring points under the controller are polled every 10S
  • Enable Multiple polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling interval and select certain measuring points under the controller to use the polling interval. This function can be used to distinguish the measuring points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
    • Polling Interval 2: It is an additional polling interval (in seconds) that needs to be set after enabling multiple polling interval;
  • Description: You can add comment information to this controller
  • Advanced Settings:
  • Timeout Settings:
    • Timeout: The timeout time for the device to respond after the reading request is initiated to the device when the measuring point is collected. If the device does not respond to the reading request within the set collection timeout time, it is still the failure of this collection.
    • Connect Timeout: Timeout time for establishing a connection.
  • Communication Message Settings:
    • Store Communication Message: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameters" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the " Realtime Communication Message " page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.

Easy driver

One of the distinguishing features of industrial automation is "fragmentation". This feature brings a lot of work and obstacles to digital work. In industry, there is such a kind of equipment:

A large number of models;

The function of a single device (from the perspective of communication) is relatively simple, the number of data (measuring points) is small, and the need for read and write fetch instructions is not many;

The communication protocol is question-answering, that is, "request-response" model;

Each model has its own unique communication protocol, which is usually a relatively simple parsing of binary bytes;

The length of the packet is generally less than 100 bytes, and the parsing is relatively simple for engineers to understand;

Simple Drive protocol is a general data acquisition protocol, which can solve the above problems.

Easy COM

Add a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  1. Protocol: Select Easy COM
  1. Endpoint: Support RS485 and RS232, default use RS485
  1. Polling Interval: It is the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, it is set to 10S, then all the measurement points under the controller are polled every 10S
  1. Enable Multiple Polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain measurement points under the controller to use the polling cycle. This function can be used to distinguish the measurement points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  1. Polling Interval 2: An additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled.
  1. Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Command List:
  1. Read data: Enabled by default
  1. Read Command: Hex formulates long request packet, the dynamic data part of the packet needs to be filled with 00
  1. Response Length: The length of the response packet
  1. Response header check:
  1. Head Length: The length in bytes of the header of the packet
  1. Expect Head: The hexadecimal value of the header of the desired packet
  1. Response checksum check:
  1. Start Byte: The number of bytes in the packet in which the content of the start check is located
  1. End Byte: The length of the check content
  1. Check Method: support CRC16, SUN16, SUM8, default use CRC16
  1. Check Byte order: Support "Consistent with the controller" and " As opposed to the controller ". If SUM8 is selected for validation, this option is not present. Controller endianness is configured in advanced settings
  1. Write Date:
  1. Write Command: Hex formulates long request packet, the dynamic data part of the packet needs to be filled with 00
  1. Add Parity:
  1. Check Method: Support CRC16, SUN16, SUM8, default is CRC16
  1. Start Byte: Start from the first byte to calculate the check value
  1. End Byte: The number of bytes to check from the start byte
  1. Check Byte Order: supports "Consistent with the controller" and " As opposed to the controller ". If SUM8 is selected for validation, this option is not present. Controller endianness is configured in Advanced Settings
  1. Response Length: The length of the response packet after the data is written. Range 1-256 bytes
  1. Response header Check:
  1. Head Length: The length of the header of the packet
  1. Expect head: The hexadecimal value of the header of the desired packet
  1. Response Checksum Check:
  1. Start Byte: The number of bytes in the packet in which the content of the start check is located
  1. End Byte: The length of the check content
  1. Check Method: support CRC16, SUN16, SUM8, default use CRC16
  1. Check Byte Order: Support "consistent with the controller" and "contrary to the controller". If SUM8 is selected for validation, this option is not present. Controller endianness is configured in Advanced Settings
Advanced Settings:
  1. Byte Order: Two are supported, "High byte first" and "Low Byte first"
  1. Timeout: The timeout time of the device response after the read request is initiated to the device when the measurement point is collected. If the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still the acquisition failure.
  1. Communication time setting:
  1. Communication Interval Time: the interval time of packet interaction, that is, after receiving the response of the device, it will wait for a communication interval before sending the next request packet.
  1. Communication Message Settings:
  1. Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  1. Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  2. Measuring Point Byte Order:support " Consistent with the controller" and " As opposed to the controller". Controller endianness is configured in Advanced Settings
  3. Conversion Method:support "HEX2DEC(hexadecimal to 10)", "BCD2DEC(BCD code to 10)", "IEEE754(standard floating point number)", "data minus 33H to take BCD", "data minus 33H to take HEX", "data minus 33H to take ASCII"
  4. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
    1. BYTE: an 8-bit unsigned number
    2. SINT: 8-bit signed number
    3. BCD16:16-bit BCD code
    4. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    5. INT: 16-bit signed integer
    6. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    7. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    8. FLOAT: 32-bit floating-point number
    9. DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    10. STRING: 8-bit string
  5. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE ,the maximum is 6 digits
  6. Size: The length of the STRING when the data type is String
  7. Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16 little endian, UTF-16 big endian, GB2312 little endian, GB2312 big endian. Only data type selection STRING is valid.
  8. Read Bit Data: The value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  9. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  10. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  11. Value mapping:When enabled, maps the 0 and 1 values of a BIT point to False and True
  12. Read and write permissions:
    1. Read: read-only, not writable
    2. Read/Write: Readable and writable
    3. Write: Only write, not read
  13. Read Data Offset Address: The starting address of the current measurement point in the packet. The address of the first byte of the packet is 0, and so on.
  14. Read Data Byte Length: The byte length of the current measurement point in the packet
  15. Mode:
    1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
    2. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
    3. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  16. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  17. Unit: Measuring point unit
  18. Description: Description of the measuring point
  19. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  20. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage strategy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  21. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  22. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  23. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
    3. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
    4. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
    5. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  24. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  25. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
    1. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
    2. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  26. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    4. PT: Additional PT multiplier
    5. CT: Additional CT magnification
  27. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
    1. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
    2. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.
  28. Enable Package Reporting: This field is visible when the controller enables group packet reporting. When the measuring point is enabled, it will report data in accordance with the packet reporting logic set by the controller in addition to the group reporting data

Easy TCP

Add a controller
  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  1. Protocol: Select Easy TCP
  1. IP Address: The IP address of the communication peer
  1. Port: Port information of the communication peer
  1. Polling Interval: It is the time interval of data collection (seconds), for example, it is set to 10S, then all the measurement points under the controller are polled every 10S
  1. Enable Multiple Polling Interval: Once enabled, you can configure an additional polling cycle and select certain measurement points under the controller to use the polling cycle. This function can be used to distinguish the measurement points that need high frequency and low frequency acquisition, and make efficient use of gateway and PLC performance.
  1. Polling Interval 2: An additional polling cycle (in seconds) that needs to be set when multiple polling cycles are enabled.
  1. Description: You can add comment information to this controller
Command List:
  1. Read data: Enabled by default
  1. Read Command: Hex formulates long request packet, the dynamic data part of the packet needs to be filled with 00
  1. Response Length: The length of the response packet
  1. Response header check:
  1. Head Length: The length in bytes of the header of the packet
  1. Expect Head: The hexadecimal value of the header of the desired packet
  1. Response checksum check:
  1. Start Byte: The number of bytes in the packet in which the content of the start check is located
  1. End Byte: The length of the check content
  1. Check Method: support CRC16, SUN16, SUM8, default use CRC16
  1. Check Byte order: Support "Consistent with the controller" and " As opposed to the controller ". If SUM8 is selected for validation, this option is not present. Controller endianness is configured in advanced settings
Write Date:
  1. Write Command: Hex formulates long request packet, the dynamic data part of the packet needs to be filled with 00
  1. Add Parity:
  1. Check Method: Support CRC16, SUN16, SUM8, default is CRC16
  1. Start Byte: Start from the first byte to calculate the check value
  1. End Byte: The number of bytes to check from the start byte
  1. Check Byte Order: supports "Consistent with the controller" and " As opposed to the controller ". If SUM8 is selected for validation, this option is not present. Controller endianness is configured in Advanced Settings
  1. Response Length: The length of the response packet after the data is written. Range 1-256 bytes
  1. Response header Check:
  1. Head Length: The length of the header of the packet
  1. Expect head: The hexadecimal value of the header of the desired packet
  1. Response Checksum Check:
  1. Start Byte: The number of bytes in the packet in which the content of the start check is located
  1. End Byte: The length of the check content
  1. Check Method: support CRC16, SUN16, SUM8, default use CRC16
  1. Check Byte Order: Support "consistent with the controller" and "contrary to the controller". If SUM8 is selected for validation, this option is not present. Controller endianness is configured in Advanced Settings
Advanced Settings:
  1. Byte Order: Two are supported, "High byte first" and "Low Byte first"
  1. Timeout: The timeout time of the device response after the read request is initiated to the device when the measurement point is collected. If the device does not respond to the read request within the set acquisition timeout time, it is still the acquisition failure.
  1. Communication time setting:
  1. Communication Interval Time: the interval time of packet interaction, that is, after receiving the response of the device, it will wait for a communication interval before sending the next request packet.
  1. Communication Message Settings:
  1. Store Communication Messages: The controller with this function enabled will store communication messages. The storage path and number can be set in the "Default Parameter" of the "Parameter Settings" page. If you need to download the stored communication message, you can enter the "Realtime Communication Message" page of the specified controller in the "Measure Monitor" page, and click the "Download" button to download.
Adding measuring points
  1. Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  2. Measuring Point Byte Order:support " Consistent with the controller" and " As opposed to the controller". Controller endianness is configured in Advanced Settings
  3. Conversion Method:support "HEX2DEC(hexadecimal to 10)", "BCD2DEC(BCD code to 10)", "IEEE754(standard floating point number)", "data minus 33H to take BCD", "data minus 33H to take HEX", "data minus 33H to take ASCII"
  4. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
    1. BYTE: an 8-bit unsigned number
    2. SINT: 8-bit signed number
    3. BCD16:16-bit BCD code
    4. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    5. INT: 16-bit signed integer
    6. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    7. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    8. FLOAT: 32-bit floating-point number
    9. DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    10. STRING: 8-bit string
  5. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE ,the maximum is 6 digits
  6. Size: The length of the STRING when the data type is String
  7. Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16 little endian, UTF-16 big endian, GB2312 little endian, GB2312 big endian. Only data type selection STRING is valid.
  8. Read Bit Data: The value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  9. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  10. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  11. Value mapping:When enabled, maps the 0 and 1 values of a BIT point to False and True
  12. Read and write permissions:
    1. Read: read-only, not writable
    2. Read/Write: Readable and writable
    3. Write: Only write, not read
  13. Read Data Offset Address: The starting address of the current measurement point in the packet. The address of the first byte of the packet is 0, and so on.
  14. Read Data Byte Length: The byte length of the current measurement point in the packet
  15. Mode:
    1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
    2. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
    3. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  16. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  17. Unit: Measuring point unit
  18. Description: Description of the measuring point
  19. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  20. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage strategy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  21. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  22. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  23. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
    3. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
    4. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
    5. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  24. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  25. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
    1. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
    2. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  26. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    4. PT: Additional PT multiplier
    5. CT: Additional CT magnification
  27. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
    1. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
    2. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.
  28. Enable Package Reporting: This field is visible when the controller enables group packet reporting. When the measuring point is enabled, it will report data in accordance with the packet reporting logic set by the controller in addition to the group reporting data

Virtual controller

The virtual controller is mainly a data display controller designed for secondary development equipment acquisition by the gateway. The data collected by the secondary development App can be transmitted to the internal gateway through the internal MQTT message bus, and the data is displayed in the virtual controller's measurement point by calling the script API that writes the controller's measurement point value.

Adding a controller

  1. Name: The name of the controller, which is unique in the controller list for the entire gateway
  1. Protocol: Select the virtual controller
  1. Status expiration time: If set to greater than 0, the state will be automatically updated to offline if no new message is received by the virtual controller or measurement point within the specified time; If it is equal to 0, the controller will never show offline after it has been online.
  1. Description: You can add comment information to this controller

Adding measuring points

  1. Measuring Point Name: The name of the measuring point (the name of the measuring point cannot be repeated under the same controller)
  2. Data type: Measuring point data type, including:
    1. BYTE: An 8-bit unsigned number
    2. SINT: 8-bit signed number
    3. BCD16:16-bit BCD code
    4. WORD: 16-bit unsigned integer
    5. INT: 16-bit signed integer
    6. DWORD: 32-bit unsigned integer
    7. DINT: 32-bit signed integer
    8. FLOAT: 32-bit floating point number
    9. DOUBLE: 64-bit floating point number
    10. STRING: 8-bit string
  3. Decimal Places: The length of the data after the decimal point when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE ,the maximum is 6 digits
  4. Size: The length of the STRING when the data type is String
  5. Character Encoding Format: ASCII, UTF-8, UTF-16 little endian, UTF-16 big endian, GB2312 little endian, GB2312 big endian. Only data type selection STRING is valid.
  6. Read Bit Data: The value of any bit data in the integer can be read when enabled.
  7. Register Bit: When the bitwise value is enabled, the bit offset of the measuring point when reading the bit data.
  8. Negative Value: When the bitwise value is enabled or the data type is BIT, you can choose whether to negate the result of the read.
  9. Value mapping:When enabled, maps the 0 and 1 values of a BIT point to False and True
  10. Read and write permissions:
    1. Read: read-only, not writable
    2. Read/Write: Readable and writable
  11. Mode:
    1. Periodic: Periodically reports data according to the reporting period of the group it belongs to
    2. Onchange: When the value of the measuring point changes, the data will be reported periodically according to the reporting period of the group
    3. Never: Only used locally, no need to upload data from the cloud
  12. Onchange Deadzone: When the upload mode is Onchange, you can set the value change within a certain range to be treated as no change. If the data has configuration data operation, the value after operation is used to detect whether the value change exceeds the dead zone.
  13. Unit: Measuring point unit
  14. Description: Description of the measuring point
  15. Group: The group to which the measuring point belongs
  16. Store Historical Data: When enabled, the historical data table will be generated with the name of the group to which the measurement point belongs, and the historical data will be stored according to the storage strategy set by the group. The stored historical data can be exported as CSV files or obtained by calling Python API.
  17. Data Calculation: When the data type of the measurement point is not BIT or STRING, it supports simple operation processing through data operation, and the processed data value can be reported to the cloud platform. The value mapped to the protocol conversion (Modbus Slave or OPC UA Server, etc.) defaults to the original data value collected rather than the calculated data value
  18. No: No computation is performed, the raw data value collected is used
  19. Ratio Conversion: the collected data value is mapped to a data value in the range of the upper and lower limits of the ratio in equal proportion to the data value, such as mapping the data collected in the sensor to the actual temperature and humidity. The calculation formula is the calculated data value = (upper limit of proportion - lower limit of proportion)/(upper limit of data - lower limit of data) * (original data value - lower limit of data) + lower limit of proportion
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Data High Limit: The upper limit of the data of the measuring point
    3. Data lower Limit: the lower limit of the data at the measuring point
    4. High Limit Of Proportion: the upper limit of the data after the proportion operation
    5. Lower Limit Of Proportion: The lower limit of the data after the scale operation
  20. Offset and Zoom: calculate the original data value according to the multiplier and offset. The formula is the calculated data value = (original data value * multiplier) + offset
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
  21. Bit Trunction: Intercepts a segment of data in the original data as a data value. FLOAT type measuring points do not support this operation
    1. Start Bit: The bit offset at which the intercept of the original data begins
    2. End Bit: The bit offset that ends the interception of the original data
  22. PT/CT: Calculate the original data value according to the magnification, offset, PT and CT, the formula is [(original value * magnification)+ offset]*PT*CT
    1. Decimal Places: The number of decimal places that need to be retained after the operation
    2. Magnification: The multiplier that needs to be scaled up or down
    3. Offset: The data value that needs to be increased or decreased after the multiplier operation
    4. PT: Additional PT multiplier
    5. CT: Additional CT magnification
  23. Value mapping: Configurable measuring points for specific values converted to other values.
    1. Source Value: The raw value of the collected measuring point.
    2. Target Value: The expected value of the converted measuring point.

Appendix: List of Northbound Protocol Conversion services

Modbus TCP Slave

Modbus TCP Slave configuration

In the Modbus TCP Slave configuration page, enable Modbus TCP Slave, the interface is shown as follows:


Modbus TCP Slave configuration interface parameters:

  1. Port: The port number of modbus TCP, support 1-65535, the default is 502.
  1. 16-bit integer byte order: The gateway is fixed to AB byte order
  1. 32-bit integer byte order: The gateway is fixed to ABCD byte order
  1. 32 bit float byte order: The gateway is fixed to ABCD byte order
  1. 64-bit integer byte order: The gateway is fixed to ABCDEFGH byte order
  1. Max-Connection: 1-32 supported, default is 5 connections.
  1. Mapping value Settings: Support Data original value and Data caculation value. The default is Data original value (Data original value: the actual value collected by the southbound device; Data caculation value: the value after the gateway data operation)

After configuring Modbus TCP Slave parameters, click "Submit" button to enable Modbus TCP Slave function. In the Status of Modbus TCP Slave page, you can view the running status and connected device information.


Configure the Modbus TCP Slave Mapping Table


Click the "Add" button in the interface that pops up to configure a mapping table with a different slave address (Note: map table name and slave address are not repeatable)

The figure is to add a Modbus mapping table with name 2 and slave address 2

After the successful addition, the interface displays as shown in the figure:



Click the "Edit" button to modify the slave address on the mapping table of the current page. When the number of mapping tables of the page is greater than 2, click the "Delete" button to delete the mapping table. Delete mapping table 2 as shown below:


The following figure is adding measuring points to the Modbus TCP Slave mapping table:

  1. Description of the parameters to add the mapping:

  1. Controller: Southbound controller device

  1. Measure: The measuring point in the southbound controller

  1. Read/Write: The same as the read and write permissions of the measurement point in the southbound controller (cannot be modified)

  1. Original Data Type: Same as the data type of the point in the southbound controller (immutable)

  1. Mapping Data Type: The data type of the measurement point in the Modbus TCP Slave

  1. Start Mapping Address: the start address of the register of the measure point in Modbus TCP Slave
  2. Mapping address: Automatically calculated and displayed according to the starting mapping address and data type.
The following figure is batch adding measurement points to the Modbus TCP Slave mapping table:

Introduction to batch adding mapping parameters:

  1. Start Mapping Address: the start address of the register of the currently selected measurement point in Modbus TCP Slave

  1. Mapping Address: According to the starting mapping address, the selected measurement point and the data type of the measurement point, the current map address range of the measurement point is calculated and displayed

  1. Mapping Data Type: The data type of the current measurement point in Modbus TCP Slave can be configured.

IEC 104 Server

IEC 104 Server configuration

On the IEC 104 Server configuration page, after enabling IEC 104 Server, the interface is as shown below:


IEC 104 Server configuration interface parameters description:

Basic Settings:

  1. COT Size: The length of the transmission reason in bytes, the COT field is used to identify the transmission reason. 1 and 2 are supported, the default is 2
  1. ASDU Size: The length of the application service data unit, which is the length of the CA public address, the ASDU field is used to distinguish between different substations on this link. 1 and 2 are supported, the default is 2
  1. Connection mode:
  1. TCP server:
  1. Port Number: Configure the port of the TCP server
  1. TCP Client:
  1. Server IP address/domain name: Configured in client mode, TCP server address or domain name you want to connect to
  1. Port Number: The port of the server
  1. Mapping Value Setting: Support Data original value and Data caculation value. The default is Data original value (Data original value: the actual value collected by the southbound device; Data caculation value: the value after the gateway data caculation)
  1. Server list: In general, the station address of the link address field and the Application Service Data Unit (ASDU) public address can be set to the same value. In some cases, there can be more than one application service data unit (ASDU) public address under the station address of one link layer address area, such as: a substation collects information of several nearby satellite stations and then transmits it to the main station. In this case, there can be more than one common address of the application service data unit. At this point, you can add multiple servers here to represent multiple sub-stations. Here's an example of adding an ASDU address of 2 (Note: Addresses are not repeatable) :

If the serial number in the Server list is greater than 2, then you can remove the unwanted ASDU address. Here's how to delete an ASDU address with serial number 1:

Advanced Settings:

  1. Enable Spontaneous reporting: When enabled, the slave will actively send data to the master
  1. K Value: The maximum number of I format (information) APDU (k) that has not been acknowledged. Range 1-32, default 12.
  1. W Value: Acknowledgement by the receiver upon receipt of w I format (information) APdus, range 1-32, default 8.
  1. T0 Timeout (S) : T0 timeout is the timeout that the master waits for a response from the slave after sending the start frame. If no response frame is received from the slave within the T0 timeout period, the master will consider the communication failed and act accordingly. Range 1-3000, default is 30 in seconds.
  1. T1 Timeout (S) : t1 stipulates that after the sender sends an I format packet or U format (control) packet, it must be acknowledged by the receiver within the time of t1, otherwise the sender believes that the TCP connection has a problem and should re-establish the connection. Range 1-3000, default is 15 in seconds.
  1. T2 Timeout (S) : t2 stipulates that after receiving an I format packet, if the receiver does not receive a new I format packet after t2 time, it must send an S format (monitoring) frame to the sender to acknowledge the received I format packet. Range 1-3000, default is 10, in seconds. Note: T2 < T1
  1. T3 Timeout (S) : t3 stipulates that the dispatcher or the sub-station RTU will retrigger the timer t3 every time it receives an I frame, S frame or U frame. If no packet is received within t3, it will send a test link frame to the other side. Range 1-3000, default is 20, the unit is seconds. Note: T3 > T1
  1. Maximum Connection: 1-32 supported, 5 by default
  1. Time Setting: Only local time is supported
  1. Byte Order: Fixed to ABCD

After the IEC 104 Server parameters are configured, click the "Submit" button to enable the IEC 104 Server function. In the Status page of IEC 104 Server, you can view the operating status and connected device information.


Configure the IEC 104 Server Mapping Table

The following figure is to add the measurement points to the IEC 104 Server mapping table (note: read-only measurement points can be mapped only once, read-write measurement points can be mapped twice) :

Introduction to adding mapping parameters:

  1. Controller: Southbound controller device
  2. Measure: The measuring point in the southbound controller
  3. Read/Write: The same as the read and write permissions of the measurement point in the southbound controller (cannot be modified)
  4. Original Data Type: Same as the data type of the point in the southbound controller (immutable)
  5. Type ID: Shows the supported type ID based on the measurement point type

Display based on point data permissions and data types:

  1. Single-Point Information (read-only or read-write points, supported point type: BIT) :

[1] M_SP_NA_1

[30] M_SP_TB_1

  1. Double-Point Information (read-only or read-write points, supported point types: all point types except BIT,FLOAT and STRING) :

[3] M_DP_NA_1

[31] M_DP_TB_1

  1. Step Position Information (read-only or read-write points are acceptable, supported point types are BYTE,SINT) :

[5] M_ST_NA_1

[32] M_ST_TB_1

  1. Bitstring (32 bit) (read-only or read/write point, support site types: BYTE, SINT, WORD, INT, DWORD, DINT, BCD) :

[7] M_BO_NA_1

[33] M_BO_TB_1

  1. Measured Value (Normalized) (read-only or read/write point, support site types: BYTE, SINT, WORD, INT, DWORD, DINT, FLOAT, BCD) :

[9] M_ME_NA_1

[21] M_ME_ND_1

[34] M_ME_TD_1

  1. Measured Value(Scaled) (read-only or read-write points, supported point types: BYTE,SINT,WORD,INT,BCD) :

[11] M_ME_NB_1

[35] M_ME_TE_1

  1. Measured Value (Short Float) (read-only or read/write point, support site types: BYTE, SINT, WORD, INT, DWORD, DINT, Float, BCD) :

[13] M_ME_NC_1

[36] M_ME_TF_1

  1. Integrated the Totals (read-only or read/write point, support site types: BYTE, SINT, WORD, INT, DWORD, DINT, BCD) :

[15] M_IT_NA_1

[37] M_IT_TB_1

  1. Parameter (read-only or read/write point, support site types: BYTE, SINT, WORD, INT, DWORD, DINT, FLOAT, BCD) :

[110] P_ME_NA_1

[111] P_ME_NB_1

[112] P_ME_NC_1

  1. Single Command (read and write points only, BIT type supported) :

[45] C_SC_NA_1: Single remote command

[58] C_SC_TA_1: Single remote command with time tag.

  1. Double Command (read and write points only, all points except BIT,FLOAT and STRING are supported) :

[46] C_DC_NA_1

[59] C_DC_TA_1

  1. Regulating Step Command (only read and write points are supported, supported point types: BYTE,SINT) :

[47] C_RC_NA_1

[60] C_RC_TA_1

  1. Set point command - Measured Value (Normalized) (measuring point only supports, speaking, reading and writing, and support the site types: BYTE, SINT, WORD, INT, DWORD, DINT, FLOAT, BCD) :

[48] C_SE_NA_1

[61] C_SE_TA_1

  1. Set point command-Measured Value(Scaled) (read and write points only supported, supported point types: BYTE,SINT,WORD,INT,BCD) :

[49] C_SE_NB_1

[62] C_SE_TB_1

  1. The Set point command - Measured Value (Short Float) (measuring point only supports, speaking, reading and writing, and support the point of types: BYTE, SINT, WORD, INT, DWORD, DINT, Float, BCD) :

[50] C_SE_NC_1

[63] C_SE_TC_1

  1. Bitstring command (32 bit) (only point support, speaking, reading and writing, and support the site types: BYTE, SINT, WORD, INT, DWORD, DINT, BCD) :

[51] C_BO_NA_1

[64] C_BO_TA_1

  1. Mapping Data Types: Datatypes mapped in IEC 104 Server
  1. ASDU Address: ASDU address selection in the Server list
  1. Start IOA: Identifies the address of the information object in the communication transmission.
  1. Mapping Address: Determined by the type ID and the starting IOA value

The following figure is batch adding measurement points to the IEC 104 Server mapping table


Batch adding mapping interface parameters:

  1. ASDU address: Select according to the ASDU address added in the server list when configuring
  1. Type ID: Based on the type ID, the supported measurement point information is displayed
Refer to the type ID in the introduction to Add Mapping parameters for specific types.
  1. Start IOA: Starting mapping address
  1. Mapping Address: According to the starting mapping address, the currently added mapping address range of the measurement point is displayed
  1. Mapping Data Type: You can configure the data type of the current measuring point in IEC 104 Server.

OPCUA Server

OPCUA Server configuration

On the OPCUA Server configuration page, after enabling OPCUA Server, the interface is as shown below:


OPCUA Server configuration interface parameters description:

  1. Port: OPCUA server's port number, range: 1-65535
  1. Max-Connection: Maximum number of client connections supported, range: 1-32
  1. Anonymous: When anonymous login is disabled, two configuration items "Username" and "Password" will be displayed
  1. UserName: Set the username used by the client connection
  1. Password: Set the password used for the client connection

After the username and password are configured, the client connection will not be able to connect to the server without entering the correct username and password.

  1. Server Certificate: After importing, OPCUA server will authenticate the client with the certificate key
  1. Server Private Key: After import OPCUA server will authenticate the client with the certificate key
  1. Identifier Type: Numeric and String are supported, and String type is used by default
  1. Mapping Value Settings: Data original value and data caculation value are supported. The default is Data original value (Data original value: the actual value collected by the southbound device; Data caculation value: the value after the gateway data operation)

After configuring the OPCUA Server parameters, click the "Submit" button to enable the OPCUA Server function. On the status page of OPCUA Server, you can view the operating status and connected device information.


Configure the OPCUA Server Mapping Table

The following figure is to add measurement points to the OPCUA Server mapping table:


  1. Mapping Data Type: The current measurement point is mapped to the data type in OPCUA Server

Check the point you want to add to the mapping table. Finally, click "OK" to add the point to the mapping table

Modbus RTU Slave

Modbus RTU Slave configuration

In the configuration page of Modbus RTU Slave, after enabling Modbus RTU Slave, the interface is as shown below:


Modbus RTU Slave configuration interface parameters:

  1. Communication mode: support RS485 and RS232, the default is RS485
  2. Baud Rate: can be configured in the "Parameter Settings" page
  3. Data Bits: can be configured on the "Parameter Settings" page
  4. Parity: can be configured in the "Parameter Settings" page
  5. Stop Bits: can be configured in the "Parameter Settings" page
  6. 16-bit integer byte order: The gateway is fixed to AB byte order
  7. 32-bit integer byte order: The gateway is fixed to ABCD byte order
  8. 32-bit float byte order: The gateway is fixed to ABCD byte order
  9. 64-bit integer byte order: The gateway is fixed to ABCDEFGH byte order
  10. Mapping value setting: support Data original value and Data caculation value. The default is Data original value (Data original value: the actual value collected by the southbound device; Data caculation value: the value after the gateway data operation)

After configuring Modbus RTU Slave parameters, click "Submit" button to enable Modbus RTU Slave function. In the status page of Modbus RTU Slave, you can view the running status information.


Configure the Modbus RTU Slave Mapping Table

Configuring the Modbus RTU Slave mapping table can be referred to Configuring the Modbus TCP Slave mapping table

IEC 101 Server

IEC 101 Server configuration

On the IEC 101 Server configuration page, after enabling IEC 101 Server, the interface is as shown below:


IEC 101 Server configuration interface parameters description:

Basic Settings:

  1. Communication Mode: Support RS232,RS485,TCP Transparent transmission
  2. Link Mode: support Balanced Transmission and Unbalanced Transmission, Unbalanced Transmission only supports one side of the communication at the same time to send data, belongs to half duplex, suitable for RS485 scenario, Balanced Transmission can support both sides of communication to send data at the same time, belongs to full duplex, suitable for RS232 scenario
  3. Protocol Mode: IEC60870-5-101 and DL/T634.5101. IEC60870-5-101 is more suitable for international power automation systems, and DL/T634.5101 is suitable for Chinese power systems.
  4. Link Address Size: 1 and 2 are supported. The number of bits or bytes used to represent the address of a device in the link layer
  5. Link Address: A unique identifier used in the link layer to identify a communicating device
  6. ASDU Size: The length of the application service data unit, that is, the length of the CA public address, the ASDU field is used to distinguish between different sub-stations on this link. 1 and 2 are supported, the default is 2
  7. IOA Size: The length of the IOA determines the number and range of monitoring points. 1, 2, and 3 are supported. The default is 3
  8. COT Size: The length of the transmission reason in bytes. COT field is used to identify the transmission reason. 1 and 2 are supported. Default is 2.
  9. Mapping Value Settings: Support Data original values and Data caculation values. The default is Data original value (Data original value: the actual value collected by the southbound device; Data caculation value: the value after the gateway data operation)
  10. Server List: In general, the station address of the link address field and the Application Service Data Unit (ASDU) public address can be set to the same value. In some cases, there can be more than one application service data unit (ASDU) public address under the station address of one link layer address area, such as: a substation collects information of several nearby satellite stations and then transmits it to the main station. In this case, there can be more than one common address of the application service data unit. At this point, you can add multiple servers here to represent multiple sub-stations. Here's an example of adding an ASDU address of 2 (Note: Addresses are not repeatable) :


If the order number in the Server list is greater than 2, then the unwanted ASDU address can be removed. (Server list serial number is greater than or equal to 1), the following figure is to delete an ASDU address with serial number 1:

If the communication mode is selected TCP transparent transmission parameter description:

  1. Heartbeat Retry Interval: The time interval for the server to send a heartbeat packet and wait for a response from the client. The default is 10 seconds, ranging from 1-3600
  1. Keeplive Retry: The number of times the server attempts to resend a heartbeat packet when it does not receive a response from the client. The default is 5 retries, ranging from 1-100
  1. Heartbeat max idle time: The maximum time the server will allow a connection to remain idle without receiving a response from the client. The default is 100 seconds, ranging from 1-65535
  1. Serial Buffer Frame: The number of data frames received by the system cache. The default is 4 frames. Range 1-4
  1. Packet Size: The length of each data frame in serial communication. The default is 1024, and 1-1024 bytes are supported
  1. Force Transmit Timer: The time interval between each data frame in serial communication. The default is 100 ms, and 10-65535 ms is supported
  1. Min Reconnect Interval: The minimum time interval to reconnect after being disconnected. 15 seconds by default, 15-60 seconds is supported.
  1. Max Reconnect Interval: The maximum time interval to reconnect after being disconnected. 15 seconds by default, 15-3600 seconds is supported
  1. Multi-server policy: Multiple data centers (or server centers) are used in the system to handle TCP pass-through connections, and some policy is used to manage the distribution and processing of these connections. The policy supports parallel and polling modes, and the default is to use parallel.
  1. Send Access Request Message: The master station (or client) sends a request to the remote device (or server) to establish a communication connection. The purpose of this request packet is to request the remote device to establish a connection with the master station for data exchange and communication. Once enabled, the contents of the packet must be entered.
  1. Destination IP address: The destination IP address is the IP address of the remote device or server, which is the network address of the receiver. This IP address is used to send the packet to the correct destination so that the remote device can receive and process this request and establish a communication connection. The following is an example of adding the destination IP address:


After the addition is complete, you can edit and delete the destination address you added.

Advanced Settings:

  1. Enable Spontaneous: The device is able to proactively send data to the master (or client) instead of waiting for the master to make a request. The default is enabled.
  1. Link confirmation timeout: The maximum time you can wait for the other party to confirm the connection while the connection is being established. The default is 2000 milliseconds. Range 50-2147483647
  1. Idle Timeout: The maximum amount of time that a connection can wait without data exchange after it has been established. The default is 10,000 milliseconds. Range 50-2147483647
  1. Time Setting: Only local time is supported
  1. Byte Order: Only ABCD format is supported

Once the IEC 101 Server parameters are configured, click the "Submit" button to enable the IEC 101 Server function. In the status page of IEC 101 Server, you can check the running status.


Configure the IEC 101 Server Mapping Table

The mapping table of IEC 101 Server supports three types: Telemetering, Telesignalling and Telecontrol.

  1. Telemetering: Telemetering refers to the function of obtaining continuous measurement values from remote sites. These measurements can include real-time values of parameters such as current, voltage, power, and energy. The IEC 101 Server can send query commands to remote sites to obtain telemetry values for specific equipment or systems and monitor and record them as needed.
  1. Telesignalling: Telesignalling refers to the function of obtaining discrete status information from remote sites. This information can include the on/off status of equipment, alarm states, and more. The IEC 101 Server can send query commands to remote sites to obtain the telesignalling status of specific equipment or systems and monitor and record them as needed.
  1. Telecontrol: Telecontrol refers to the capability to control devices or systems at remote sites. The IEC 101 Server can send control commands to remote sites, such as turning switches on/off, adjusting equipment parameters, etc., to achieve remote control of remote devices.

The following figure shows the addition of measurement points to the IEC 101 Server mapping table

Introduction to adding mapping parameters:

  1. Controller: Southbound controller device
  1. Measure: Measuring point in the southbound controller (Note: telemetry only supports measuring points of non-BIT data type, telemetry and remote control only support measuring points of BIT data type)
  1. Read/Write: the same as the read and write permissions of the measurement point in the southbound controller (cannot be modified)
  1. Original Data Type: Same as the data type of the point in the southbound controller (immutable)
  1. Mapping Data Type: The data type of the measurement point in IEC 101 Server
  1. ASDU Address: ASDU address selection in the Server list
  1. Type ID: The type ID of the Telemetering is fixed to: [13] M_ME_NC_1; The type ID of Telesignalling is fixed: [1] M_SP_NA_1; The type ID of the Telecontrol is fixed: [45] C_SC_NA_1
  1. Start IOA: Identifies the address of the information object in the communication transmission.
  1. Mapping Address: Determined by the type ID and the starting IOA value

The following figure is batch adding measurement points to the IEC 101 Server mapping table

Batch adding mapping interface parameters (batch added measurement points only show the measurement points that meet the type ID and meet the search criteria) :

  1. ASDU Address: ASDU address selection in the Server list
  1. Type ID: The type ID of the Telemetering is fixed to: [13] M_ME_NC_1; The type ID of Telesignalling is fixed: [1] M_SP_NA_1; The type ID of the Telecontrol is fixed: [45] C_SC_NA_1
  1. Start IOA: Identifies the address of the information object in the communication transmission. The address of the first check point checked and the addresses of the remaining check points sorted from top to bottom
  1. Mapping Address: According to the starting mapping address, the current mapping address range of the measurement point is calculated and displayed

SL651

SL651 configuration

On the configuration page of SL651, after enabling SL651, the interface looks like the following picture:


IEC 101 Server configuration interface parameters description:

  1. Central Station Address: A unique identifier to distinguish each central station, the default is 1, range 1-225
  1. Telemetry Address: Enter a 10-digit telemetry address consisting of a borough number and a station number
  1. Telemetry Type: supports "500 Tons/Day or more", "100-500 Tons/day" and "Below 100 Tons/Day". By default "Below 100 Tons/Day" is used
  1. Password: The connection password for the central station, no longer than 4 characters
  1. Mapping Value Settings: support Data original value and Data caculation value. The default is Data original value (Data original value: the actual value collected by the southbound device; Data caculation value: the value after the gateway data caculation)
  1. Central Station List: (Add at least one central station)


  1. IP address: The IP address of the central station
  1. Port: Port information of the central station
  1. Enable whole slice reporting: In every whole slice (i.e. 15 minutes) time interval, the data is automatically reported.
  1. Reporting Cycle: The default reporting period is 60 seconds. With full reporting enabled, the default reporting period will be 900 seconds. Range 1-86400 seconds
  1. Communication Timeout: Communication timeout is usually the maximum time you can wait for a response from the other party while establishing a communication connection or sending data. If no response is received from the other party within the set timeout period, the communication is usually considered to have failed or expired. The default is 5 seconds, ranging from 1-3600 seconds

After configuring the SL651 parameters, click the "Submit" button to enable the SL651 function. On the status page of the SL651, you can view the running status and connected device information.


Configure the SL651 Mapping Table

The following figure is to add the measurement points to the SL651 mapping table (Note: Feature type measurement points are configured in order to be added to the mapping table.)

The introduction to the parameters of the Add Map interface is as follows:

  1. Mapping Data type: The data type in SL651 can be configured according to the actual situation.
  1. Element Type: Select measurement points based on their application scenarios.

HJ212 Client

HJ212 Client Config

In the Configuration page of HJ212 Client, after enabling HJ212 Client, the interface is as shown below:


HJ212 Client Configuration interface parameters description:

  1. Mapping Value Setting: support Data original value and Data caculation value. The default is Data original value (Data original value: the actual value collected by the southbound device; Data caculation value: the value after the gateway data caculation)
  1. Platform Settings:

After clicking the "Add" button, the following screen will be displayed:

            Add platform parameter introduction:

  1. Platform Name: Custom do not repeat the name
  1.  Platform IP Address: The IP address of the server
  1. Platform Port: The port number of the server
  1. MN Coding: Unique identification of the device with a maximum support of 24 characters
  1. Password: A security credential for authentication that cannot exceed 24 characters
  1. Communication Mode: Only Upload Mode is supported
  1. TCP Heartbeat Interval: In TCP communication, the time interval between sending heartbeat packets
  1. TCP Reconnect Interval: The time interval between reattempts to establish a connection after a TCP connection has been dropped

Data Settings:


Add Dataset parameters Introduction:

  1. DatasetName: Custom non-duplicate name
  1. System coding: The system code specified according to the monitoring system, such as 21 for surface water quality detection. A maximum of two characters is supported
  1. Upload Interval: The time interval between reports

After configuring the HJ212 Client parameters, click the "Submit" button to enable the HJ212 Clinet function. In the HJ212 Clinet status page, you can view the running status and connected device information.


Configure the HJ212 Client Mapping Table

The following figure is to add the measurement points to the HJ212 Client mapping table (Note: The mapping table can only be added if the measurement points are filled in for both the monitoring factor and the data set. If only one item is filled in, click the "Confirm" button and an error will be reported)

Description of parameters for adding mapping:

  1. Mapping Data Type: The data type in HJ212 Client
  1. Monitoring Factor Coding: it is used to distinguish different detection parameters or detection factors, and match specific detection parameters according to the actual significance of the measurement points
  1. Dataset: Select according to the dataset at the time of configuration

BACnet IP Server

BACnet IP Server Configuration

On the protocol conversion configuration page, click Add, and select BACnet IP Server, as shown in the following figure:


Then enter the configuration page of BACnet IP Server, set the relevant parameters and click Submit, as shown in the following figure:


BACnet IP Server Configuration interface parameters description:

  • Port: The port number used by the gateway to enable this server function
  • Local Device ID: A unique identifier for each BACnet device in the network it is in
  • Enable BBMD :allows devices to communicate by broadcast mode, thus enabling communication across network segments
  • BBMD IP: The IP address of the device used to manage BACnet broadcast communication, the BBMD device is responsible for managing the routing and forwarding of BACnet broadcast messages to ensure that broadcast messages can be transmitted across different network segments.
  • BBMD TTL: The maximum number of transmission hops or lifetime allowed for a BACnet broadcast message when it crosses the network. It is used to limit the transmission range of a broadcast message in the network and prevent the message from spreading without limit, thus reducing network load and improving security
  • Mapping value setting: support Data original value and Data caculation value. The default is Data original value (Data original value: the actual value collected by the southbound device; Data caculation value: the value after the gateway data caculation)

Configure the BACnet IP Server Mapping Table

The following figure is to add measurement points to the BACnet IP Server Mapping Table:


Add mapping interface parameters:

  • Controller: southbound controller device
  • Measure: The measuring point in the southbound controller
  • Read/Write: The same as the read and write permissions of the measurement point in the southbound controller (cannot be modified)
  • Original Data Type: Same as the data type of the point in the southbound controller (immutable)
  • Object Type: When the data type is BIT, it can be mapped to the following types: Digital Input, Digital Output, Digital Value. Data types other than BIT and STRING can be mapped to the following types: Analog Input, Analog Output, Analog Value, Multi-state Input, Multi-state Output, Multi-state Value.
  • Mapping Data Type: The data type of the measurement point in BACnet IP Server
  • Instance Number: Used to identify different object instances in the network, ranging from 0-1023
  • Mapping Address: Automatically generated based on object type.

The following figure is batch adding measurement points to the BACnet IP Server mapping table:


Introduction of parameters for Batch Add Map:

  • Object Type: Select from the drop-down box. According to the selected object type, the following table will show the matching measurement points
  • Instance Number: The instance number of the starting point of the selected point
  • Mapping Address: According to the object type, the instance number and the selected measurement point, the corresponding mapping address range is automatically generated
  • Mapping Data Type: The data type of the measurement point in BACnet IP Server

BACnet MS/TP Server

BACnet MS/TP Server Configuration

On the Protocol Conversion Configuration page, click Add and select BACnet MS/TP Server, as shown in the following figure:


Then enter the Configuration page of BACnet MS/TP Server, set the relevant parameters and click Submit, as shown in the following figure:


Description of BACnet MS/TP Server configuration interface parameters:

  • Communication Mode: you can select the serial port number corresponding to the gateway
  • Maximum Frames: Indicates the maximum number of frames a master device is allowed to send each time it holds a token. this parameter is set in the device's configuration and affects network performance and response time. The default value is 6.
  • Local Node Address: A unique address used to identify each device in the network, which is used to ensure that each device can be uniquely identified in the network and can effectively participate in communications. The default value is 1.
  • Max Master: Specifies the maximum number of Master Nodes that may be present in the network. this parameter helps to reduce the token passing time and improve network efficiency. The default value is 1.
  • Local Device ID: Uniquely identifies a device in the BACnet MS/TP network . The default value is 0.
  • Mapping Value Settings: Support Data original value and Data caculation value. The default is Data original value (Data original value: the actual value collected by the southbound device; Data calculation value: the value after gateway data calculation).

Configuring the BACnet MS/TP Server Mapping Table

The following figure shows the Add Measurement Points to BACnet MS/TP Server mapping table:


Add a description of the mapping interface parameters:

  • Controller: Southbound controller equipment
  • Measurement: Measurement point in the southbound controller
  • Read/Write: consistent with the read/write in the southbound controller (not modifiable)
  • Original Data Type: consistent with the data type of the point in the southbound controller (not modifiable)
  • Object Type: When the data type is BIT, it can be mapped to the following types: Digital Input, Digital Output, Digital value. Data types other than non-BIT and STRING can be mapped to the following types: Analog Input, Analog Output, Analog value, Multi-state Input, Multi-state Output, Multi-state Value.
  • Mapped Data Type: the data type of the measurement point in the BACnet IP Server
  • Instance Number: used to identify different object instances in the network, range 0-1023
  • Mapping Address: automatically generated according to the object type.

The following figure shows the Batch Add Measurement Points to BACnet MS/TP Server mapping table:


Introduction to the parameters for adding mappings in bulk:

  • Object Type: select from the drop-down box, according to the selected object type the following table will show the matching measurement points
  • Instance Number: the starting instance number of the selected point
  • Mapping Address: automatically generates a range of mapped addresses based on the object type, instance number and selected measurement point.
  • Mapping Data Type: the data type of the measurement point in the BACnet MS/TP Server

DNP3 Outstation

DNP3 Outstation Configuration

On the DNP3 Outstation Configuration page, after enabling DNP3 Outstation, the interface is as follows:


DNP3 Outstation Configuration interface parameters:

Basic Settings:

  1. Communication Mode: Support TCP and UDP, default use TCP
  1. Local Port: The Outstation usually listens to a local port number in order to communicate with the master station
  1. Select UDP as the communication method:
  1. Remote IP Address: The IP address to which the UDP datagram is sent
  1. Remote Port: The destination address port from which the UDP datagram is sent
  1. Slave Address: A unique identifier for a device or site in the DNP3 communication network
  1. Master address: A unique identifier for the master station in the DNP3 communication network that is responsible for sending requests and control commands
  1. Mapping Value Setting: Support Data original value and Data caculation value. The default is Data original Value (Data original value: the actual value collected by the southbound device; Data caculation value: the value after the gateway data operation)

Advanced Settings:

  1. Enable unsolicited response: When enabled:
  1. Unsolicited confirm timeout: The timeout that the Outstation waits for the response of the master after sending data to the master. If the Outstation does not receive a response from the master within the timeout period, the Outstation may consider the communication failed
  1. Data link confirm mode: When enabled:
  1. Data link response timeout: The link message timeout is the timeout period for waiting for a link message after establishing a communication link between the master station and the Outstation
  1. Data link max retry: After establishing a communication link, the upper limit of the number of times the master or Outstation will attempt to retransmit link messages if an acknowledgment message (ACK) is not received from the other party.
  1. Maximum fragment size: The maximum number of bytes that can be transmitted in a DNP3 frame.
  1. Application layer timeout: After the application layer sends data, the timeout time to wait for the other party to reply

After configuring the DNP3 Outstation parameters, click the "Submit" button to enable the DNP3 Outstation function. On the status page of DNP3 Outstation, you can view the operating status and connected device information.


Configure the DNP3 Outstation Mapping Table

Here's how to add a single measurement point to the DNP3 Outstation mapping table:

Description of the parameters for adding the mapping:

  1. Controller: Southbound controller device
  1. Measure: The measuring point in the southbound controller
  1. Read/write: The same as the read and write permissions of the measurement point in the southbound controller (cannot be modified)
  1. Original Data Type: Same as the data type of the point in the southbound controller (immutable)
  1. Register Type: When the measuring point data type is BIT, it can be mapped to the following types: Digital Input, Digital Output; When the data type is not BIT and STRING, it can be mapped to the following types: Analog Input, Analog Output, Counter Input. When the address type is a digital input, the group number is 1 and the variant is 1; When the address type is numeric output, the group number is 10 and the variant is 2; When the address type is analog input, the group number is 30 and the variant is 5. When the address type is analog output, the group number is 40 and the variant is 1; When the address type is counter input, the group number is 20 and the variant is 1.
  1. Mapping Data Type: The data type of the measurement point in the DNP3 Outstation
  1. Mapping Address: Automatically generated according to the address type.

The following figure is batch adding measurement points to DNP3 Outstation mapping table:

Introduction to Batch Add Map parameters:

  1. Register Type: After selection, the matching measurement point information will be displayed automatically in the table
  1. Mapping Address: According to the selected address type and the selected measurement point, the mapping address range of the added measurement point is automatically displayed.
  1. Mapping Data Type: The data type of the measurement point in DNP3 Outstation

IEC 61850 Server

IEC 61850 Server Configuration

On the IEC 61850 Server Configuration page, after enabling IEC 61850 Server, the interface is as shown below:


IEC 61850 Server Configuration interface parameters:

Basic Settings:

  1. Port: The port number of the server enabled by the gateway, which should avoid conflicts with ports enabled by other services
  1. IED Name: A unique identifier that is named according to the specific application and requirements. It should generally be descriptive and clearly express the function or location of the IED. INHAND is used by default.
  1. LD Name: Logical device names are defined when configuring and managing IEDs to distinguish between different functional units and identify them in communication
  1. Control Mode: Support four kinds of "Direct With Normal Security", "Sbo With Normal Security", "Direct With Enhanced Security", "Sbo With Enhanced Secunty".
  1. Enable password connection: After enabling, fill in the password to connect to the IEC 61850 Server
  1. Password: Set the connection password for connecting to IEC 61850 Server
  1. Mapping Value Setting: support Data original value and Data caculation value. The default is Data original value (Data original value: the actual value collected by the southbound device; Data caculation value: the value after the gateway data caculation)

Data set Settings:


Add dataset interface parameters Instructions:

  1. DatasetName: Customize a non-repeatable dataset name
  1. Enable Report: A mechanism used to periodically send information about data changes, commonly used to monitor equipment status and parameter changes in power systems, off by default
  1. Report Control Name: Defines the parameters and behavior of the report. A report control block will typically be assigned a unique name that is used to refer to and identify the report in the configuration.
  1. Report ID: A value that uniquely identifies the report control block.
  1. Configuration revision: Used to identify the specific version of a configuration file or configuration item
  1. Buffer: Events that occur in the reporting mechanism are temporarily stored in a buffer inside the device or system to wait for transmission to the client
  1. Integrity period: The period for checking the integrity of the data in the report. It defines the update frequency of the reported data, that is, how long the data in the report remains valid and reliable
  1. Buffer time: The time interval during which the reported data is buffered before it is sent. When data in a report is updated, the data can be buffered for a certain amount of time so that other data updates that occur during that time can be merged into the same report, reducing the number of reported transmissions and the communication load
  1. Trigger Options: Trigger conditions for sending report data, support "Data change", "Quality change ", "Data update", "Integrity", "General Interrogation" (multiple options)
  1. Optional Fields: After selecting the parameters, the received report will contain the configurable optional parameter information. Support "Sequence number", "Time stamp", "Reason for inclusion", "Dataset name", "Data reference", "Buffer overflow", "Entry ID", "Configuration revision" (multiple options)

After configuring the IEC 61850 Server parameters, click the "Submit" button to enable the IEC 61850 Server function. In the status page of IEC 61850 Server, you can view the operating status and connected device information.


Configure the IEC 61850 Server Mapping Table

The following figure is to add measurement point 1 of the southbound controller to the mapping table of the IEC 61850 Server:

Description of parameters to add the mapping:

  1. Controller: Southbound controller device
  1. Measure: The measuring point in the southbound controller
  1. Read/Write: The same as the read and write permissions of the measurement point in the southbound controller (cannot be modified)
  1. Original Data Type: Same as the data type of the point in the southbound controller (immutable)
  1. Data Object Type: Depending on the data type of the selected measurement point, the options for the data object type are different. (Controllable object types are only supported if the reading and writing permission of the measurement point is Read/Write)
  1. BIT: Single point state information, controllable single point
  1. SINT BYTE, WORD, INT, BCD, DWORD, DINT, BCD32, ULONG, LONG: two point state information, controllable double points, integer status information, controllable state of integer
  1. SINT BYTE, WORD, INT, BCD, DWORD, DINT, BCD32, ULONG, LONG, FLOAT, DOUBLE, measurements, controllable simulation instruction information.
  1. Mapping Data Type: The data type of the measurement point in IEC 61850 Server
  1. Mapping Address: Automatically display according to the starting mapping address.
  1. Add to dataset:
  1. Dataset Name: Enable After adding to a dataset, select from the drop-down box. The content of the drop-down box is the configured data set when IEC 61850 Server is configured.

The following figure is the configuration interface for batch adding measurement points to the IEC 61850 Server mapping table (Note: "dataset name" is optional) :

Introduction to Batch Add Map parameters:

  1. Data Object Type: According to the data object type table, the supported southbound measurement points are displayed. Correspondence (Note: controllable measuring points only show Read and Write permissions as: Read/Write) :
  1. SPS,SPC: BIT data type;
  1. DPS,DPC,INS,INC: SINT, BYTE, WORD, INT, BCD, DWORD, DINT, BCD32, ULONG, LONG data types;
  1. DPS,DPC,INS,INC,MV,APC: BYTE, SINT, WORD, INT, BCD, DWORD, DINT, BCD32, ULONG, LONG, FLOAT, DOUBLE data type.
  1. Mapping Data Type: The data type of the measurement point in IEC 61850 Server

SNMP Agent

SNMP Agent configuration

On the Configuration page of the SNMP Agent, after enabling the SNMP Agent, the interface is as shown below:


SNMP Agent configuration interface parameters description:

  1. Port: The port number of SNMP, the default is 161
  1. Version: Three major versions are supported, namely V1, V2C, V3. The default is the V3 version used
  1. If the protocol version used is V3:
  1. User Name: The SNMPv3 secure name used to authenticate during communication.
  1. Enable Auth: Once enabled:
  1. Authentication Method: MD5 and SHA are supported
  1. Authentication password: Authentication mechanism, under authNoPriv and authPriv level, the authentication password needs to be provided to verify the identity of the sender of the message.
  1. Enable Encipher: When configuring SNMPv3 users, you need to ensure that the encryption option is enabled for each user and provide the corresponding encrypted password.
  1. Encryption Method: supports DES, AES128
  1. Encryption Password: Encrypts the content of the message.
  1. If using V1 and V2C:
  1. Community: This is similar to a password and is used to identify the user or management system that is allowed to access the SNMP agent
  1. Read/Write: Configure Read and write permissions of measuring points in the mapping table, support Read, Read/Write.
  1. Enable Trap: If enabled, SNMP Agent will detect whether the data of the mapping point has changed, and report Trap message if it has changed. When enabled:
  1. Trap Ip: The destination address IP of the reported Trap message
  1. Trap Port: The port of the destination address of the reported Trap message, default is 162
  1. Version: Three major versions are supported, namely V1, V2C, V3. The default is the V3 version used
  1. If the protocol version used is V3:
  1. Engine ID: The engine ID is used to generate and verify the security parameters of the message, such as authentication password and encryption password. Usually a hexadecimal string of variable length
  1. User Name: The SNMPv3 secure name used to authenticate during communication.
  1. Enable Auth:
  1. Authentication enabled or not: Once enabled:
  1. Auth Method: MD5 and SHA are supported
  1. Auth Password: Authentication mechanism, under authNoPriv and authPriv level, the authentication password needs to be provided to verify the identity of the sender of the message.
  1. Whether encryption is enabled or not: When configuring SNMPv3 users, you need to ensure that the encryption option is enabled for each user and provide the corresponding encrypted password.
  1. Auth Method: supports DES, AES128
  1. Auth Password: Encrypts the content of the message.
  1. If using V1 or V2C:
  1. Community: This is similar to a password and is used to identify the user or management system that is allowed to access the SNMP agent
  1. Mapping value setting: supports Data original value and Data caculation value. The default is Data original value (Data original value: the actual value collected by the southbound device; Data caculation value: the value after the gateway data caculation)

After configuring the SNMP Agent parameters, click the "Submit" button to enable the SNMP Agent function. In the status page of SNMP Agent, you can view the running status information.


Configure the SNMP Agent Mapping Table

The following image is to add the measurement point 1 of the southbound controller to the SNMP Agent:

Description of the parameters to add the mapping:

  1. Controller: Southbound controller device
  1. Measure: The measuring point in the southbound controller
  1. Read/Write: Same as the read and write permissions of the point in the southbound controller (immutable)
  1. Original Data Type: Same as the data type of the point in the southbound controller (immutable)
  1. Mapping Data Type: The data type of the measurement point in SNMP Agnet
  1. OID: The node address used to uniquely identify the management information. An OID is an identifier consisting of a series of numbers used to represent various objects in the network, such as devices, interfaces, parameters, etc. Each managed object is identified by a unique OID. The structure of an OID is a series of numbers separated by dots. In DSA OID is generated automatically

Shown below is to choose the point after 2, 4, generate the OID node address, measuring point correspondence address is 2, point 4 correspondence address is 3 (batch add OID node address mapping interface omitted ". 1.3.6.1.4.1.36153.1.2.0. ")

Introduction to Batch Add Map parameters:

  1. OID: After checking the measurement point that you want to add in bulk, press the checked measurement point from front to back to generate the node address range in turn.
  1. Mapping Data Type: The data type of the measuring point in the SNMP Agent

Appendix: List of Northbound Cloud services

Instructions for using standard MQTT cloud services

1. EMQX Client configuration

The EMQX's official website (https://www.emqx.com/en/mqtt/public-mqtt5-broker), select online using MQTT client tool for testing


Click on "New Connection" in the pop-up window that opens, after filling in the Name field in the interface that pops up afterwards, the rest of the configuration does not need to be modified, and finally click on "Connect".



2. Edge Computing Gateway configuration

2.1 Connect to EMQX's free server

The data collection configuration for standard MQTT cloud services is shown in the diagram (for configuring the Modbus controller and instructions, please refer to the Quick Start):


2.2 Connect to EMQX's free server

On the “MQTT Cloud Service” page, after enabling cloud services, select "MQTT" in the "Cloud  Types" section and fill in the corresponding parameters.Here's the configuration information for our example:

  1. Server address: broker.emqx.io
  1. Client ID: Any ID that is unique to the server

Leave the rest as default

Click the "Submit" button when the configuration is complete, as shown below:


The description of each parameter is as follows:

Basic Settings:

  1. Server Address: The server address used to establish the MQTT network connection
  1. Client ID: Any ID that is unique to the server
  1. Enable Authority: Once enabled, you can set the MQTT username and password
  1. MQTT username: The Username needed to connect to the MQTT server after the server has enabled the authentication mechanism for username passwords
  1. MQTT password: The Password to be used to connect to the MQTT server after the server has enabled the authentication mechanism for username and password

Advanced Settings:

  1. Port: The port of the MQTT server address
  1. Keep Alive: The time interval at which the client sends heartbeats
  1. TLS encryption:
  1. Disable: Turns off TLS encryption
  1. Symmetric Encryption (client and server share one account and key) :
  1. Identity: The account number saved on the server and used to verify identity
  1. Pre-shared Key: The key associated with the account stored on the server that is used to encrypt the request or the digest of the request
  1. Asymmetric Encryption (client generates a unique key pair, and client and server share the public key) :
  1. Verification Method: Two types are supported: Verify client CA and Verify client cer and key
  1. Verify Server Cert: When enabled, the server certificate will be verified for validity
  1. Verify client CA: This uses a certificate issued by a third-party trusted certificate authority that is preinstalled with the gateway
  1. Verify client cer and key: It uses a certificate issued by a certificate authority it creates
  1. rootCA: The CA root certificate
  1. Client Private Key: The certificate file used for data encryption and decryption
  1. Client Cert: The certificate file used for client authentication
  1. Clear Session: It clears the session and reestablishes the session when the connection is disconnected and reconnected
  1. MQTT Version: The version of MQTT used by the connection when establishing MQTT

Last-Will and Testament:

  1. Topic: Will message topic
  1. Qos: Will message level
  1. Retain: When enabled, the broker keeps the latest messages and sends them to the subscriber as soon as a new MQTT client subscribes to the corresponding topic
  1. Payload: The published testament message
2.3 Publish the message to the MQTT server

Publish and subscribe messages in Message Management configuration after submission. Here's how to configure a publish message with the name inhand_pub and the Topic pubdata:

The publish message configuration parameters are described as follows:

  1. Name: user-defined release name (Note: this name is unique in the message management of all cloud services and the release message name in the custom fast function)
  1. Trigger Source Type: The type of the release message, supporting "Measuring Point Group" and "Alarm Message".
  1. Group/Label: Select according to the " Trigger Source Type ", if it is " Measuring Point Group ", select the group of the measuring point, if it is " Alarm Message ", select the label of the alarm.
  1. Hide Offline Data: When enabled, off-line measurement points will be blocked and no longer published
  1. Topic: A custom Topic
  1. Qos(MQTT): Publishes Qos, which is recommended to be consistent with the Qos of the MQTT server
  1. Entry Function: Keep the same name as the entry function in the script
  1. Quickfuction: Customize the group package and release logic using Python code. (Just use the default code provided)

Subscribe to messages in the EMQX online client

After the connection is successful, select the message type as JSON, click "New Subscription", in the pop-up window, Topic and Qos fill in the Topic and Qos of the message published by the gateway, and finally click "Confirm". Finally, you can view the data reported by the gateway

 


2.4 Subscribe to MQTT messages

Here's a subscribe message configured with the name inhand_sub,Topic subdata, and JSON Payload:

The subscribe message configuration parameters are explained as follows:

  1. Name: Custom subscription name (Note: this name is unique in the message management of all cloud services and the name of subscription messages in custom fast functions)
  1. Topic: The same as the publisher's Topic
  1. Qos (MQTT) : Subscribe to Qos, which is recommended to be consistent with the Qos of the MQTT server
  1. EntryFunction: Keep the same name as the entry function in the script
  1. Payload Type: Plaintext, Base64, JSON, HEX supported
  1. QuickFunction: Use Python code to customize the unpacking and subscription logic. When adding a subscription message, there is a default subscription script, and the default script can subscribe to the message. You can modify this script according to your needs.

Publish a message in the EMQX online client

Using the publish function of the online tool, fill out the publish message and choose JSON for the message type. The Topic, Qos and the Topic, Qos subscribed by the gateway are kept the same, and finally click the "Publish" button, that is, the published message can be viewed in the gateway log



Instructions for using MQTT SparkPlugB

1. Ignition Configuration

Use Ignition software to view the data uploaded by the gateway and the data delivered to the gateway. You can download the Ignition software Download Ignition by Inductive Automation


After installation, do the following

In the window that appears, select "Standard Edition." Set a username password and finally click on "Start Gateway"


Set the Ignition login username password



Download "Designer Launcher" and add Designer after installation





Click here to download the MQTT-Engine-signed.modl module.


Import the MQTT-Engine-signed.modl module you just downloaded from Config > Modules






After adding, an MQTT ENGINE configuration item will appear in the Config interface menu bar. Click to enter the Configuration




Uncheck these two functions. Fill in the address of the server, the EMQX server, for example, URL: TCP: / / broker. EMQX. IO: 1883. Finally click "Save Changes"




 

Once the configuration is complete, open the Designer Launcher software and double-click on the Designer you just added. Fill in Ignition's username and password.




Create a Project, just add a Project Name and finally click "Create New Project"



2. Edge Computing Gateway configuration

2.1 Data Collection Configuration

The data collection configuration for Standard MQTT Cloud Services is illustrated in the diagram (for Modbus controller setup and instructions, please refer to the Quick Start):


2.2 Connect to the MQTT server

On the MQTT Cloud Services page, after enabling cloud services, select "MQTT SparkPlugB" in the "Cloud Types" section and fill in the corresponding parameters.

This example uses the EMQX server as a case study. The sample configuration is as follows:

  1. Server Address: broker.emqx.io
  1. Client ID: Any unique ID for the server
  1. GroupID: The group to which the current gateway belongs. (Note: The gateway's SN is the Node ID)

The rest of the settings can be left as default.

After submitting the configuration, the gateway will automatically generate scripts for publishing and subscribing.

The parameters are explained as follows:

Basic Settings:

  1. Server Address: The server address used to establish the MQTT network connection
  1. Client ID: Any ID that is unique to the server
  1. GroupID: The group to which the current gateway belongs. (Note: The gateway's SN is the Node ID)
  1. Enable Authority: Once enabled, you can set the MQTT username and password
  1. MQTT username: The Username needed to connect to the MQTT server after the server has enabled the authentication mechanism for username passwords
  1. MQTT password: The Password to be used to connect to the MQTT server after the server has enabled the authentication mechanism for username and password

Advanced Settings:

  1. Port: The port of the MQTT server address
  1. Keep Alive: The time interval at which the client sends heartbeats
  1. TLS encryption:
  1. Disable: Turns off TLS encryption
  1. Symmetric Encryption (client and server share one account and key) :
  1. Identity: The account number saved on the server and used to verify identity
  1. Pre-shared Key: The key associated with the account stored on the server that is used to encrypt the request or the digest of the request
  1. Asymmetric Encryption (client generates a unique key pair, and client and server share the public key) :
  1. Verification Method: Two types are supported: Verify client CA and Verify client cer and key
  1. Verify Server Cert: When enabled, the server certificate will be verified for validity
  1. Verify client CA: This uses a certificate issued by a third-party trusted certificate authority that is preinstalled with the gateway
  1. rootCA: The CA root certificate
  1. Client Private Key: The certificate file used for data encryption and decryption
  1. Client Cert: The certificate file used for client authentication
  1. Verify client cer and key: It uses a certificate issued by a certificate authority it creates
  1. Clear Session: It clears the session and reestablishes the session when the connection is disconnected and reconnected
  1. MQTT Version: The version of MQTT used by the connection when establishing MQTT
2.3 Publish messages to the MQTT server

View the data published by the gateway via Ignition. (Note: The software cannot parse some data types because the values of the gateway and this software defined data type are different)


2.4 Subscribe to MQTT messages

Double-click the value of the point you want to modify in Ignition, and then type Enter. In the subsequent pop-up window, click "Write Once". Finally, you can see the modified value in the point monitor on the gateway.




Alibaba Cloud IoT User introduction

1. Alibaba Cloud Configuration

If you have already configured the corresponding products and devices in Alibaba Cloud's iot cloud platform, you can directly check the next section Edge Computing Gateway Configuration. Otherwise, please follow the following process to configure the products and devices in the iot cloud platform. Visit Alibaba Cloud official website https://www.aliyun.com and log in. After logging in, select "Iot Platform".


Click "Activited" after entering the Iot Platform


1.1 Creating Product

Step 1: Create the product

Enter the following page and click "Create Product".


Here is an example of adding a street lighting product. Note: The data format only supports "ICA Standard Data Format", and the authentication method only supports "Device Secret".

Step 2: Define features for the product (optional)

Once created, click "Go to Function Definition"


Click "Edit Draft" to configure the feature definition for your product.


Click "Add Self-defined Feature" and configure the corresponding "services" and "events," see Add Single TSL Model for an introduction to services and events. Note: When configuring the service, the invocation mode only supports asynchronous.



Configuring the service (not required when using  Custom Topic)

 

Click "Add Parameter" under "Input Parameter" and configure the appropriate input parameters

Configure the “Events” (you don't need to configure this when using custom Topic)

 

Under "Output Parameter" click "Add Parameter" and configure the appropriate output parameters.

 

Click "Release Online" when the configuration is complete to submit the configuration.


Step 3: Export the Object Model TSL

After the product configuration is completed, click "TSL Model" on the "Define Feature" page, then select "Full TSL" and click "Export TSL File" for subsequent use. Note: Do not select "reduced object model" when exporting object model, otherwise it may lead to abnormal data reporting.



1.2 Creating the device

Go to Devices > Devices > Device List and click Add Device.


Select the product created in the previous step and configure the other parameters.


Click "Learn more" to view the details of the device after adding successfully.

 

The "Device Information" page looks like this:


At this point, the corresponding products and devices have been configured in the iot cloud platform of Alibaba Cloud.

2. Edge computing gateway configuration

2.1 Data Collection Configuration

The data collection configuration for Standard MQTT Cloud Services is illustrated in the diagram (for Modbus controller setup and instructions, please refer to the Quick Start):

 

2.2 Connect to Alibaba Cloud

On the MQTT Cloud Service page, check "Enable Cloud " and select the type as "Alibaba Cloud" Alibaba Cloud IoT has two authentication methods: Unique-certificate-per-device Authentication and Unique-certificate-per-product. For detailed information about authentication methods, please refer to Alibaba Cloud device security certification

When connecting to Alibaba Cloud IoT using the " Unique-certificate-per-device Authentication " authentication method, choose the authentication method as " Unique-certificate-per-device Authentication." The example configuration is as follows:


The parameters are described as follows:

  1. Region ID: For the configuration of the Region ID, refer to the Region and zone document where the region name is East China 2, thus use cn-shanghai.


  1. Authentication Method: Choose the authentication method according to the actual situation, and use one machine and one secret this time
  2. ProductKey: Go to the "Devices > Devices >IoTTest" page, click "View" after "DeviceSecret" to copy the authentication information.


  1. DeviceName: Get the ProductKey of the same machine.
  2. DeviceSecret: Gets the ProductKey of the same machine secret of the method.
  3. TSL Model: Import the Thing Model file saved when importing Create product. Note: In "Message Management," if only "Custom Topic" type messages are used, importing the TSL Model is not necessary. 
The following figure shows the successful connection to Alibaba cloud IoT:

When using the authentication method of "Unique-certificate-per-product" to establish a connection with Alibaba Cloud IoT, choose the authentication method of "Unique-certificate-per-product". The example configuration is as follows:

 

Note:

When the authentication method is " Unique-certificate-per-product ", "Dynamic Registration" needs to be enabled.

Only non-activated devices support the establishment of connection with Alibab Cloud IoT through the mode of Unique-certificate-per-product and the device is automatically activated after the connection is established. After activation, the device switches to Unique-certificate-per-device Authentication connection with Ali Cloud IoT. You can check whether the device has an activation time on the device page to determine whether the device has been activated.



The parameters are explained as follows:

  1. Region ID: Same as Unique-certificate-per-device Authentication
  2. Auth Method: Choose the authentication method according to the actual situation, and use Unique-certificate-per-product this time
  3. ProductKey: Go to the page of "Devices > Devices > Aliyun IoT" and click "View" after "ProductSecret" to copy the authentication information.

  1. DeviceName: The name of the device, to obtain the ProductKey of the same machine.
  2. ProductSecret: Gets the ProductKey of the same type of method.
  3. TSL Model: Import the Thing Model file saved during the import of Create a productNote: It is not necessary to import the Thing Model when only using "Custom Topic" type messages in "Message Management."

The following figure shows the successful connection to Alibaba Cloud IoT:


2.3 Publish the message to Aliyun IoT

Add publish on the MQTT Cloud Service page. There are three types of Add publish supported: Custom Topic, Properties, and Events.

For the data format requirements during data reporting, refer to the TSL model development

Note: When using Attribute reporting and Event reporting, please ensure that the "TSL Model TSL" matches the thing model of the product in Alibaba Cloud IoT.

2.3.1 Custom Topic

An example configuration for Posting a message with a Custom Topic type is as follows:


The Posting message configuration parameters are described as follows:

  1. Name: user-defined release name (Note: this name is unique in the message management of all cloud services and the release message name in the custom fast function)
  1. Trigger Source Type: The type of the release message, supporting "Measuring Point Group" and "Alarm Message".
  1. Group/Label: Select according to the "Trigger Source Type", if it is Measuring Point Group", select the group of the measurement point, if it is "Alarm Message", select the label of the alarm.
  1. Hide Offline Data: When enabled, off-line measurement points will be blocked and no longer published
  1. Type: Support "Custom Topic", "Properties", "Events".
  1. Topic: Publish Topic, which is consistent with the Topic class whose "Operation Authorization" is "Publish" in "Devices > Products > AliyunIoT > Topic Categories > Topic Category" page of Aliyun IoT. Note: The ProductKey and DeviceName information in the theme will be completed automatically. Just copy the topic information after ${deviceName}/ when configurating the theme.


  1. Qos(MQTT) : Published Qos, recommended to be consistent with the Qos of the MQTT server.
  1. Entry Function: Keep the same name as the entry function in the script
  1. QuikFunction: Use Python code to customize the group package and publishing logic. When adding publishing messages, there is a default publishing script, and the default script can publish messages. You can modify this script according to your needs.
2.3.2Properties

You can go to "Devices> Product > Aliyun IoT > Define Feature" page to view the product attribute events and other information. The example product has an attribute named "Working Status" with the identifier of "LightStatus". Using the example script, the value of the "LightStatus" variable can be uploaded to Alibaba Cloud IoT through the attribute report, and the configuration is as follows.

Please refer to Custom topic for the description of the configuration parameters of the release message.

Use the default Topic.

Example function code:

# Enter your python code.
import json
import random
from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.aliyuniot import thing_post_property


def main(message):
    logger.debug(message)
    for measure in message['measures']:
        if measure['name'] == 'LightStatus':
            thing_post_property(__topic__, {"LightStatus": measure['value']})

The attribute status can be viewed in "Devices> Devices > IoTTest > TSL Data > Status" page of Alibaba Cloud IoT.


Events

You can go to the "Device Management > Product > Ali Cloud IoT > Function Feature" page to view the product's attribute events and other information. The sample product has an event named "Event test" with an identifier of "event_test". Using the example script, the value of "event_test" variable can be uploaded to Alibaba Cloud IoT through event reporting, as configured below.

See Custom topic for a description of the configuration parameters for publishing messages.

Use the default Topic.

Example function code:

# Enter your python code.
import json
import random
from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.aliyuniot import thing_trigger_event


def main(message):
    logger.debug(message)
    if message['measureName'] == 'event_test': 
       thing_trigger_event(__topic__, ("event_test", {"ErrorCode": message['value']}))

When triggering an event report, you need to configure an alarm rule for the "event_test" measurement point. The alarm information is as follows (for configuring alarm rules, please refer to: 2.2 Alarm Rules):

 

After configuring the alarm rule, modifying the measurement point's value to be greater than 15 will trigger an event message report. You can view the property status on the "Devices > Devices > IoTTest > TSL Data > Events" page in Alibaba Cloud IoT.



2.4 Subscribe to Aliyun IoT's messages

On the MQTT Cloud Services page, add subscription messages under "Message Management > Subscribe". Subscription messages support four types of messages: Custom Topic, Service Call, Property Setting and RRPC.

2.4.1 Custom topic

An example configuration with a custom topic message type is as follows:


The subscribe message configuration parameters are explained as follows:

  1. Name: Custom subscription name (Note: this name is unique in the message management of all cloud services and the name of subscription messages in custom fast functions)
  2. Type: Support 4 types, namely: Custom Topic, Service Call, Property Setting, RRPC.
  3. Topic: Subscribe Topic, which is consistent with the Topic class whose "operation permission" is "Subscribe" in "Devices > Products > Ali Cloud IoT > Topic Categories > Topic Category" page of Ali Cloud IoT. Note: The ProductKey and DeviceName information in the topic will be completed automatically. Just copy the topic information after ${deviceName}/ when configurating the topic.
  4. Qos: Subscribe to Qos, default is 1.
  5. Entry Function: Keep the same name as the entry function in the script
  6. Payload types: Plaintext, Base64, JSON, HEX supported
  7. QuickFunction: Use Python code to customize the unpacking and subscription logic. When adding a subscription message, there is a default subscription script, and the default script can subscribe to the message. You can modify this script according to your needs.
2.4.2 Service Call

The following is an example of a service call that can accept the "Service test" setup instruction issued by Aliyun IoT. Note: When using the service test, make sure that the "TSL Model" in the gateway is consistent with the thing model of the product in Aliyun IoT.


For the explanation of Service Call parameters, please refer to Custom Topic. (Note: Unlike Custom Topic, you need to modify the default Topic. The service identifier can be obtained under "Devices > Product> Aliyun IoT >Define Feature ").

 

Example function code:

# Enter your python code.
import json
import random
from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.aliyuniot import thing_answer_service

def main(topic, payload):
    logger.info(topic)
    topic = topic + "_reply"
    thing_answer_service(topic, {"Power": random.randint(0, 10)})

Enter the "Maintenance > Online debug > Debugging real equipment > service calls" page of Alibaba Cloud IoT to select the corresponding products and equipment for service call test; Check the service call information in the "Devices > Devices > IoTTset> TSL Model> Invoke Service" page.




2.4.3 Property Settings

The following is an example of property setting, which can accept the "Working status" instruction issued by Ali Cloud IoT. Note: When using the property Settings, make sure that the "TSL Model" in the gateway is consistent with the TSL Model of the product in Aliyun IoT.


Please refer to Custom topic for instructions on subscribe message configuration parameters.

Example function code:

# Enter your python code.
import json
from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.measure import write_plc_values


def write_callback(message, userdata):
    logger.debug("write plc response: %s, userdata:%s" % (message, userdata))


def main(topic, payload, cloudName):
    logger.debug("subscribe topic: %s, payload: %s, cloudName: %s" % (topic, payload, cloudName))
    write_plc_values(message={"LightStatus":json.loads(payload)['params']['LightStatus']}, callback=write_callback, userdata="") 

Enter the "Maintenance > Online Debug > Debugging real equipment > Property Debugging" page of Ali Cloud IoT to select the corresponding products, devices, debugging functions and methods for attribute setting testing; Check the running status of the equipment in the "Devices > Devices> IoTTest >TSL Model > Status" page.



2.4.4 RRPC

See Custom topic for instructions on subscribe message configuration parameters. (Note: Please select Base64 for Payload type)

Example code function:

# Enter your python code.
import json
import base64
from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.aliyuniot import thing_answer_rrpc


def main(topic, payload):
    logger.debug(topic)
    logger.debug(base64.b64decode(payload))
    topic = topic.replace("request", "response")
    thing_answer_rrpc(topic, payload) 

After configuring the gateway, click the link here to enter the interface of calling RRPC service.


When the value of "success" in the result information is true, the delivery is considered successful

"RequestBase64Byte" means you want to send a Base64-encoded message. For example, the Base64-encoded value for {" Power ":1} is eyJQb3dlciI6IDF9.

Finally, you will be able to view the sent message in the gateway log


AWS IoT Instructions

1. AWS IoT Configuration

If you've already configured the things, policies, and certificates in the AWS IoT console, you can go straight to the next section Edge Computing Gateway Configuration. Otherwise, follow the process below to configure the IoT console. Visit the AWS official website https://aws.amazon.com/ and log in to the console. Users in China region can use AWS services in AWS China region at https://cn-northwest-1.console.amazonaws.cn. It should be noted that the data of the two are independent of each other. Select "IoT Core" after logging into the console, or "AWS IoT" when using AWS services in China. Once logged in, search for "Amazon IoT" and once inside create an item and attach policies and download certificates.









2. Edge Computing Gateway configuration

2.1 Data Collection Configuration

The data collection configuration for the Standard MQTT Cloud Service is illustrated in the diagram (for Modbus controller setup and instructions, please refer to the Quick Start):


2.2 Connect to AWS IoT

On the MQTT Cloud Services page, check "Enable Cloud" and select the type as "AWS IoT." An example configuration is as follows:


The parameters are described as follows:

  1. Endpoint: The address of the AWS IoT end node, which can be obtained from the "Settings" page of AWS IoT. Remove the "-ats" from the address when using "VeriSign Class 3 Public Primary G5 Root CA Certificate"

  2. Client ID: Any unique ID
  3. Certificate For Thing: Import the item certificate downloaded when creating the item or a custom certificate
  4. Private key: Import the private key downloaded when creating the item or a custom private key
  5. rootCA: Import the CA certificate used for server authentication, you can either import the CA1 certificate downloaded when creating the item, or download the corresponding CA certificate from here (Amazon Root CA1 or Starfield Root CA certificate is recommended). "Amazon Root CA 3" certificates are not currently supported
  6. Port: 8883

Use the default configuration for the rest


2.3 Publish messages to AWS IoT

Add a publish message in MQTT Cloud Service > Message Management with the following configuration:

Example function code:

# Enter your python code.
import json
from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.awsiot import awsiot_publish


def main(message):
    logger.debug(message)
    awsiot_publish(__topic__, json.dumps(message), __qos__)

The publish message configuration parameters are described as follows:

  1. Name: user-defined release name (Note: this name is unique in the message management of all cloud services and the release message name in the custom fast function)
  2. Trigger Source Type: The type of the published message, supporting "Measuring Point Group" and "Alarm Message".
  3. Group/Label: Select according to the " Trigger Source Type ", if it is " Measuring Point Group ", select the group of the measurement point, if it is " Alarm Message ", select the label of the alarm.
  4. Hide Offline Data: When enabled, off-line measurement points will be blocked and no longer published
  5. Topic: Custom Topic
  6. Qos(MQTT) : QoS is released
  7. Entry Function: Keep the same name as the entry function in the script
  8. QuikFunction: Customize the group package and release logic using Python code.

Subscribe to messages in AWS IoT

Go to the "test /MQTT test client" page of AWS IoT and enter the publishing Topic of the gateway in "Subscribe to a topic", this document is awsiot/test.


After subscribing to the message, after subscribing to the topic, you can view the content of the received message in the Subscribe topic page.


2.4 Subscribe to AWS IoT messages

Add a subscribe message in MQTT Cloud Services > Message Management with the following configuration:


  1. Name: Custom subscription name (Note: this name is unique in all cloud services' message management and subscription messages in custom fast functions)
  1. Topic: The subscription topic, which is consistent with the topics published by AWS
  1. Qos(MQTT) : Subscribe to Qos, defaults to 1.
  1. Entry Function: Keep the same name as the entry function in the script
  1. Payload Type: Plaintext, Base64, JSON, HEX supported
  1. QuickFunction: Use Python code to customize the unpacking and subscription logic. When adding a subscription message, there is a default subscription script, which can subscribe to the message. You can modify this script according to your needs.

Configure the Topic and Payload of the published message in AWS. After clicking Publish, the published message will be viewed in the gateway's log




Instructions for Azure IoT

1. Azure IoT Configuration

If you have already configured the corresponding IoT Hub and IoT device in Azure IoT, you can directly check the next section Edge Computing Gateway configuration. Otherwise, follow the process below to configure Azure IoT. Log in to Azure by visiting https://portal.azure.cn/.

1.1 Creating the device

Once logged in to Azure, select "IoT Hub"



Click "Create" to create an IoT Hub.



Click "Create new" to create a resource group, or use an existing resource group.



After successful creation, create a device. It looks like this:



The following screenshot shows the successful creation:


2. Edge Computing Gateway configuration

2.1 Data Collection Configuration

The data collection configuration for the Standard MQTT Cloud Service is illustrated in the diagram (for Modbus controller setup and instructions, please refer to the Quick start):


2.2 Connect Azure IoT

On the MQTT Cloud Service page, select Enable Cloud Service and set Type to Azure IoT. The following is an example configuration:


The parameters are described as follows:

  1. Auth Method: There are three authentication methods (Symmetric Key; X.509 Self-Signed; X.509 CA Signed), chosen based on the type of authentication the device was created with.
  1. Connection String: The primary connection string of the Azure IoT Device, you can select the appropriate device from Azure IoT's IoT Hub and copy the primary connection string to here


2.3 Publish messages to Azure IoT

Add a publish message in MQTT Cloud Services > Message Management with the following configuration:


The release message configuration parameters are explained as follows:

  1. Name: user-defined release name (Note: this name is unique in the message management of all cloud services and the release message name in the custom fast function)
  2. Trigger Source Type: The type of the release message, supporting "Measuring Point Group" and "Alarm Message".
  3. Group/Label: Select according to the " Trigger Source Type ", if it is " Measuring Point Group ", select the group of the measurement point, if it is " Alarm Message ", select the label of the alarm.
  4. Hide Offline Data: When enabled, off-line measurement points will be blocked and no longer published
  5. Topic: A custom Topic
  6. Qos(MQTT) :Qos is released
  7. Entry Function: Keep the same name as the entry function in the script
  8. QuickFunction: Customize the group package and release logic using Python code. (Just use the default code provided)

Use VS Code's Azure IoT Tools plugin to establish a connection to IoT Hub

Once you've posted your message after submitting, use the Azure IoT Tools plugin of Visual Studio Code software (hereinafter referred to as VS Code) to view the messages sent to Azure IoT. You can visit: https://code.visualstudio.com/Download for the corresponding Visual Studio Code software (hereinafter referred to as the v Code). Once VS Code is installed, open VS Code and click on "Extensions", enter Azure IoT Tools in the search box and install the Azure IoT Tools plugin.

You can see the Azure module on the left after the installation.


Click on "Explorer > AZURE IOT HUB" to expand AZURE IOT HUB. Click on "... > Set IoT Hub Connection String "Set the IoT Hub connection string. Enter the IoT Hub connection string in the prompt box. The connection string for the IoT Hub is available from the "Policy Name > iothubowner" page for the specified IoT hub.



Enter the connection string and press Enter under "AZURE IOT HUB" to see the created Azure IoT Device and the connection status.

Right click on the specified Azure IoT Device and select Start Monitoring Built-in Event Endpoint from the menu to see the data pushed by the gateway to the IoT Hub.


Fill in the string shown below in the pop-up window to view the reported data



2.4 Subscribe to Azure IoT messages

Add a subscribe message in MQTT Cloud Services > Message Management with the following configuration:


  1. Name: Custom subscription name (Note: this name is unique in all cloud services' message management and subscription messages in custom fast functions)
  1. Topic: The subscription topic, which is consistent with the topics published by AWS
  1. Entry Function: Keep the same name as the entry function in the script
  1. Payload Type: Plaintext, Base64, JSON, HEX supported
  1. QuickFunction: Customize unpacking and subscription logic using Python code. This script can be modified according to your needs.

# Enter your python code.
import json
from common.Logger import logger

def main(topic, payload):
    logger.debug(topic)
    logger.debug(payload)
Right click on the specified Azure IoT Device and select Send C2D Message to Device from the menu to send the data to the gateway.

Enter the data you want to send in the send box, such as {" message ":" hello "}


After hitting Enter to send the data, you can see a log of the successful delivery of the message in the Output window


At the same time, you can also view the sent message in the log of the gateway side

 


Appendix: Exported configuration files instruction

Measuring Point CSV File Parameter Description

Parameter Name

Interface Configuration Items

MeasuringPointName

Name of measurement point

ControllerName

Controller name

GroupName

Subgroups

UploadType

Upload mode, support periodic, onchange, never

DeadZonePercent

variation deadband

DataType

data type

ArrayIndex

Array index, configure this parameter only if it is an OPC UA protocol or an OPC UA PUBSUB protocol.

EnableBit

rounding up to the nearest integer

BitIndex

classifier for honorific people

reverseBit

retrieve the opposite of what one intended

Address

measurement point address

Decimal

Decimal places, this parameter is configured when the data type is FLOAT or DOUBLE.

Len

Length, configured when the data type is STRING.

CodeType

Character encoding format, this parameter is configured when the data type is STRING.

ReadWrite

read-write access

Unit

unit (of measure)

Description

descriptions

Transform Type

Data operations, none is none, gain is proportional conversion, zoom is offset and scaling, ptct is PT/CT, bit is bit interception

MaxValue

Data ceiling

MinValue

lower limit of data

MaxScale

Percentage cap

MinScale

lower limit of proportionality

Gain

magnification

Offset

offset

startBit

starting position

endBit

end position

Pt

Pt

Ct

Ct

Mapping_table

A mapping table for numeric mapping, e.g. to configure the original value to be 1 and the mapped value to be 2, the content of this item would be [{'source': 1, 'target': 2}].

TransDecimal

Data operations are proportional conversions, offsets and scaling, and decimal place parameters in PT/CT configuration.

bitMap

When the data type is BIT, or after using bitwise interception, the enabled value maps to 1, and vice versa to 0

msecSample

When group packet reporting is enabled by the controller, the measurement point is configured for group packet reporting as 1 and vice versa as 0

storageLwTSDB

Storing Historical Data

DataEndianReverse

Measurement point byte order of measurement points for simple drive protocols, 0 for agreement with the controller, 1 for the opposite of the controller

ReadOffset

Start reading bytes

ReadLength

Read byte length

WriteOffset

Start write byte

WriteLength

Write Byte Length

DataParseMethod

Resolution of measurement points for simple driver protocols

BitId

abandoned

pollCycle

Polling cycle. 0 is the polling cycle, 1 is the polling cycle 2

Description of the address of the measuring point:

Controllers

Address Example

Instructions

DNP3 TCP

0-2-3-4

0: Digital input

2: Group number

3: Variants

4: Address

*EFORT Robot

ReadEfortData_0

Robot Details

*FANUC Robot

ReadFanucData_0

Robot Details

*FANUC CNC 0i

ReadSpindleSpeed_0

Mainframe Rotation

FATEK Programe Port/

FATEK Programe Port over TCP

X1

X: address type; 1: address

*HJ212-2005-Serial/

HJ212-2017-Serial

1-Rtd/1-Flag

1: address; - Rtd: contaminant real-time data / - Flag: contaminant sampling flag

IEC 61850 MMS

simpleIOGenericIO/LLN0.NamPlt.ldNs[ST]

simpleIOGenericIO/LLN0.NamPlt.ldNs: object references, ST: functional constraints

Modbus ASCII
Modbus RTU

Modbus RTU over TCP

Modbus TCP

Modbus RTU Slave

0X0001

0X: Coil register
1X: Discrete register (
not supported by Modbus RTU Slave)

3X: Input register (not supported by Modbus RTU Slave)

4X: Holding register

MC 1E/MC 3E/MC 3C/MC 3C over TCP/MITSUBISHI Programe Port (Programming Port)

X1

X: address type; 1: address

FINS TCP/FINS UDP/HostLink

D1

D: address type; 1: address

OPC UA

ns=1;s=1

ns= : NS (namespace index); s=: address type String, or "i=" if address type is Number

*OPC UA PUBSUB

100;1,200;2/100;1

100: Subscription Group ID

1: Subscription Write ID

200: Release group ID

2: Publish Write ID

If the measuring point is read-only, only a 100;1 subscription grouping and write ID is required

Mewtocol

X1

X: address type; 1: address

ISO-on-TCP/PPI

I1

I: address type; 1: address

Remaining controllers

1

For the rest of the controllers, just fill in an integer for the address of the measurement point.

ABB Robot Address Notes:

Read Type

Address

Current control status

GetCtrlState_0

current error state

GetErrorState_0

Physical joint information

GetJointTarget_0

Speed Ratio Information

GetSpeedRatio_0

Current working mode

GetOperationMode_0

Local Input IO

GetIOIn_0

Local Output IO

GetIOOut_0

Local input IO2

GetIO2In_0

Local output IO2

GetIO2Out_0

Logging

GetLog_{"length":10}

System Information

GetSystem_0

Target coordinate information

GetRobotTarget_0

Servo Enable State

GetServoEnable_0

Current program running status

GetRapidExecution_0

Task List

GetRapidTasks_0

Address description for BACnet IP / BACnet MS/TP (the address parameters are all set to 1):

Object Type

Address

analogue input

AI,1

analogue output

AO,1

analogue value

AV,1

digital input

BI,1

digital output

BO,1

numerical value

BV,1

Polymorphic inputs

MSI,1

polymorphic output

MSO,1

polymorphic value

MSV,1

control loop

LOOP,1

Trend recording

TRENDLOG,1

Minimum Extended Object

PROPRIETARY_MIN,1

CJT188-2004 Measuring point address description:

Data Message Name

Data Identification

Point

Address (<Data Identification: Point Serial Number>)

Reading of metrological data

901F-16 (optional when meter type in controller is 10, 11, 12, 13, 30, 40)

Current cumulative traffic;

Current cumulative flow units;

Accumulated traffic on the settlement date;

Cumulative flow units on the settlement date;

Real time (writable)

status word

901F-16:00

901F-16:01

901F-16:02

901F-16:03

901F-16:04

901F-16:05

901F-2E (optional when meter type in controller is 20, 21)

Settlement day calories.

Settlement day heat unit;

Current heat;

Current heat units;

Thermal power;

Thermal power units;

Flow;

Flow units;

Cumulative flow;

Cumulative flow units;

Water supply temperature;

Return water temperature;

Accumulation of working hours;

Real time; (writable)

status word

901F-2E:06

901F-2E:07

901F-2E:08

901F-2E:09

901F-2E:0A

901F-2E:0B

901F-2E:0C

901F-2E:0D

901F-2E:0E

901F-2E:0F

901F-2E:10

901F-2E:11

901F-2E:12

901F-2E:04

901F-2E:05

Historical measurement data

D120~D12B (12 addresses in total)

10 : A

11 : B

Settlement date of last X months (cumulative flow/heat)

Settlement date of last X months (cumulative flow/calorie) units

D12X:13

D12X:14

Read the price list

8102

Price I; (optional)

Dosage I; (may be written)

Price II; (optional)

Dosage II; (may be written)

Price III (optional)

8102:15

8102:16

8102:17

8102:18

8102:19

invoice date

8103

Closing date (optional)

8103:1A

meter reading day

8104

Day of meter reading (optional)

8104:1B

Read purchase amount

8105

Serial number of this purchase; (optional)

Amount of the current purchase; (optional)

Cumulative purchase amount;

Remaining amount

status word

8105:1C

8105:1D

8105:1E

8105:1F

8105:05

IEC 101/IEC 103/IEC 104 Address description (the value of the IOA address is fixed to 1):

Address Type

Address

Single-Point Information

1 1

Double-Point Information

3 1

Step Position Information

5 1

Bitstring(32bit)

7 1

Measured Value (Normalised)

9 1

Measured Value (Scaled)

11 1

Measured Value (Short Float)

13 1

Integrated Totals

15 1

Parameter

110 1

Single Command

45 1

Double Command

46 1

Regulating Step Command

47 1

Set point command-Measured Value (Normalised)

48 1

Set point command-Measured Value (Scaled)

49 1

Set point command-Measured Value (Short Float)

50 1

Bitstring command(32bit)

51 1

Grouping CSV File parameter instructions

Parameter Name

Interface Configuration Items

GroupName

Name of the subgroup

UploadInterval

Reporting cycle

EnablePerOnchange

Periodic reporting of Onchange data

OnchangePeriod

Onchange reporting cycle

LwTSDBSize

Maximum number of bars. Range 1-150,000

strategy

Storage strategy. 1: synchronised with reporting cycle; 2: independent storage cycle

storagePeriod

Storage period in seconds. Range 1-86400

historyDataMode

Storage method. gateway: gateway storage; usb: USB; sd: SD card

historyDataPath

Storage path

Alarm rule CSV file parameter description

Parameter Name

Interface Configuration Items

AlarmName

Alarm name

ControllerName

Controller Name

MeasuringPointName

Name of measurement point

AlarmLevel

warning level

Condition1

Judgement condition 1."=", "! =", ">", "≥", "<", "≤ " correspond to "eq", "neq", "gt", "egt ", "lt", "elt".

Operand1

The value of condition 1 can only be an integer or a decimal.

CombineMethod

Judgement conditions. none: no logical condition; and: && logical condition; or: || logical condition

Condition2

Judgement condition 2."=", "! =", ">", "≥", "<", "≤ " correspond to "eq", "neq", "gt", "egt ", "lt", "elt".

Operand2

The value of condition 2 can only be an integer or a decimal.

AlarmContent

Alarm content, can't exceed 70 characters

AlarmTag

warning label

Alarm label CSV file parameter introduction

Parameter Name

Interface Configuration Items

AlarmLableName

Alarm label name, range 1-240 bytes

Description of CSV file parameters for Settings of Upper cloud measuring points

Parameter Name

Interface Configuration Items

MeasuringPointName

Name of measurement point

ControllerName

Controller Name

GroupName

Name of the subgroup

UploadName

Name of the upward cloud measurement point

Hide

Shielded. 0 is an unshielded test point; 1 is a shielded test point.

Mapping table CSV file parameter introduction

Modbus TCP Slave

Parameter Name

Interface Configuration Items

Measuring Point Name

Name of measurement point

Controller Name

Name of the controller to which the measurement point belongs

readWrite

Read and write permissions, with values consistent with the read and write permissions of the measurement points in the controller.

Data Type

Raw data type, consistent with the data type of this measurement point in the controller

Mapping Data Type

Mapping Data Types

EnableBit

Consistent with the per-bit value of this measurement point in the controller, 1 if the measurement point is enabled, 0 if it is not enabled, and null if it does not have this configuration, e.g. EnableBit is null if the original data type of the measurement point is FLOAT.

Start Mapping Address

Starting address in the Modbus TCP Slave's registers.

IEC 104 Server

Parameter Name

Interface Configuration Items

Measuring Point Name

Name of measurement point

Controller Name

Name of the controller to which the measurement point belongs

Data Type

Raw data type, consistent with the data type of this measurement point in the controller

Mapping Data Type

Mapping Data Types

EnableBit

Consistent with the per-bit value of this measurement point in the controller, 1 if the measurement point is enabled, 0 if it is not enabled, and null if it does not have this configuration, e.g. EnableBit is null if the original data type of the measurement point is FLOAT.

ASDU

ASDU address, selected from the server list in the IEC 104 Server configuration. Range 0-65534

Type Id

Type ID

startIOA

Starting IOA address, range 1-16777215

Modbus RTU Slave

Parameter Name

Interface Configuration Items

Measuring Point Name

Name of measurement point

Controller Name

Name of the controller to which the measurement point belongs

readWrite

Read and write permissions, with values consistent with the read and write permissions of the measurement points in the controller.

Data Type

Raw data type, consistent with the data type of this measurement point in the controller

Mapping Data Type

Mapping Data Types

EnableBit

Consistent with the per-bit value of this measurement point in the controller, 1 if the measurement point is enabled, 0 if it is not enabled, and null if it does not have this configuration, e.g. EnableBit is null if the original data type of the measurement point is FLOAT.

Start Mapping Address

Starting address in the Modbus RTU Slave's registers.

IEC 101 Server

Parameter Name

Interface Configuration Items

Measuring Point Name

Name of measurement point

Controller Name

Name of the controller to which the measurement point belongs

readWrite

Read and write permissions, with values consistent with the read and write permissions of the measurement points in the controller.

Data Type

Raw data type, consistent with the data type of this measurement point in the controller

Mapping Data Type

Mapping Data Types

EnableBit

Consistent with the per-bit value of this measurement point in the controller, 1 if the measurement point is enabled, 0 if it is not enabled, and null if it does not have this configuration, e.g. EnableBit is null if the original data type of the measurement point is FLOAT.

ASDU

ASDU address, selected from the server list in the IEC 104 Server configuration. Range 0-65534

Type Id

Type ID

startIOA

Starting IOA address, range 1-16777215

SL651

Parameter Name

Interface Configuration Items

Measuring Point Name

Name of measurement point

Controller Name

Name of the controller to which the measurement point belongs

readWrite

Read and write permissions, with values consistent with the read and write permissions of the measurement points in the controller.

Data Type

Raw data type, consistent with the data type of this measurement point in the controller

Mapping Data Type

Mapping Data Types

EnableBit

Consistent with the per-bit value of this measurement point in the controller, 1 if the measurement point is enabled, 0 if it is not enabled, and null if it does not have this configuration, e.g. EnableBit is null if the original data type of the measurement point is FLOAT.

Identifi

Type of element

HJ212 Client

Parameter Name

Interface Configuration Items

Measuring Name

Name of measurement point

Controller Name

Name of the controller to which the measurement point belongs

readWrite

Read and write permissions, with values consistent with the read and write permissions of the measurement points in the controller.

Data Type

Raw data type, consistent with the data type of this measurement point in the controller

Mapping Data Type

Mapping Data Types

EnableBit

Consistent with the per-bit value of this measurement point in the controller, 1 if the measurement point is enabled, 0 if it is not enabled, and null if it does not have this configuration, e.g. EnableBit is null if the original data type of the measurement point is FLOAT.

Encode

Monitoring Factor Coding

Block

data set

BACnet IP Server

Parameter Name

Interface Configuration Items

Control Name

Name of the controller to which the measurement point belongs

Measuring Point Name

Name of measurement point

Read/Write

Read and write permissions, with values consistent with the read and write permissions of the measurement points in the controller.

Data Type

Raw data type, consistent with the data type of this measurement point in the controller

Mapping Data Type

Mapping Data Types

EnableBit

Consistent with the per-bit value of this measurement point in the controller, 1 if the measurement point is enabled, 0 if it is not enabled, and null if it does not have this configuration, e.g. EnableBit is null if the original data type of the measurement point is FLOAT.

Object Type

Object types. Analogue Input: AI, Analogue Output: AO, Analogue Value: AV, Multistate Input: MSI, Multistate Output: MSO, Multistate Value: MSV

Instance Number

Instance number, range 0-1023

BACnet MS/TP Server

Parameter Name

Interface Configuration Items

Control Name

Name of the controller to which the measurement point belongs

Measuring Point Name

Name of measurement point

Read/Write

Read and write permissions, with values consistent with the read and write permissions of the measurement points in the controller.

Data Type

Raw data type, consistent with the data type of this measurement point in the controller

Mapping Data Type

Mapping Data Types

EnableBit

Consistent with the per-bit value of this measurement point in the controller, 1 if the measurement point is enabled, 0 if it is not enabled, and null if it does not have this configuration, e.g. EnableBit is null if the original data type of the measurement point is FLOAT.

Object Type

Object types. Analogue Input: AI, Analogue Output: AO, Analogue Value: AV, Multistate Input: MSI, Multistate Output: MSO, Multistate Value: MSV

Instance Number

Instance number, range 0-1023

DNP3 Outstation

Parameter Name

Interface Configuration Items

Measuring Name

Name of measurement point

Controller Name

Name of the controller to which the measurement point belongs

readWrite

Read and write permissions, with values consistent with the read and write permissions of the measurement points in the controller.

Data Type

Raw data type, consistent with the data type of this measurement point in the controller

Mapping Data Type

Mapping Data Types

EnableBit

Consistent with the per-bit value of this measurement point in the controller, 1 if the measurement point is enabled, 0 if it is not enabled, and null if it does not have this configuration, e.g. EnableBit is null if the original data type of the measurement point is FLOAT.

Object Type

Address type of the mapped address

Instance Number

mapping address

IEC 61850 Server

Parameter Name

Interface Configuration Items

Measuring Name

Name of measurement point

Controller Name

Name of the controller to which the measurement point belongs

readWrite

Read and write permissions, with values consistent with the read and write permissions of the measurement points in the controller.

Data Type

Raw data type, consistent with the data type of this measurement point in the controller

Mapping Data Type

Mapping Data Types

EnableBit

Consistent with the per-bit value of this measurement point in the controller, 1 if the measurement point is enabled, 0 if it is not enabled, and null if it does not have this configuration, e.g. EnableBit is null if the original data type of the measurement point is FLOAT.

CDC Type

Data object type

Data Attribute Reference

mapping address

Add Data Set

Add to dataset

Data Set Name

Data set name

SNMP Agent

Parameter Name

Interface Configuration Items

Measuring Name

Name of measurement point

Controller Name

Name of the controller to which the measurement point belongs

readWrite

Read and write permissions, with values consistent with the read and write permissions of the measurement points in the controller.

Data Type

Raw data type, consistent with the data type of this measurement point in the controller

Mapping Data Type

Mapping Data Types

EnableBit

Consistent with the per-bit value of this measurement point in the controller, 1 if the measurement point is enabled, 0 if it is not enabled, and null if it does not have this configuration, e.g. EnableBit is null if the original data type of the measurement point is FLOAT.

OID

OID node address

Custom parameters CSV file parameter instructions

Note: The exported CSV file does not contain information about SN and MAC

Parameter Name

Interface Configuration Items

key

parameters

value

parameter value

Description of cloud service profile parameters

Standard MQTT cloud service

Parameter Name

Interface Configuration Items

clouds

Configuration information for cloud services

type

"Standard MQTT"

cacheSize

Cache size setting, range 1~65535

enable

0: Disable cloud services, 1: Enable cloud services

args

Parameter sets specific to different cloud services

host

server address

clientId

Client ID

auth

0: user authentication is not enabled; 1: user authentication is enabled

username

user ID

passwd

cryptographic

key

Client Private Key

cert

Client Certificates

rootCA

CA certificate

port

port number

keepalive

Keep Alive

tls

0: TLS encryption not enabled; 1: symmetric encryption; 2: asymmetric encryption

cleanSession

Clear Session

mqttVersion

MQTT version; v3.1/v3.1.1

tlsAuth

Authentication method ("caSigned": CA signature; "caSelfSigned": CA self-signature)

verifyServer

Validating server certificates

willTopic

Wills MessageTopic

willQos

Probate Message Qos

willRetain

Will Message Retain

willPayload

Probate Message Payload

rootCA_content

CA certificate contents

cert_content

Client private key contents

key_content

Client certificate contents

uploadRules

Configuration of cloud measurement points

quickfaas

Message Management Configuration

uploadFuncs

Publishing Script Configuration

downloadFuncs

Subscription Script Configuration

MQTT SparkPlugB

Parameter Name

Interface Configuration Items

clouds

Configuration information for cloud services

type

"SparkPlugB MQTT."

cacheSize

Cache size setting, range 1~65535

enable

0: Disable cloud services, 1: Enable cloud services

args

Parameter sets specific to different cloud services

host

server address

clientId

Client ID

groupId

Grouping ID

auth

0: user authentication is not enabled; 1: user authentication is enabled

username

user ID

passwd

cryptographic

key

Client Private Key

cert

Client Certificates

rootCA

CA certificate

port

port number

keepalive

Keep Alive

tls

0: TLS encryption not enabled; 1: symmetric encryption; 2: asymmetric encryption

cleanSession

Clear Session

mqttVersion

MQTT version; v3.1/v3.1.1

tlsAuth

Authentication method ("caSigned": CA signature; "caSelfSigned": CA self-signature)

verifyServer

Validating server certificates

rootCA_content

CA certificate contents

cert_content

Client private key contents

key_content

Client certificate contents

uploadRules

Configuration of cloud measurement points

quickfaas

Message Management Configuration

uploadFuncs

Publishing Script Configuration

downloadFuncs

Subscription Script Configuration

Aliyun IoT

Parameter Name

Interface Configuration Items

clouds

Configuration information for cloud services

type

"Aliyun IoT"

cacheSize

Cache size setting, range 1~65535

enable

0: Disable cloud services, 1: Enable cloud services

args

Parameter sets specific to different cloud services

host

Region ID

connType

Authentication type: 0: one machine, one secret; 1: one type, one secret

productKey

AliCloud ProductKey

deviceName

Aliyun DeviceName

deviceSecret

AliCloud DeviceSecret (one machine, one secret)

productSecret

AliCloud ProductSecret (one type, one secret)

thingTSL

AliCloud Object Model TSL

rootCA

CA certificate

port

port number

keepalive

Keep Alive

tls

0: TLS encryption not enabled; 1: symmetric encryption; 2: asymmetric encryption

cleanSession

Clear Session

mqttVersion

MQTT version; v3.1/v3.1.1

uploadRules

Configuration of cloud measurement points

quickfaas

Message Management Configuration

uploadFuncs

Publishing Script Configuration

downloadFuncs

Subscription Script Configuration

AWS IoT

Parameter Name

Interface Configuration Items

clouds

Configuration information for cloud services

type

"AWS IoT."

cacheSize

Cache size setting, range 1~65535

enable

0: Disable cloud services, 1: Enable cloud services

args

Parameter sets specific to different cloud services

endPoint

AWS IoT End Nodes

clientId

Client ID

cert

Certificates for items

key

private key

rootCA

CA certificate

port

port number

keepalive

Keep Alive

cleanSession

Clear Session

mqttVersion

MQTT version; v3.1/v3.1.1

rootCA_content

CA certificate contents

cert_content

Contents of certificates for items

key_content

private key content

uploadRules

Configuration of cloud measurement points

quickfaas

Message Management Configuration

uploadFuncs

Publishing Script Configuration

downloadFuncs

Subscription Script Configuration

Azure IoT

Parameter Name

Interface Configuration Items

clouds

Configuration information for cloud services

type

"Azure IoT."

cacheSize

Cache size setting, range 1~65535

enable

0: Disable cloud services, 1: Enable cloud services

args

Parameter sets specific to different cloud services

authType

Authentication method

connectionString

Azure IoT connection string

deviceCA

Azure IoT Device Certificates

deviceKey

Azure IoT private key

uploadRules

Configuration of cloud measurement points

quickfaas

Message Management Configuration

uploadFuncs

Publishing Script Configuration

downloadFuncs

Subscription Script Configuration

Developer Guide

1 QuickFunction API Reference

This section describes the Python API used internally by the gateway, which provides a set of featent-rich interfaces that enable users to implement various operations and data processing on the gateway by writing Python scripts. This section will provide you with the necessary information and sample code to help you take full advantage of the features and performance of the product.

1.1 Publish Measuring Points/Alarms/Custom Data to cloud (publish QuickFunction)

  1. import API for publishing data to the cloud API:
from quickfaas.remotebus import publish

publish(topic, payload, qos=1, wizard_data=None, cloud_name="default")
  1. topic: The topic to publish the data on
  1. payload: The payload of the published data
  1. qos: The message level at which the data is published
  1. wizard_data: When the first push message fails, it is stored in the offline cache according to the topic, payload, qos specified by wizard_data (or using the sent topic, payload, qos if wizard_data is not specified), waiting for the connection to be restored and then uploaded to the MQTT server in chronological order
  1. The wizard_data format is as follows:

{"topic":<topic>, "qos":<qos>, "payload":<payload>}

  1. cloud_name: This specifies which cloud to publish to and can be used when multiple clouds are used together

When configuring the "publish" fast function, the message parameter of the fast function has two formats (depending on whether it is passed to wizard_api or not).

The entry function contains wizard_api parameter. The following script is an example (default script)

# Enter your python code.
import json
from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.remotebus import publish


def main(message, wizard_api, cloudName):
    logger.debug("publish topic:%s, payload: %s, cloudName: %s" % (__topic__, message, cloudName))
    publish(__topic__, json.dumps(message), __qos__, cloud_name=cloudName) 

Example of the incoming message data format:

{
    "timestamp": 1713498600,
    "timestampMsec": 1713498600121,
    "group_name": "default",
    "values": {
        "Modbus": {
            "word": {
                "raw_data": 22,
                "timestamp": 1713498592,
                "status": 1,
                "timestampMsec": 1713498592261
            }
        }
    } 
}

The Entry Function does not contain a wizard_api parameter, and an example script looks like this:

# Enter your python code.
import json
from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.remotebus import publish


def main(message, cloudName):
    logger.debug("publish topic:%s, payload: %s, cloudName: %s" % (__topic__, message, cloudName))
    publish(__topic__, json.dumps(message), __qos__, cloud_name=cloudName) 

Example of the incoming message data format:

{
    "timestamp": 1713498680,
    "timestampMsec": 1713498680121,
    "group": "default",
    "measures": [
        {
            "ctrlName": "Modbus",
            "name": "word",
            "health": 1,
            "timestamp": 1713498672,
            "timestampMsec": 1713498672278,
            "value": 22
        }
    ] 
}

1.2 Update the controller's measure-point values

1.2.1 Write

This interface is a synchronous write value interface. After the call is made, it will wait until the write value response message is received before returning.

API prototype:
def write(message, timeout=60, cloudName=None)
  1. message: Write a metering point message in the following format:

Format 1: {"measures1": 12}. If the measurepoint name is duplicated or does not exist, an exception will be thrown indicating that the write value has failed

Format 2: {"controller1": {"measures1": 12}}

Format 3: [{" name ":" controller1 ", "measures" : [{" name ":" measures1 ", "value" : 12}]}]

  1. timeout: Write the timeout of the response of the measure point, the default is 60S
  1. cloudName: It represents which cloud platform invokes the write instruction (used to determine whether the measurement point under the current cloud platform is blocked or renamed), optional

An example script is as follows (write) :

from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.measure import write


def action_name():
    write_request = {"measures1": 12}
    logger.debug('write plc response: %s' % write(write_request))

    write_request = {"controller1": {"measures1": 12}}
    logger.debug('write plc response: %s' % write(write_request))
    
    write_request = [{"name": "controller1", "measures":[{"name": "measures1", "value": 12}]}]
    logger.debug('write plc response: %s' % write(write_request))

Format 1 and Format 2 return data content (write) :

[ 
    { 
        "device": "controller1", 
        "var_name": "measures1", 
        "Result	": "OK",# "OK" represents success, "Failed" represents failure
        "error": "Success" 
    }  

Format 3's return data content (write) :

[ 
    { 
        "name": "controller1", 
        "measures":[
            { 
                "name": "measures1", 
                "error_code": 0, # 0 represents success, non 0 represents failure
                "error_reason": "Success"
            } 
        ] 
    }  

1.2.2 write_plc_values (recommended)

This interface is an asynchronous write value interface. The write value response message will trigger the callback function interface.

API prototype

def write_plc_values(message, callback=None, userdata=None, timeout=60, cloudName=None)
  1. message: Write a measuring point message in the following format:

Format 1: {"measures1": 12}. If the measurepoint name is duplicated or does not exist, an exception will be thrown indicating that the write value has failed

Format 2: {"controller1": {"measures1": 12}}

Format 3: [{" name ":" controller1 ", "measures" : [{" name ":" measures1 ", "value" : 12}]}]

  1. callback: Write the callback function to be executed when the PLC value returns

For DS1.0 compatibility, the callback function also supports three arguments

  1. userdata: The parameter passed to the callback function
  1. timeout: The timeout to write the response of the point, the default is 60S
  1. cloudName: It represents which cloud platform invokes the write instruction (used to determine whether the measurement point under the current cloud platform is blocked or renamed), optional

An example script (write_plc_values) :

from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.measure import write_plc_values


def write_callback(message, userdata):
    logger.debug("write plc response: %s, userdata:%s" % (message, userdata))

def write_callback2(message, userdata, wizard_api):
    logger.debug("write plc response: %s, userdata:%s" % (message, userdata))
    
def action_name():
    write_request = {"measures1": 12}
    write_plc_values(message=write_request, callback=write_callback, userdata="")

    write_request = {"controller1": {"measures1": 12}}
    write_plc_values(message=write_request, callback=write_callback, userdata="")
    
    write_request = [{"name": "controller1", "measures":[{"name": "measures1", "value": 12}]}]
    write_plc_values(message=write_request, callback=write_callback2, userdata="")

Format 1 and Format 2 callback functions return the data contents (write_plc_values) :

[ 
    { 
        "device": "controller1", 
        "var_name": "measures1", 
        "Result	": "OK",# "OK" represents success, "Failed" represents failure
        "error": "Success" 
    } 
] 

The callback function for Format 3 returns the data contents (write_plc_values) :

[ 
    {
        "name": "controller1", 
        "measures":[
            { 
                "name": "measures1", 
                "error_code": 0, # 0 represents success, non 0 represents failure
                "error_reason": "Success"
            } 
        ]
    }  

1.3 Recall the controller's measuring point data

1.3.1 recall

This interface is a synchronous read interface. After the call is made, it will wait until the response message is received before returning.

API prototype

def recall(names=None, recall_type="measure", timeout=10, realTime=False)
  1. names: List of recall names
  1. When recall_type is "measure" :
None or [], which means get all measure points from all controllers

[{"name": "controller1", "measures": []}], to get all measures for controller1

[{"name": "controller1", "measures": ["measure1", "measure2"]}], stands for getting data from measure1 and measure2 under controller1

  1. When recall_type is "group" :

["group1", "group2"] for getting data from groups "group1" and "group2"

                     recall_type: The type of data to recall

  1. "measure": Recall data by measure point (if names=[], that is, if no measure name is specified, recall all measure points on the device)
  1. "group": Recall data by measure point (this mode data is uploaded via the group data message channel)
  1. timeout: recall test point response timeout, default 10 seconds
  1. realTime: Whether to read real-time data, set to True will immediately re-read a recall point and return the latest read value; Defaults to False and only works if recall_type = "measure"

An example script is as follows (recall) :

from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.measure import recall


def action_name():
    #Recall all measurement point data under all controllers
    logger.debug('recall all plc measures: %s' % recall())

    #Recall all measurement point data under controller 1 
    logger.debug('recall controller1 plc measures: %s' % recall([{"name": "controller1", "measures": []}]))

    #Recall the data of measurement points "measure1" and "measure2" under controller 1
    logger.debug('recall controller1 plc measures: %s' % recall([{"name": "controller1", "measures": ["measure1", "measure2"]}]))

    #Recall data for groups "group1" and "group2"
    recall(["group1", "group2"], "group")

Data content to be recalled (recall) :

[
      {
          "name": "controller1",
          "health": 1,
          "timestamp": 1582771955,
          "measures":[
              {
                  "name": "measures1",
                  "health": 1,
                  "timestamp": 1582771955,
                  "value": 12
              },
             {
                  "name": "measures2",
                  "health": 1,
                  "timestamp": 1582771955,
                  "value": 1.23
              }
          ]
      } 

1.3.2 recall2 (recommended)

This interface is an asynchronous read interface. The response message will trigger the callback function interface.

API prototype

def recall2(names=None, recall_type="measure", callback=None, userdata=None, timeout=10, realTime=False)
  1. names: List of recall names
  1. When recall_type is "measure" :

None or [], which means get all measure points from all controllers

[{"name": "controller1", "measures": []}], to get all measures for controller1

[{"name": "controller1", "measures": ["measure1", "measure2"]}], which means to get data from "measure1" and "measure2" in controller1

  1. When recall_type is "group" :

["group1", "group2"] for getting data from groups "group1" and "group2"

  1. recall_type: The type of data to recall
  1. "measure": Recall data by measure point (if names=[], that is, if no measure name is specified, recall all measure points on the device)
  1. "group": Recall data by measure point (this mode data is uploaded via the group data message channel)
  1. callback: Callback function to execute when the data is recalled

For compatibility with DS1.0, the callback function also supports three parameters

  1. userdata: The parameter passed to the callback function
  1. timeout: The timeout for the response of the recall point, 10 seconds by default
  1. realTime: Whether to read real-time data, set to True will immediately re-read a recall point and return the latest read value; Defaults to False and only works if recall_type = "measure"

An example script is as follows (recall2) :

from common. Logger import logger
from quickfaas.measure import recall2


def recall2_callback(message, userdata):
    logger.debug("recall2 response message: %s, userdata:%s" % (message, userdata))

def recall2_callback2(message, userdata, wizard_api):
    logger.debug("recall2 response message: %s, userdata:%s" % (message, userdata))

def action_name():
    #Recall all measurement point data under all controllers 
    recall2(callback=recall2_callback, userdata="")

    #Recall all measurement point data under controller 1
    recall2(names=[{"name": "controller1", "measures": []}], callback=recall2_callback, userdata="")

    #Recall the data of measurement points "measure1" and "measure2" under controller 1 
    recall2(names=[{"name": "controller1", "measures": ["measure1", "measure2"]}], callback=recall2_callback2, userdata="")

    #Recall data for groups "group1" and "group2"
    recall2(["group1", "group2"], "group")  

Data content of the recall (recall2) :

{
    "timestamp": 1589507333.2521989,
    "values": {
        "controller1": {
            "measure1": {
                "raw_data": 12,
              	"timestamp": 1582771955,
                "status": 1
            },
            "measure2": {
                "raw_data": 1.23,
              	"timestamp": 1582771955,
                "status": 1
            }
        }
    } 
}

1.4 Get global parameters

1.4.1 get

API prototype

def get()

Script examples are as follows:

from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.global_dict import get


def action_name():
    logger.debug('get global dict: %s' % get())

Returned data content:

[
    {
        "key": "SN",
        "value": "GL9021025088033"
    }
]

1.4.2 get_global_parameter

API prototype

def get_global_parameter()

Script examples are as follows:

from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.global_dict import get_global_parameter


def action_name():
    logger.debug('get global dict: %s' % get_global_parameter()) 

Returned data content:

{
      "SN": "GL9021025088033" 
}

1.5 Get the controller connection status

1.5.1 get_status

API prototype

def get_status(controller=None)

Script examples are as follows:

from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.controller import get_status


def action_name():
    logger.debug('controller status: %s' % get_status())

Returned data content:

[
    {
        "name": "dev1",
        "health": 0,
        "timestamp": 1606784851
    }
]

1.5.2 get_controller_status

API prototype

def get_controller_status(controller=None)

Script examples are as follows:

from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.controller import get_controller_status


def action_name():
    logger.debug('controller status: %s' % get_controller_status())

Returned data content:

{
 	"dev1": {
 		"health": 0,
          "timestamp": 1606784851
 	}
}

1.6 Get the cloud connection status

Import API for obtaining controller connection status:

API prototype:

def get_status(cloud_name="default")

The script example is as follows:

from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.clouds import get_status


def action_name():
    logger.debug('cloud connection status: %s' % get_status())

Return data content:

#Online return to True

#Offline return false 

1.7 Get the global configuration

API prototype:

def get(runningConfig=True, timeout=10)

The script example is as follows:

from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.config import get


def action_name():
    logger.debug('globle config: %s' % get())

Return data content:

#Global JSON configuration information 

1.8 Setting global configuration

API prototype:
def set(config, timeout=10)

The script example is as follows:

from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.config import get, set


def action_name():
    global_config = get()

    #Example Modify the global_config configuration

    logger.debug('set config result: %s' % set(global_config))

Return data content

#Successful return: success


#Failed return: failed 

1.9 Read the file in the script

API prototype:

def faas_read_file(filePath, mode='r', encode='utf-8', size=-1)

FilePath: The file path;

Mode: Mode determines the mode of opening a file: read-only, write, append, etc. All available values can be found in the complete list below. This parameter is non mandatory, and the default file access mode is read-only (r). Consistent with the mode parameter in the open function interface in Python

Encode: Encoding format, consistent with the encoding parameter in the open function interface in Python, defaults to utf-8

Size: The length of bytes read. If size is not specified, the entire file is returned, which is consistent with the size parameter in the read function interface in Python

The script example is as follows:

# Enter your python code.
import json
from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.file import faas_read_file

def main(message):
    try:
        file_path = "/var/user/app/device_supervisor/test.txt"
        data = faas_read_file(file_path, mode='r', encode='utf-8')
        if data:
            logger.info("data: %s" % data)
    except Exception as e:
        logger.error("Exception: %s" % (e))

Return data content:

#The string of all contents in the file; If an error occurs, an exception will be thrown 

1.10 Write to a file in your script

API prototype:

def faas_write_file(filePath, mode='w', data='', encode='utf-8')

FilePath: The file path;

Mode: Mode determines the mode of opening a file: read-only, write, append, etc. All available values can be found in the complete list below. This parameter is non mandatory, and the default file access mode is to only write 'w'. Consistent with the mode parameter in the open function interface in Python

Data: The content (string) that needs to be written to the file; Default to empty string

Encode: Encoding format, consistent with the encoding parameter in the open function interface in Python, defaults to utf-8

The script example is as follows:

# Enter your python code.
import json
from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.file import faas_write_file,faas_read_file

def main(message):
    try:
        file_path = "/var/user/app/device_supervisor/test.txt"
        faas_write_file(file_path, mode='w', data="test3", encode='utf-8')
    except Exception as e:
        logger.error("Exception: %s" % (e))
Return data content: None; If an error occurs, an exception will be thrown 

1.11 Compatible with DS1 API description

1.11.1 get_group

API prototype:

def get_group(self)

The script example is as follows:

# Enter your python code. 
import json
from common.Logger import logger


def main(message, wizard_api):
	#Get grouping configuration 
	response = wizard_api.get_group()
	logger.debug("group config:%s" % response)

Returned data content:

[
    {
        "name": "default",
        "uploadInterval": 10
    },
    {
        "name": "group1",
        "uploadInterval": 10
    } 
]

1.11.2 update_group

API prototype:

def update_group(self, group_data)

The script example is as follows:

# Enter your python code. 
import json
from common.Logger import logger


def main(message, wizard_api):
	#Update grouping configuration information 
	group_data = {"group_name":"group1", "upload_interval": 10}
	response = wizard_api.update_group(group_data)
	logger.debug("update group config response:%s" % response)

Return data content:

{
  "results": {
    "group_name":"group1",
    "upload_interval": 10
  } 
}

1.12 LwTSDB Time Series Data General API

1.12.1 Insert

API prototype:

def insert_request(table_name, insert_data, noack=0, callback=None, userdata=None, timeout=30)

Parameter Description:

Table_name: Data table name

Insert_data: The data that needs to be inserted into the database

The format is: {"<timestamp>": {"controller1": {"measure1": [<measure1_health>,<measure1_value>], "measure2": [<measure2_health>,<measure2_value>]}}

Noack: Do we need a response; 0: Response required, 1: No response required

Callback: the callback function for data return; Can be set to None to indicate not receiving return data (this parameter is only meaningful when noack is 0)

Prototype: def insert_callback (message, userdata)

Userdata: The parameter passed to the callback function (only meaningful when noack is 0)

Timeout: Request timeout time (default 30 seconds)

The script example is as follows:

import time
from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.LWTSDB import insert_request


def insert_callback(message, userdata):
	logger.debug("%s response message:%s" % (userdata, message))


def action_name():
	insert_data = [
		{str(int(time.time())): {"controller1": {"measure1": [1, 100], "measure2": [1, "test"]}}}
    ] 

	#Insert a piece of data into the temporal database without requiring a response 
	insert_request('default', insert_data, 1)

	#Inserting a piece of data into a temporal database requires a response
	insert_request('default', insert_data, 0, callback=insert_callback, userdata="insert")

Data example returned by the callback function:

{
  "return_code": 0,
  "return_msg":"okay"
}

1.12.2 Find

API prototype:

def query_request(table_name, start_time=None, end_time=None, filter=None, limit=1000, offest=0, callback=None, userdata=None, timeout=30)

Parameter Description:

Tablename: Data table name

Start_time: start time; The format is:% Y -% m -% d% H:% M:% S, for example: 2023-01-09 12:00:00

End_time: End time; The format is:% Y -% m -% d% H:% M:% S, for example: 2023-01-09 16:00:00

Filter: The filtering rule for obtaining data (filtering measurement point names and setting black and white lists); The format is:

{"default": "accept_all", "black_list": {"controller1": ["measure1", "measure2"]}, "white_list": {}}

default:

"Accept all": returns all measurement points by default, except for those in the blacklist;

"Deny_all": By default, all measurement points are not returned, except for those in the whitelist list;

Black_list: Blacklist of measurement point names on the blacklist

White_list: List of whitelist measurement point names

Limit: limits the maximum number of entries that can be obtained at once;

Offer: Skip the number of records that match the record, usually used in combination with limit;

Callback: Retrieve the callback function returned from the data

Prototype: def query_callback (message, userdata)

Userdata: passing parameters to callback functions

Timeout: Request timeout time (default 30 seconds)

remarks:

When the start_time field is None, it indicates TIMESTAMP<end_time, which is arranged in descending order by default

When the end_time field is None, it indicates TIMESTAMP>=start_time, which is arranged in ascending order by default

When start_time and end_time are both None, it means querying the entire data table, which is arranged in ascending order by default

The script example is as follows:

from common.Logger import logger
from quickfaas.LWTSDB import query_request


def query_callback(message, userdata):
	logger.debug("%s response message:%s" % (userdata, message))


def action_name():
	#Query all data in the default data table
	query_request('default', callback=query_callback, userdata="query")

	#Query default data table data (data after 12:00:00 on January 9, 2023)
	query_request('default', '2023-01-09 12:00:00', callback=query_callback, userdata="query")

	#Query default data table data (the latest data after 16:00:00 on January 9, 2023)
	query_request('default', '2022-12-09 16:00:00', limit=1, callback=query_callback, userdata="query")
    
	#Query default data table data (data before 16:00:00 on January 9, 2023)
	query_request('default', end_time='2023-01-09 16:00:00', callback=query_callback, userdata="query")
    
	#Query default data table data (the last data before 16:00:00 on January 9, 2023)
	query_request('default', end_time='2023-01-09 16:00:00', limit=1, callback=query_callback, userdata="query")
    
	#Query default data table data (from '2023-01-09 12:00:00' to '2023-01-09 16:00:00')
	query_request('default', '2023-01-09 12:00:00', '2023-01-09 16:00:00', callback=query_callback, userdata="query")
    
	#Query the default data table data (from '2023-01-09 12:00:00' to '2023-01-09 16:00:00', and filter out measurement points with the name 'measure1')
	filter = {"default": "accept_all", "black_list": {"controller1": ["measure1"]}}
	query_request('default', '2023-01-09 12:00:00', '2023-01-09 16:00:00', filter, callback=query_callback, userdata="query")
    
	#Query the default data table data (from '2023-01-09 12:00:00' to '2023-01-09 16:00:00', as long as the measurement point name is' measure1 ')
	filter = {"default": "deny_all", "white_list": {"controller1": ["measure1"]}}
query_request('default', '2023-01-09 12:00:00', '2023-01-09 16:00:00', filter, callback=query_callback, userdata="query") 

Example of callback function returning data:

{
 "total": 1000,
  "offset": 0,
  "size": 100,
  "data":[
  	{"1669630340": {"controller1": {"measure1": [1, 100], "measure2": [1, "test1"]}}},
  	{"1669630350": {"controller1": {"measure1": [1, 101], "measure2": [1, "test2"]}}}
  ]
}

1.12.3 Delete

API prototype:

def remove_request(table_name, start_time=None, end_time=None, noack=0, callback=None, userdata=None, timeout=30)

Parameter Description:

Tablename: Data table name;

Start_time: the starting time of the temporal data; When start_time is None, it means TIMESTAMP<end_time

End_time: The deadline for time series data; When end_time is None, it means TIMESTAMP>=starttime

Noack: Do we need a response; 0: Response required, 1: No response required

Callback: the callback function for data return; Can be set to None to indicate not receiving return data (this parameter is only meaningful when noack is 0)

Prototype: def remove_callback (message, userdata)

Userdata: The parameter passed to the callback function (only meaningful when noack is 0)

Timeout: Request timeout time (default 30 seconds)

Explanation: When start_time and end_time are both None, it means clearing the entire data table

The script example is as follows:

from common. Logger import logger
from quickfaas.LWTSDB import remove_request


def remove_callback(message, userdata):
	logger.debug("%s response message:%s" % (userdata, message))

def action_name():
	#Clear the temporal database data and require a response 
	remove_request('default', callback=remove_callback, userdata="remove")

	#Clear temporal database data, no response required
	remove_request('default', noack=1)
	
     #Delete temporal database data (from '2023-01-09 12:00:00' to '2023-01-09 16:00:00') and require a response
	remove_request('default', '2023-01-09 12:00:00', '2022-12-09 16:00:00', 0, callback=remove_callback, userdata="remove")
	
     #Delete temporal database data (delete data after 16:00:00 on January 9, 2023) and require a response
	remove_request('default', '2023-01-09 16:00:00', callback=remove_callback, userdata="remove")
	
     #Delete temporal database data (delete data before 16:00:00 on January 9, 2023) and require a response
	remove_request('default', end_time='2023-01-09 16:00:00', callback=remove_callback, userdata="remove")

Example of callback function returning data:

{ 
	"return_code": 0,
	"return_msg":"okay" 

2 Internal MQTT message bus

This chapter will introduce the important topics and Payloads of the gateway's internal message bus. By reading this chapter, you can understand how to use specific topics and Payloads to achieve data transmission and processing. This will facilitate more flexible use of gateway functions.

2.1 Connect to the internal MQTT Broker

2.1.1 EC series equipment 

MQTT server address: 127.0.0.1

Port number: 9105

User name: inhand

Password: inhand

Create and add a controller and measurement point in the measurement point monitoring. As shown in the figure:


After adding the controller and measurement points, enter the EC device backend and install mosquito in the backend. Execute the command as shown in the figure:


After installation, execute the command shown in the figure to subscribe to the measurement point message published by the driver with driverServiceId 2000:


2.1.2 IG series equipment

MQTT server address: 127.0.0.1

Port number: 9009

Create a controller and measuring point in the monitoring of the measuring point, as shown in the figure:


After entering the IG series device backend and executing the following command, you can subscribe to the measurement point messages published by the driver with driverServiceId of 2000


2.2 Southbound message

2.2.1 Driver releases the collected values of the controller measurement points

Topic:ds2/eventbus/south/read/{driverServiceId}

{driverServiceId}: The ServiceId of the current driver, which can be viewed in the log.

The following figure shows how the enabled ModbusDriver can view the ServiceId (note: ModbusDriver is not fixed at 2000, and the ServiceId varies depending on the order in which the controller is enabled). Please refer to the ServiceId displayed in the log for the actual driverServiceId:


Payload:

{
    "controllers": [
        {
            "name": "con1",
           "version": "d3b0c5fc05cb72e7759c95f346e29f8d",
            "health": 1,
            "timestamp": 1582771955,
            "measures":[
                {
                    "name": "measures1",
                    "health": 1,
                    "timestamp": 1582771955,
                    "timestampMsec": 1582771955000,
                    "value": 12
                }
            ]
        }
    ]
}

Explain:

Name in controllers: Controller name

Version: Controller configuration version information (virtual controllers can omit this field)

Health in controllers: controller health status, 1- normal, 0- abnormal

Timestamp: The second-level time for the update of the controller's health status

timestampMsec:The millisecond-level time for the update of the controller's health status

Name in measures:the name of the measurement point

Health in measures: the health status of the measurement point, 1- normal, 0- abnormal

Timestamp: Query operation Unix timestamp

Value: Measurement point value 

2.2.2 Driver releases millisecond level data information

Topic:ds2/eventbus/south/upload/msec/data/{controllerName}

{controllerName}: The name of the controller that publishes millisecond level data

Payload:

[
  {
    "controller":["con1", 1, 1646910377],
    "measure": {
      "mea1": [1, 100],
      "mea2": [1, 100]
    }
  },
 {
    "controller":["con1", 1, 1646910377],
    "measure": {
      "mea1": [1, 100],
      "mea2": [1, 100]
    }
  }
]

explain:

Controller data: controller [0] represents the name of the controller, controller [1] represents the health status of the controller, and controller [2] represents the collection timestamp

Measure data: key represents the name of the measurement point, measure [0] represents the health status of the measurement point, and measure [1] represents the value of the measurement point

2.2.3 Write the measurement point value to the driver

Topic:ds2/eventbus/south/write/{requestServiceId}

{requestServiceId}: Message publisher, ServiceId of DataHub is 1010

Payload:

{
  "msg_id": 43461834341,
  "timestamp": 1610335020088,
  "payload": [
    {
        "name": "con1",
        "measures":[
            {
                "name": "measures1",
                "value": 12
            }
        ]
    }
 ] 
}

explain:

Msg_id: Message ID

Timestamp: timestamp

Name in payload: Controller name

Name in measure: The name of the measuring point

Value: Measurement point value

2.2.4 The driver returns the result of writing the measurement point value

Topic:ds2/eventbus/south/write/{requestServiceId}/response

{requestServiceId}: Message publisher, ServiceId of DataHub is 1010

Payload:

{
  "msg_id": 43461834341,
  "timestamp": 1610335020088,
  "payload": [
    {
        "name": "con1",
        "measures":[
            {
                "name": "measures1",
              	"value": 12,
                "error_code": 0,
              	"error_reason":	""
            }
        ]
    }
 ] 
}

explain:

Msg_id: Message ID

Timestamp: timestamp

Name in payload: Controller name

Name in measure: The name of the measuring point

Value: Measurement point value

Error code: 0: Successful, 1: Write failed

Error reason: Error reason description

2.2.5 Modbus broadcast writing

Topic:ds2/eventbus/south/modbus/broadcast/write

Payload:

{
	"protocol": "Modbus-RTU",
	"endpoint": "rs485",
	"slave": 1,
	"registers": [
		{
      		"function": 1,
      		"address": 100,
     		 "length": 1,
     		 "value": ""
    		}
  	]
}

explain:

Protocol: Communication protocol, Modbus-RTU/Modbus-TCP
Endpoint: Serial port/IP address
Slave: Slave address
Function: Function code
Address: Address
Length: length
Value: The value that needs to be written to the register, base64 encoded 

2.3 Northbound Message

2.3.1 Publish the grouped data of measurement points, including all measurement points within the group

Topic:ds2/eventbus/north/measures/{groupName}

{groupName}: Group name

Payload:

{
    "group": "group_aaa", 
    "measures":[
      {
        "ctrlName": "con1",
        "name": "measures1",
        "health": 1,
        "timestamp": 1582771955,
        "timestampMsec": 1582771955000,
        "value": 12,
      }
    ]
}

explain:

Group: Upload message groups

Name: Measurement point name

Health: Measurement point 0 is offline, and measurement point 1 is online.

Timestamp: The second-level timestamp at the moment of data reporting

timestampMsec:The millisecond-level timestamp at the moment of data reporting

Value: Measurement point value 

2.3.2 Publish the grouped data of measurement points, only including the measurement points with changed values within the group

Topic:

ds2/eventbus/north/changed/measures/{groupName}

{groupName}: Group name

Payload:

{
    "group": "group_aaa",
    "measures":[
      {
        "ctrlName": "con1",
        "name": "measures1",
        "health": 1,
        "timestamp": 1582771955,
        "timestampMsec": 1582771955000,
        "value": 12,
      }
    ]
}

explain:

Group: Upload message groups

Name: Measurement point name

Health: Measurement point 0 is offline, and measurement point 1 is online.

Timestamp: The second-level timestamp at the moment of data reporting

TimestampMsec:The millisecond-level timestamp at the moment of data reporting

Value: Measurement point value 

2.3.3 Publish the alarm trigger/clear event message

Topic:

ds2/eventbus/north/alarm/{alarmName}

{alarmName}: Alarm name

Payload:

{
  "name": "alarm1",
  "ctrlName": "",
  "measureName": "",
  "priority": 1,
  "timestamp": 1234646484,
  "timestampMsec": 1582771955000,
  "status": 0,
  "value": 60,
  "alarm_value": 60,
  "content": "DATA IS OUT OF RANGE"
}

explain:

Name: Alarm name

CtrlName: Controller name

MeasureName: Measurement point name

Priority: With built-in alarm levels, it can support defining a maximum of 5 level value ranges [1,5]

Timestamp: Second-level timestamp

TimestampMsec:Millisecond-level timestamp

Status: 0: Release alarm 1: Trigger alarm

Value: Current measurement point value

Alarm_value: Measurement point value when an alarm is triggered

Content: Description 

2.3.4 Controller status update message reporting

Topic:ds2/eventbus/north/controllers/delta

Payload:

[ 
  { 
    "name": "dev1", 
    "health": 0, 
    "timestamp": 1606784851 
  }, 
  { 
    "name": "dev2", 
    "health": 1,
    "timestamp": 1606784852 
  } 
] 

explain:

Name: Controller name

Health: 0 Device offline, 1 device online

Timestamp: Unix timestamp of the controller state update time


2.3.5 Update controller measurement point values (write PLC values)

Topic:

ds2/eventbus/north/write/measures

Payload:

{
  "task_id": "43461834341",
  "controllers": [
    {
        "name": "con1",
        "measures":[
            {
                "name": "measures1", 
                "value": 12
            },
            {
                "name": "measures2",
                "value": 13
            }
        ]
    }
 ]
}

explain:

Task_id: Task ID

Name in controllers: Controller name

The name in measures is the name of the measurement point

Value: Value

2.3.6 Respond to the write value of the controller measurement point

Topic:

ds2/eventbus/north/write/measures/response

Payload:

{
  "task_id": "43461834341",
  "controllers": [
    {
        "name": "con1",
        "measures":[
            {
                "name": "measures1",
                "error_code": 0,
                "error_reason": ""
            },
            {
                "name": "measures2",
                "error_code": 1,
                "error_reason": "write failed"
            },
        ]
    }
 ]
}

explain:

Task_id: Task ID

Name in controllers: Controller name

The name in measures is the name of the measurement point

Error code: 0: Successful, 1: Write failed

Error reason: Error reason description

2.3.7 Data retrieval

Actively obtain controller measurement point values (summoning data).

Topic:

ds2/eventbus/north/recall/measures

Payload:

{
  "task_id": "43461834341",
  "recallType": "group",
  "groups": ["group_name_1"],
  "controllers": [
    {
      "name": "ctrl1",
      "measures": ["measure_name_1"]
    }
  ]
}

explain:

Task_id: Task ID, only 'recallType'=='measure' is valid

RecallType: supports group, measure

When "recallType"="group", the measurement point data is uploaded through ds2/eventbus/north/means/{groupName}, and the content can be found in the measurement point grouping report.

When "recallType"="measure", the measurement point data is uploaded through ds2/eventbus/north/recall/measures/response. At this point, the last polled measurement point value is obtained.The content is as follows: If controllers==[], the measurement point name is not specified

When "recallType" == "realtime", the measurement point data is uploaded via ds2/eventbus/north/recall/measures/response. At this time, all the recalled measurement points will be polled in real time once. The content is as follows: If controllers == [], that is, no measurement point name is specified.

Groups: List of measurement point groups, only "recallType"="group" is valid.

Controllers: List of controllers, only valid for "recallType"=="measure". The total number of measurement points needs to be limited, and the specific value is yet to be determined.

Name: Controller name

Measures: List of measurement points 

2.3.8 Respond to data retrieval

Only if "recallType" == "measure".

Topic

ds2/eventbus/north/recall/measures/response 

Payload

{
  "task_id": "43461834341",
  "recallType": "measure",
  "controllers": [
      {
          "name": "con1",
          "health": 1,
          "timestamp": 1582771955,
          "measures": [
              {
                  "name"."measures1",
                  "health": 1,
                  "timestamp": 1582771955,
                  "value": 12
              }
          ]
      }
  ]
}

task_id: task ID

recallType: measure

name in controllers: device name

health in controllers: device health status, 1 -- device normal, 0 -- device abnormal

timestamp in controllers: device health status update time

name in measures: the name of the variable.

Health in measures: 0 -- measure query failed (rawbytes field is invalid), 1 -- measure query succeeded

timestamp in measures: querying Unix timestamps for operations

value: value

2.4 System messages

2.4.1 Cloud Connection Status Update

Topic:

ds2/eventbus/system/cloud/connection/notice 

Payload:

{
  "cloud_name": "name",
  "status": 2,
  "timestamp": 1614735490
}

cloud_name: upload message grouping

status: Connection status. 0 not enabled, 1 connecting, 2 connecting successfully, 3 unknown error, 4 registered, 5 registered

timestamp: timestamp of the moment of state change


2.5 Historical database

The History Database is a lightweight timing database on the InHand series of Edge Computing Gateways. It contains the following features:

  • DSA can create data tables for grouping of points and store the grouped data in a database according to a specified inventory strategy; (configured via the Web)
  • QduickFunctions or other data analysis programs can query/insert/delete historical data via the gateway's internal MQTT message bus

2.5.1 Insert Request

Topic:

insert/req/<table_name>/<client_id>/<operation_id> 

<table_name>: the name of the data table for the operation (that is, the group name);

<client_id>: Database client ID, used to distinguish different clients. Each client should only subscribe to database messages that belong to its own ID.

Recommended format for <client_id> is ext-<MAC>-<pid>

<operation_id>: database operation ID, used to distinguish a request operation, generated by the client, it is recommended to use the UUID

Payload:

{
  "noack": 0,
  "data":[
    {"<timestamp>": {"controller1": {"measure1": [<measure1_health>, <measure1_value>], "measure2": [&&lt;measure2_health>, <measure2_value>]}}}
  ]
}

noack: 0 means response required; 1 means no response required (defaults to 0 when there is no noack field in the request payload)

data: inserted data, support multiple inserts

Parameters

Instructions

timestamp

Timestamp when data was inserted (in seconds)

controller1

Controller Name

measure1

Name of measurement point

measure1_health

Health status of measurement points (0: offline, 1 online)

measure1_value

The value of the measuring point at that moment

2.5.2 Insert Response

The insert response is received when the noack of the insert request payload is 0.

Topic:

insert/rsp/<table_name>/<client_id>/<operation_id> 

Request Topic parameter description: same as insert request message definition.

Payload:

{
  "return_code": 0,
  "return_msg": "okay"
}

2.5.3 Query Request

Topic:

query/req/<table_name>/<client_id>/<operation_id> 

Request Topic parameter description: same as insert request message definition.

Payload:

{
  "start_time": 1669696164,
  "end_time": 1669696264,
  "filter": {
    "default": "accept_all",
    "black_list": { "controller1": ["measure1", "measure2"]},
    "white_list": {},
  },
  "limit": 1000,
  "offset": 0
}

Parameter Description:

Parameters

Data type

Parameter Description

For example

start_time

INTEGER

INTEGER: start time of timing data in seconds, contains start_time.

When start_time field is negative or not present, it means TIMESTAMP < end_time, default is descending order

1669696164

end_time

INTEGER

The cutoff time of the timing data in seconds without end_time.

When the end_time field is negative or does not exist, it means that TIMESTAMP >= start_time and defaults to ascending order

1669697264

filter.default

ENUM

"accept_all": defaults to all points except those in the blacklist;

"deny_all": defaults to not returning all measurement points, except those in the whitelist list;

"filter": {

"default": "deny_all",

"white_list": {"controller1": ["measure1", "measure2"]}

}

filter.black_list

STRING ARRAY

List of blacklisted site names

filter.white_list

STRING ARRAY

List of whitelisted point names

limit

INTEGER

If you need to read a specified number of data records in LwTSDB, you can use the Limit method of LwTSDB. The limit method accepts a numeric parameter that specifies the number of record entries to be read from LwTSDB. If you do not specify the parameter in the limit method (or limit is 0) then all the data in the collection is displayed.

LwTSDB itself limits the maximum number of reads to xxxx entries. When the number of predicted queries exceeds the limit, it is recommended that the querying application split the queries by time period.

limit:100

offset

INTEGER

You can use the offset method to skip a specified amount of data. The offset method also accepts a numeric argument as the number of records to skip.

offset is usually used in combination with limit.

offset: 10

Note: When both start_time and end_time are negative, it means to query the whole data table.

2.5.4 Query Response

Topic:

query/rsp/<table_name>/<client_id>/<operation_id> 

Request Topic parameter description: same as insert request message definition.

Payload:

{
	"total": 1000,
	"offset": 0,
	"size": 100,
	"data":[
		{"1669630340": {"controller1": {"measure1": [1, 100], "measure2": [1, "test1"]}}},
		{"1669630350": {"controller1": {"measure1": [1, 101], "measure2": [1, "test2"]}}}
	]
}

Parameter Description:

Parameters

Data type

Parameter description

For example

total

INTEGER

The total number of rows in the query result without considering the limit and skip methods

1000

offset

INTEGER

The offset position of the first line in this message in total, starting at 0.

0

size

INTEGER

Number of rows of data in this message

100

data[i].timestamp

INTEGER

Data row timestamp

1669696164

data[i].value

dict object

A collection of controllers for dictionary objects

{"controller1": {"measure1": [1, 100], "measure2": [1, "test1"]}}}

2.5.5 Delete Request

Topic:

remove/req/<table_name>/<client_id>/<operation_id> 

Request Topic parameter description: same as insert request message definition.

Payload:

{
  "noack": 0,
  "start_time": 1,
  "end_time": 100,
}

Parameter Description:

Parameters

Data type

Parameter description

For example

noack

INTEGER

0 means response required; 1 means no response required

1

start_time

INTEGER

INTEGER: start time of timing data in seconds, contains start_time.

When the start_time field is negative or not present, it means that TIMESTAMP < end_time

1669696164

end_time

INTEGER

The cutoff time of the timing data in seconds without end_time.

When the end_time field is negative or not present, it indicates that TIMESTAMP >= start_time

1669697164

Note: When start_time and end_time are both negative, it means clear the whole data table.

2.5.6 Delete Response

A delete response is received when the noack of the delete request payload is 0.

Topic:

remove/rsp/<table_name>/<client_id>/<operation_id> 

Request Topic parameter description: same as insert request message definition.

Payload:

{
  "return_code": 0,
  "return_msg": "okay"
}

2.5.7 Return value description

Return value

Return information

Note

0

Okay

successes

-1

Request parameter error

Request parameter error

-2

Table <table_name> not exist

Data table does not exist

-3

SQL error

SQL statement execution error

-4

Request timeout

Request timeout

3 Restful API

The DSA provides a Restful API for obtaining status information, which can be used to obtain acquisition information and status information through the API.

3.1 Login

Request URL:

POST /v1/user/login 

Request header parameters:

Name

Value

Instruction

Authorisation

Basic YWRtOjEyMzQ1Ng==

Login name and password need to be base64 encrypted and put in http header; e.g. login name: adm, password: 123456, need to be spliced into "adm:123456" string and base64 encrypted to get " YWRtOjEyMzQ1Ng==".

Request example:

POST https://10.5.30.23/v1/user/login

Request Headers:
Authorization: Basic YWRtOjEyMzQ1Ng==

Response:

{
  "results": {
    "name": "adm",
    "priv": 15,
    "from": "10.5.30.20",
    "web_session": "MTSVVdC1RwlpmBy30g6G0sErVNKfS0yv",
    "first_login": 0
  }
}

Description: web_session is the token information after authentication, subsequent interface requests need to include this information in the request header.

3.2 Getting the controller status

Request URL:

POST /v1/apps/device/supervisor2/controller/status 

Request Header: Authorization: Bearer

MTSVVdC1RwlpmBy30g6G0sErVNKfS0yv

Request Payload:

{
  "names":["Modbus TCP"]
}

Parameter Description:

Parameter name

Description

names

List of controller names, multiple separated by the , sign.

Response:

{
  "result": [
    {
      "name": "Modbus TCP",
      "status": 1
    }
  ]
}

Parameter Description:

Parameter Name

Description

name

Controller Name

status

Controller status. 0 means offline, 1 means online

3.3 Getting the value of the measurement point under the controller

Request URL:

POST /v1/apps/device/supervisor2/measure/reading 

Request Header: Authorization: Bearer

MTSVVdC1RwlpmBy30g6G0sErVNKfS0yv

Request Payload:

{
  "ctrlName": "Modbus TCP",
  "names":["INT", "WORD", "FLOAT"]
}

Parameter Description:

Parameter name

Description

ctrlName

Controller Name

names

List of measurement point names, multiple separated by a , sign

Response:

{
    "result": [
        {
            "ctrlName": "Modbus TCP",
            "name": "INT",
            "status": 1,
            "timestamp": 1721203547,
            "value": 1
        },
        {
            "ctrlName": "Modbus TCP",
            "name": "WORD",
            "status": 1,
            "timestamp": 1721203547,
            "value": 2
        },
        {
            "ctrlName": "Modbus TCP",
            "name": "FLOAT",
            "status": 1,
            "timestamp": 1721203547,
            "value": 3.12
        }
    ] 
}

Parameter Description:

Parameter name

Instructions

ctrlName

Controller Name

name

Name of measurement point

status

Measurement point acquisition status. 0 means offline, 1 means online

timestamp

Capture timestamps in seconds

value

acquisition value

3.4 Updating the values of measurement points under the controller

Request URL:

PUT /v1/apps/device/supervisor2/measure/writing 

Request Header: Authorization: Bearer

MTSVVdC1RwlpmBy30g6G0sErVNKfS0yv
Payload:

[
  {
    "name": "Modbus TCP",
    "measures":[
      {
        "name": "INT",
        "value":10
      }
    ]
  }
]

Parameter Description:

Parameter name

Description

name

Controller Name

measures.name

Name of measurement point

measures.value

Point values to be written

Response:

{
    "result": [
        {
            "name": "Modbus TCP",
            "measures": [
                {
                    "name": "INT",
                    "error_code": 0,
                    "error_reason": "Success",
                    "value": 10
                }
            ]
        }
    ]
}

Parameter Description:

Parameter name

Instructions

name

Controller Name

measures.name

Name of measurement point

measures.error_code

Write value error code. 0 indicates success, non-0 indicates failure

measures.error_reason

Description of the cause of the write value error

measures.value

Write the value and get the latest value of the measurement point.

3.5 Obtaining real-time alarm information

Request URL:

GET /v1/apps/device/supervisor2/alarm/realtime?cursor=0&limit=50 

Request Header: Authorization: Bearer

MTSVVdC1RwlpmBy30g6G0sErVNKfS0yv

Description of the request URL parameters:

Parameter name

Description

cursor

Real-time alarm start entry location

limit

Maximum number of entries returned by a real-time alarm request

Response:

{
    "cursor": 0,
    "limit": 50,
    "total": 1,
    "result": [
        {
            "name": "test",
            "ctrlName": "Modbus TCP",
            "measureName": "WORD",
            "priority": 1,
            "cond1": {
                "op": "gt",
                "value": 10.0
            },
            "condOp": "none",
            "content": "exceeded threshold 10"
            "addr": "40002",
            "value": 20,
            "timestamp": 1721204607,
            "status": 1
        }
    ]
}

Parameter Description:

Parameter name

Description

cursor

Real-time alarm start entry location

limit

Maximum number of entries returned by a real-time alarm request

total

Number of entries currently returned by real-time alarms

result.name

Alarm name

result.ctrlName

Name of the controller associated with the alarm

result.measureName

Name of the measurement point associated with the alarm

result.priority

Alert level. 1 Alert, 2 Warning, 3 Minor, 4 Important, 5 Serious

result.cond1.op

Alarm conditions. eq is equal to, neq is not equal to, gt is greater than, egt is greater than or equal to, lt is less than, elt is less than or equal to

result.cond1.value

warning threshold

result.condOp

Conditional combinatorial logic. and, or, none

result.content

Alarm description content

result.addr

Address of alarm-associated measurement point

result.value

Captured value when alarm is generated/deactivated

result.timestamp

Timestamp when the alarm is generated/deactivated

result.status

Alarm status: 0 disarmed, 1 alarm generated

3.6 Getting Cloud Connection Status

Request URL:

GET /v1/apps/device/supervisor2/cloud/status?name=default 

Request Header: Authorization: Bearer

MTSVVdC1RwlpmBy30g6G0sErVNKfS0yv

Description of the request URL parameters:

Parameter name

Description

name

Cloud Service Name

Response:

{
  "result": {
    "status": 2,
    "connTime": 127
  }
}

Parameter Description:

Parameter name

Description

status

Cloud Service Status. 0 Not Enabled, 1 Connecting, 2 Connecting Successfully, 3 Unknown Error, 4 Registering, 5 Registered

connTime

Connection duration in seconds

3.7 Getting Protocol Transition Status

Request URL:

GET /v1/apps/device/supervisor2/north/basic/status?service=modbustcp-slave 

Request Header: Authorization: Bearer

MTSVVdC1RwlpmBy30g6G0sErVNKfS0yv

Description of the request URL parameters:

Parameter name

Instructions

service

Protocol conversion type.

modbustcp-slave: Modbus TCP Server

iec104-server: IEC 104 Server

opcua-server: OPCUA Server

modbusrtu-slave: Modbus RTU Server

iec101-server: IEC 101 Server

sl651-client: SL651-2014

hj212-client: HJ212 Client

bacnetbip-server: BACnet IP Server

bacnetmstp-server: BACnet MS/TP Server

dnp3-server: DNP3 Outstation

iec61850Server: IEC 61850 Server

snmp_agent: SNMP Agent

Response:

{
    "result": {
        "service_status": {
            "status": 2,
            "runtime": 84221
        },
        "link_status": [
            {
                "id": 12,
                "ip": "10.5.30.20",
                "port": 58220,
                "status": 1,
                "linktime": 84145
            }
        ]
    }
}

Parameter Description:

Parameter name

Instructions

service_status.status

Service status. 0 not started, 2 running

service_status.runtime

Runtime in seconds

link_status.ip

Connected device IP address

link_status.port

Connected Device Port Number

link_status.status

connection status

link_status.linktime

connection time

4 Global Configuration File

{
    "controllers": [],
    "measures": [],
    "alarms": [],
    "alarmLables": ["default"],
    "groups": [
      {
        "_id": "group59b64649c93",
        "name": "default",
        "uploadInterval": 10,
        "LwTSDBSize": 1000,
        "strategy": 1,
        "enablePerOnchange": 0,
        "historyDataMode": "gateway",
        "historyDataPath": "/var/user/data/dbhome/device_supervisor/LwTSDB"
      }
    ],
    "misc": {
      "maxAlarmRecordSz": 2000,
      "logLvl": "INFO",
      "coms": [
        {
          "name": "rs232",
          "baud": 9600,
          "bits": 8,
          "stopbits": 1,
          "parityChk": "n"
        },
        {
          "name": "rs485",
          "baud": 9600,
          "bits": 8,
          "stopbits": 1,
          "parityChk": "n"
        }
      ],
      "cachePath": "/var/user/data/dbhome/device_supervisor/offlinedata",
      "cacheSize": 10000,
      "debugLogPath": "/var/user/data/dbhome/device_supervisor/debugLog",
      "debugLogSize": 2000,
      "cacheMode": "gateway",
      "cacheUploadPeriod": 200,
      "cacheStrategy": 0,
      "pubTimeout": 1000,
      "pubRepeatNum": 3,
      "debugLogMode": "gateway",
      "logNum": 2,
      "logSize": 1
    },
    "clouds": [
      {
        "_id": "cloud59b6464bd03",
        "cacheSize": 10000,
        "enable": 0,
        "name": "default",
        "type": "Standard MQTT",
        "args": {
          "host": "",
          "port": 1883,
          "clientId": "",
          "auth": 0,
          "tls": 0,
          "tlsAuth": "caSelfSigned",
          "groupId": "",
          "cleanSession": 0,
          "mqttVersion": "v3.1.1",
          "keepalive": 60,
          "key": "",
          "cert": "",
          "rootCA": "",
          "verifyServer": 0,
          "verifyClient": 0,
          "username"."",
          "passwd": "",
          "willQos": 0,
          "willRetain": 0,
          "willTopic": "",
          "willPayload": ""
        },
        "uploadRules": []
    }
  ],
  "labels": [],
  "serverList": [],
  "quickfaas": {
    "genericFuncs": [],
    "uploadFuncs": [],
    "downloadFuncs": []
  },
  "mindspheres": [
    {
      "name": "mindsphere",
      "enable": 0,
      "_id": "mindsphereeafcdf",
      "args": {
        "hostEnvironment": "eu1",
        "hostDomain": "mindsphere.io",
        "appName": "",
        "appVersion": "",
        "clientId": "",
        "clientSecret": "",
        "authType": "tenant",
        "hostTenant": "",
        "userTenant": "",
        "timeout": 10,
        "statusTimeout": 300,
        "enableOfflinePut": 0
      },
      "mindsphereputs": []
    }
  ],
  "modbusSlave": {
    "enable": 0,
    "protocol": "Modbus-TCP",
    "port": 502,
    "slaveAddr": 1,
    "useRawvalue": 1,
    "int16Ord": "ab",
    "int32Ord": "abcd",
    "float32Ord": "abcd",
    "maxConnection": 5,
    "mapping_table":[],
    "mappingTable": [
      {
        "name": "1",
        "slaveAddr": 1,
        "_id": "modbusTCPSlave01",
        "measures": []
      }
    ]
  },
  "modbusRTUSlave": {
    "enable": 0,
    "protocol": "Modbus-RTU",
    "coms": "rs485",
    "useRawvalue": 1,
    "slaveAddr": 1,
    "int16Ord": "ab",
    "int32Ord": "abcd",
    "float32Ord": "abcd",
    "mapping_table":[],
    "mappingTable": [
      {
        "name": "1",
        "slaveAddr": 1,
        "_id": "modbusRTUSlave01",
        "measures": []
      }
    ]
  },
  "iec104Server": {
    "enable": 0,
    "cotSize": 2,
    "port": 2404,
    "asduLen": 2,
    "connectMode": "tcpServer",
    "enableSpontaneous": 1,
    "uploadPeriod": 0,
    "useRawvalue": 1,
    "serverList": [
      {
        "asduAddr": 1
      }
    ],
    "kValue": 12,
    "wValue": 8,
    "t0": 30,
    "t1": 15,
    "t2": 10,
    "t3": 20,
    "maximumLink" : 5,
    "timeSet": 1,
    "byteOrder": "abcd",
    "mapping_table":[]
  },
  "iec101Server": {
  "enable": 0,
  "coms": "rs485",
  "mode": "UnBalance",
  "enableSpontaneous": 1,
  "uploadPeriod": 0,
  "protocolMode": 0,
  "useRawvalue": 1,
  "linkLen": 2,
  "linkAddr": 1,
  "asduLen": 2,
  "ioaLen": 3,
  "cotLen": 2,
  "serverList": [
   {
    "asduAddr": 1
   }
  ],
  "linkTimeOut": 2000,
  "timeSet": 1,
  "idleTimeOut": 10000,
  "byteOrder": "abcd",
  "mappingTable": {
    "YX": [],
    "YC": [],
    "YK": []
  }
  },
  "iec104Client": {
    "enable": 0,
    "connectType": 2,
    "serverAddr": "ipower.inhandcloud.cn",
    "serverPort": 2406,
    "communicationCode": "",
    "protocol": 1,
    "asduAddr": 1,
    "tls": 1,
    "verification": 1,
    "mapping_table": {
      "YX": [],
      "YC": [],
      "YK": []
    }
  },
  "opcuaServer".{
    "enable": 0,
    "port": 4840,
    "maximumLink" : 5,
    "securityMode": 0,
    "certificate": "None",
    "privateKey": "None",
    "useRawvalue": 1,
    "identifierType": "String",
    "pubsub": 0,
    "mapping_table":[]
  },
  "iec61850Server": {
    "enable": 0,
    "protocol": "iec61850Server",
    "port": 102,
    "iedName": "INHAND",
    "LDName": "Gateway",
    "ctrlMode": 1,
    "authentication": 0,
    "password": "123456",
    "useRawvalue": 1,
    "dataSet": [],
    "mapping_table": []
 },
 "sl651Slave": {
    "enable": 0,
    "centreAaddr": 1,
    "remoteAddr": "",
    "addressIdentifier": "00F1",
    "timeLeader": "00F0",
    "reverseCRC": 0,
    "addrCode": "",
    "password": "",
    "platform_list": [],
    "useRawvalue": 1,
    "mapping_table": []
 },
 "hj212Client": {
    "enable": 0,
    "useRawvalue": 1,
    "platform_list": [],
    "block_list": [],
    "mapping_table": []
 },
 "bacnetServer": {
    "enable": 0,
    "protocol": "BACnet/IP",
    "deviceId": 0,
    "port": 47808,
    "bbmdEnable": 0,
    "useRawvalue": 1,
    "mapping_table": []
 },
 "bacnetMSTPServer": {
    "enable": 0,
    "protocol": "BACnet/MSTP",
    "deviceId": 0,
    "coms": "rs485",
    "maxInfoFrame": 6,
    "mstpMac": 1,
    "maxMaster": 1,
    "useRawvalue": 1,
    "mapping_table": []
 },
 "Dnp3Server": {
    "enable": 0,
    "protocol": "Dnp3-TCP",
    "slaveAddr": 1,
    "masterAddr": 2,
    "port": 20000,
    "useRawvalue": 1,
    "enableUnsol": 0,
    "maxFrasize": 4096,
    "layerTimeout": 1000,
    "linkRetry": 5,
    "enableLink": 0,
    "mapping_table": []
 },
 "snmpAgent": {
    "enable": 0,
    "port": 161,
    "useRawvalue": 1,
    "version": 3,
    "userName": "",
    "enableAuth": 0,
    "readWrite": "ro",
    "enable_trap": 0,
    "mapping_table": []
 },
 "templates": {},
  "bindConfig": {
    "enable": 0,
    "bind":{
      "modelId": "",
      "modelName": "",
      "srcId": "",
      "srcName": "",
      "devId": "",
      "devName": ""
    },
    "varGroups": [],
    "variables": [],
    "alerts": []
    }
}


Global configuration file parameter description:

Parameter name

Instructions

controllers

List of controllers for point monitoring

measures

List of measurement points for point monitoring

alarms

Alarm Rule List

alarmLables

Alarm Label List

groups

List of groups for point monitoring

misc

Parameter setting information

clouds

Cloud Services List

labels

List of custom parameters for parameter setting

quickfaas

Publish, subscribe and customise fast function lists

mindspheres

*MindSphere IoT cloud services

modbusSlave

Modbus TCP Slave Protocol Conversion Configuration

modbusRTUSlave

Modbus RTU Slave Protocol Conversion Configuration

iec104Server

IEC 104 Server Protocol Conversion Configuration

iec101Server

IEC 101 Server Protocol Conversion Configuration

iec104Client

Eagle Energy Manager (IEC 104) Cloud Service Configuration

opcuaServer

OPCUA Server Protocol Conversion Configuration

iec61850Server

IEC 61850 Server Protocol Conversion Configuration

sl651Slave

SL651-2014 Protocol Conversion Configuration

hj212Client

HJ212 Client Protocol Conversion Configuration

bacnetServer

BACnet IP Server Protocol Conversion Configuration

bacnetMSTPServer

BACnet MS/TP Server Protocol Conversion Configuration

Dnp3Server

DNP3 Outstation Protocol Conversion Configuration

snmpAgent

SNMP Agent Protocol Conversion Configuration


Application Examples

In this example, Modbus TCP is adopted for southbound collection, and the following is the configuration process for southbound Modbus TCP.

Open Modbus Slave emulator, click "Connection", select "Modbus TCP/IP" connection mode, tick "Any Adress", set the Port to 502, and then click "OK", as shown in the figure below:


Set the slave address to 1;

The function code is a holding register;

Register address 0 is set to Signed data type with a value of 10; register address 1 is set to Unsigned data type with a value of 20, and register addresses 2-3 are set to "32 Bit Float" with a value of 3.12; as shown in the figure below:


Click Add Controller on the "Point Monitoring" page of the DSA and set the controller parameters, enter the IP address of the computer running the simulator as the IP address, the port number as 502, the slave address and the simulator to keep the same as 1, and set the polling period to 10 seconds. The polling period is set to 10 seconds, as shown in the following figure:


Then add the measurement points corresponding to the simulator, after adding the following figure:


You can see on the measurement point monitoring page that the collected values are the same as the values set on the simulator.

1 Acquisition Modbus TCP data and upload to standard MQTT cloud

Reference: Getting Started -> Quick Start -> Northbound Cloud Service Configuration

2 As a protocol conversion gateway

2.1 Modbus TCP to Modbus TCP Slave Gateway

Reference: Getting Started->Quick Start->Northbound Protocol Conversion Configuration

2.2 Modbus TCP to BACnet IP Server Gateway

On the Protocol Conversion page, click Add, select "BACnet IP Server", and then enter the "Configuration" option. Leave the parameters at their default values and click Submit, as shown in the following figure:


Click the "Batch Add" button on the mapping table, select "Analogue Input" for the object type, set the instance number to 0, then tick the corresponding measurement points and click Confirm, as shown in the figure below:


Use the Yabe simulator to read the data from the BACnet IP Server. You can see that the values read are consistent with the values from the southbound acquisition measurement point, as shown below:


2.3 Modbus TCP to IEC 104 Server Gateway

On the Protocol Conversion page, click Add, select the "IEC 104 Server" protocol, and then enter the "Configuration" option, keep the default values of the parameters, and click "Submit", as shown in the following figure:


Click the "Batch Add" button of the mapping table, select 1 for ASDU address, select "[13] M_ME_NC_1" for type ID, enter 1 for start IOA, and then select the corresponding measurement point and click Confirm, as shown in the figure below:


Use the "Client IEC 104 Simulator" to read the data from the IEC 104 Server. You can see that the value read is the same as the value of the southbound acquisition point, as shown in the figure below:


Performance testing

It mainly provides the performance test indexes of DSA software in various functions such as data acquisition and data processing, and continuously monitors the stability of software operation and CPU situation during the testing process, aiming at helping users to reasonably evaluate the system resources when using DSA, and ultimately ensuring that DSA can run smoothly and efficiently.

1 IG502 Performance Test Result

Single protocol, single controller, continuous measurement point

Theoretical Polling Interval

Continuous acquisition number

Communication frame interval

Actual acquisition time

Measuring point number

CPU

Configuration loading time (import overall configuration/import measuring point configuration)

ModbusTCP

1s

125

0ms

350ms

6000

100%

54s/75s

1s

125

10ms

1s

6000

85%

54s/75s

10s

125

0ms

2.1s

35,000

100%

248s/683s

10s

125

10ms

9s

40,000

100%

328s/858s

ModbusRTU

1s

125

1ms

1s

250

13%

6s/12s

1s

125

10ms

1s

250

11%

6s/12s

10s

125

1ms

219s

40,000

100%

328s/858s

10s

125

10ms

222s

40,000

100%

328s/858s

OPCUA

1s

125

-

1s

1200

43%

15s/18s

10s

125

-

45s

38000

85%

357s/900s

2 IG902 Performance Test Result

Single protocol, single controller, continuous measurement point

Theoretical Polling Interval

Continuous acquisition number

Communication frame interval

Actual acquisition time

Measuring point number

CPU

Configuration loading time (import overall configuration/import measuring point configuration)

ModbusTCP

1s

125

0ms

383ms

9000

100%

48s/83s

1s

125

10ms

1s

9000

85%

48s/83s

10s

125

0ms

2.3s

48000

100%

247s/984s

10s

125

10ms

10.4s

50000

100%

285s/1080s

ModbusRTU

1s

125

1ms

1s

250

16%

5s/11s

1s

125

10ms

1s

250

12%

5s/11s

10s

125

1ms

272s

50000

50%

249s/984s

10s

125

10ms

285s

50000

40%

249s/1080s

OPCUA

1s

50

1s

1200

10%

10s/16s

10s

50

125s

80000

85%

549s/2768s

3 IG532 Performance Test Scenario

Single protocol, single controller, continuous measurement point

Theoretical Polling Interval

Continuous acquisition number

Communication frame interval

Actual acquisition time

Measuring point number

CPU

Configuration loading time (import overall configuration/import measuring point configuration)

ModbusTCP

1s

125

0ms

407ms

9000

100%

33s/64s

1s

125

10ms

1s

8000

65%

42s/57s

10s

125

0ms

3.9s

45,000

100%

205s/694s

10s

125

10ms

10s

48000

100%

221s/758s

ModbusRTU

1s

125

1ms

1s

250

10%

6s/11s

1s

125

10ms

1s

250

8%

6s/11s

10s

125

1ms

256s

48000

75%

221s/758s

10s

125

10ms

271s

48000

65%

221s/758s

OPCUA

1s

125

1s

1200

20%

10s/15s

10s

125

78s

45,000

70%

308s/898s

4 EC312 Performance Test Scenario

Single protocol, single controller, continuous measurement point

Theoretical Polling Interval

Continuous acquisition number

Communication frame interval

Actual acquisition time

Measuring point number

CPU

Configuration loading time (import overall configuration/import measuring point configuration)

ModbusTCP

1s

125

0ms

435ms

16000

100%

47s/206s

1s

125

10ms

1s

9000

70%

31s/115s

10s

125

0ms

1.1s

45,000

85%

120s/987s

10s

125

10ms

10.3s

45,000

65%

120s/987s

ModbusRTU

1s

125

1ms

1s

250

10%

6s/11s

1s

125

10ms

1s

250

8%

6s/11s

10s

125

1ms

243s

45,000

50%

120s/987s

10s

125

10ms

248s

45,000

40%

120s/987s

OPCUA

1s

50

1s

1200

40%

10s/20s

10s

50

42.7s

42400

100%

303s/1034s

5 EC942 Performance Test Scenario

Single protocol, single controller, continuous measurement point

Theoretical Polling Interval

Continuous acquisition number

Communication frame interval

Actual acquisition time

Measuring point number

CPU

Configuration loading time (import overall configuration/import measuring point configuration)

ModbusTCP

1s

125

0ms

1s

40,000

50%

42s/279s

1s

125

10ms

1s

9000

15%

12s/28s

10s

125

0ms

5s

190000

60%

233s/2694s

10s

125

10ms

65s

190000

40%

233s/2694s

ModbusRTU

1s

125

1ms

1s

250

5%

4s/11s

1s

125

10ms

1s

250

5%

4s/11s

10s

125

1ms

850s

190000

30%

233s/2694s

10s

125

10ms

1029s

190000

24%

233s/2694s

OPCUA

1s

50

1s

1200

13%

11s/12s

10s

50

74s

80000

30%

116s/1103s


FAQ Frequently Asked Questions

1 What southbound acquisition protocols does the DSA support?

Support. Reference: Getting Started->Introduction->List of functions->Southbound Acquisition Protocol List

2 What northbound cloud services does DSA support?

Support. Reference: Getting Started->Introduction->List of functions->Northbound Cloud Service List

3 What northbound protocol conversion services does the DSA support?

Support. Reference: Getting Started->Introduction->List of functions->Northbound Protocol Conversion List

4 Does it support device reverse control?

Support. You can write values online via web pages, call Python API interface in Quickfunctions write values via internal MQTT messages, and write values via Restful API.

5 Does it support the development of its own southbound acquisition driver?

Support. Create a "virtual controller" on the measurement point monitoring page, and the self-developed southbound acquisition driver publishes the data in the way of southbound message bus, and you can see the acquired data and status in the "virtual controller".

6 Is offline data storage supported?

Support. After opening the cloud service, if the gateway is offline it will store the reported data during the offline period, by default it is stored in the storage media of the gateway, storing 1w offline data (rolling storage), you can modify the parameters in Parameter Settings->Storage Configuration.

7 Does it support storing historical data?

Supported. If you want to store historical data, you need to enable "Store Historical Data" in the configuration of the measurement point, and the storage policy of historical data can be modified in the Measure Monitor->Groups->Historical data.

Release Version

3.1.10

Newly Added Functions

1 New IEC101/104 and IEC61850 functions for obtaining measurement point information by scanning;

2 New third-party library management function;

3 Added the function of offline data reporting policy setting;

4 Added IEC101/104 Slave cycle reporting function;

5 Modify the collection period and reporting period range to 1-999999s;

6 Modify the total number of cloud services to be limited to 54;

7 Added northbound BACnet MS/TP Server protocol conversion function;

8. Add the ModbusTCP Slave Driver southward collection protocol;

9. Add the C and T address types of the S7 protocol;

Question Revision

1 Fix connection failure when standard MQTT has only username but no password;

2 Fix IEC61850 get MMS data type incorrect issue;

3 Fix Panasonic protocol address type error issue;

4 Fix the problem of unsuccessful connection of Eagle Energy Manager、iSCADA.

3.1.7

Newly Added Functions

1 A new specified number of acquisitions has been added to the protocol measurement points for the non-general call category;

2 The new Eagle Energy Manager platform adds a new setting for the type of data to be uploaded to the cloud;

3 When the stereotype Feature information is zxsz, the function of importing and exporting all measurement points of all controllers is added;

4 IEC104 protocol conversion using TCP Client mode adds sending access request messages;

5 AliCloud added connectivity to the new version of public instances and enterprise instances;

6 Northbound protocol conversion added SL651 protocol conversion;

7 Supports viewing and configuring the IEC104 protocol conversion mapping table at the measurement point monitor when the stereotype Feature information is zxsz;

8 SL651-2014 protocol conversion parameters optimised to support reporting of negative numbers;

9 IEC61850 has a new single-point acquisition function;

10 IEC61850 adds recall to read real-time data;

Question Revision

1 Fix OPCUA protocol conversion add mapping point error reporting invalid parameters;

2 Fix the standard MQTT import error for symmetric encryption parameters;

3 Fix the issue that the Quality flag of the response of the Electricity Master Call is invalid in the IEC104 protocol conversion;

4 Fix the file transfer function exception when there are multiple IEC61850 controllers at the same time;

5 Fix the problem that IEC61850 address selection error function code is still successful;

3.1.5

Newly Added Functions

1 New function of offline data retransmission policy;

2 Added a new Eagle Energy Manager Cloud Platform type;

Question Revision

1 Fix some known bugs

3.1.1

Newly Added Functions

1 Southbound support for HJ212-2017 protocol;

2 Southbound support for Modbu RTU Slave;

3 Southbound support for the CJT188-2004 protocol;

4 Southbound support for yizumi custom socket protocol;

5 New address types propriety_min and trend log have been added to the BACnet protocol;

6 The Mitsubishi protocol opens the "old and new message format" field;

7 Some read types of Fanuc CNC protocol measurement points support writable functions;

8 The Keyence protocol supports the batch acquisition function;

9 Southbound support for IEC 61850 file transfer functions;

10 Southbound supports the OPCUA Publishing Subscription feature;

11 Southbound support for the HJ212-2005 protocol;

13 The southbound DNP3 supports the Double bit Binary input data type;

14 The northbound Modbus protocol supports mapping multiple slave addresses;

15 Northbound added MQTT sparkplugB;

16 Northbound support for SNMP V1, V2C, and V3 protocols;

17 IEC 104 Server supports active connection to the IEC 104 Client as well as responding to electricity master calls;

18 Historical data is stored compressed, in order to save storage space;

19 Adaptation to the Siemens mindshpere platform;

20 Open offline data reporting frequency settings;

21 Optimise DSA performance: optimise the amount of memory space occupied by individual measurement points and controllers; optimise efficiency during driver initial configuration;

22 Supports the new recall API, which polls the measurement point once and returns the status immediately after the call;

23 Add qkfs api for reading and writing files (in multithreaded mode)

Question Revision

1 Fix some known bugs

3.0.1

Newly Added Functions

1 DSA adapts to EC series (EC942, EC954, EC312, EC903) products;

2 The cloud name is available in the publish and subscribe scripts, as well as the default scripts for updating publish and subscribe;

3 The EC942 and EC954 platforms support setting the serial port mode;

Question Revision

1 Fix the memory leakage problem of S7 protocol in EC312, EC954 platform;

2 Fix some known bugs

2.8.1

Newly Added Functions

1 New Northbound IEC61850 Server protocol conversion function;

2 New Northbound DNP3 Outstation protocol conversion function;

3 New southbound multi-polling collection function;

4 Added northbound BACnet IP Server protocol conversion function;

5 Added the function to set the string encoding of the controller;

6 Added docking to the new White Eagle Energy platform;

7 New "Power On Trigger" custom fast function;

Question Revision

1 Fix some known bugs

2.7.1

Newly Added Functions

1 New S7 protocol millisecond acquisition function;

2 New point reporting mode supports dead zone setting;

3 New web page to display endpoint information on controller cards;

4 Modify the default value of the "frame interval" parameter of the serial port protocol to 100ms;

5 New northbound SL651 protocol conversion function;

6 Support iSCADA overseas version;

7 New IEC101 northbound protocol conversion function, IG532 supports IEC101 national network encryption function;

8 Added support for historical data export function;

9 Added a new southbound collection template function;

10 New Modbus protocol BCD 32-bit data type;

11 Added southbound Euromap 63 acquisition protocol;

12 Added southbound DNP3.0 acquisition protocol;

13 Add a new controller enable parameter;

14 New controller "Description" parameter;

15 Added OPCUA array reading function;

16 Added southbound BACnet IP/MSTP capture protocol;

17 Added Southbound Robotics, CNC Acquisition Protocol;

18 Added southbound simple Ethernet/serial protocol support write function;

19 Added southbound OPCDA acquisition protocol;

20 Added northbound HJ212 protocol conversion function;

21 New southbound real-time communication message function;

Question Revision

1 Fix some known bugs

2.6.1

Newly Added Functions

1 New support for setting decimal places for values after data operations;

2 New fast function set interface;

3 Special symbols can be entered for new controller, measurement point, and alarm names;

4 New support for historical data storage;

5 A number of new southbound acquisition protocols have been added;

6 Added a new general-purpose Ethernet acquisition protocol;

7 A new function for mapping measurement point values has been added;

8 New BIT type data inverse operation;

9 New integrated fetch function;

10 New API interface for fast functions to access the history database;

Question Revision

1 Fix some known bugs

2.5.1

Newly Added Functions

1 Added support for multiple MQTT cloud platforms;

2 Add customised points and names for reporting to the cloud platform;

3 New southbound FINS TCP protocol, universal serial port acquisition protocol;

4 New OpcuaDriver double data type with TLS encryption support;

5 Added PT/CT data arithmetic;

6 Added a new southbound IEC103 acquisition protocol;

7 Added support for modifying controller name, measurement point name, measurement point read/write permissions, and data type;

8 Add "Connection Timeout" parameter for all new Ethernet protocols, "Communication Interval" parameter for all new serial protocols, and "Initialisation Activation" parameter for DLT;

9 Added support for not importing CA certificates when standard MQTT has TLS enabled;

10 New historical data storage location modification;

11 Newly added support for importing and exporting CSV configurations for cloud point configurations;

12 Added IG532 gateway support for selecting lora virtual serial port;

Question Revision

1 Fix some known bugs

2.4.1

Newly Added Functions

not have

Question Revision

1 Fix modbud-ascii batch capture failure problem;

2 Fix Opcua-driver encrypted connection failure issue;

3 Fix FATEK programming port protocol acquisition failure;

4 Fix IEC 104 balance mode capture failure issue;

5 Fix a deadlock issue with quickfunctions executing asynchronous scripts;

2.4.0

Newly Added Functions

1 New Southbound IEC101 protocol acquisition function;

2 Added southbound Panasonic Mewtocol protocol acquisition function;

3 Added the Southbound Mitsubishi 1E protocol acquisition function;

4 New southbound Modbus ASCII and Modbus RTU Over TCP protocol functions;

5 New Modbus controller can set write value function code;

6 New Modbus write-only function;

7 Added "State Timeout" for virtual controllers;

8 Added OPCUA Server authentication and encrypted access, write functionality and support for the Numeric identifier type;

9 Added White Eagle Energy Platform to support remote control function;

10 Added southbound IEC104 Driver acquisition function;

11 Added southbound IEC101/104 write function;

12 Added southbound DLT645-1997 protocol acquisition function;

13 The newly added function of collecting through the southbound FATEK Driver.

14 Added the function of reporting data periodically when the reporting mode is onchange;

15 Added S7,Modbus protocol double data type;

16 Added standard MQTT cloud service support for probate messages;

Question Revision

1 Fix some known bugs

2.3.1

Newly Added Functions

1 New opcua authentication method and continuous acquisition function;

2 New Modbus protocol INT64 and BCD data types;

3 New Modbus, Opcua protocol non-blocking mode acquisition;

4 Added support for the SUNPURE Management platform;

5 Added DLT645 southbound acquisition protocol;

6 Added White Eagle Energy Platform (IEC 104);

7 New Modbus, Opcua millisecond acquisition;

8 Added OPCUA file transfer function API;

9 New opcua protocol INT64 data type;

10 New EtherNet/IP (ControlLogix) protocol slot number setting;

11 Modbus TCP Slave and Modbus RTU Slave slave addresses support 1-255 settings;

Question Revision

1 Fix some known bugs

2.2.1

Newly Added Functions

1 Added ASCII 8-bit and 16-bit communication formats for Mitsubishi 3E, 3C, and 3C over TCP protocols;

2 New Virtual Controller function;

3 New custom quickfunction function;

4 Added OMRON FINS UDP and HOSTLINK protocols;

5 Added Siemens PPI protocol;

6 New Ethernet/IP PCCC protocol communication method;

7 New Alert Label function;

Question Revision

1 Fix some known bugs

2.1.1

Newly Added Functions

1 Added Mitsubishi's 3E and 3C over TCP controller protocols;

2 New OPCUA Server protocol conversion function;

3 Added Azure IoT X509 certificate authentication method;

4 New subscription quickfunction can select plaintext, jason, base64, hex Payload type;

5 Adaptation of the IG974 gateway;

Question Revision

1 Fix some known bugs

2.0.1

Newly Added Functions

1 New Modbus TCP Slave, IEC 104 Server protocol conversion function;

2 New iSCADA cloud service type;

3 Add the function of publishing subscription quickfunction;

4 Added Mitsubishi's 3C and programming port protocol functions;

Question Revision

None



    • Related Articles

    • IG Series User's Manual_V1.0

      Edge Computing Gateway IG Series user manual (Applicable to IG500, IG900 series products) Version V1.0, June 2024 www.inhand.com The software described in this manual is according to the license agreement, can only be used in accordance with the ...
    • IG Series User's Manual_V1.0

      InGateway Series User's manual (Applicable to IG500, IG900 series products) Version V1.0, June 2024 www.inhand.com The software described in this manual is according to the license agreement, can only be used in accordance with the terms of the ...
    • InGateway902 User Manual

      1. Product Introduction 1.1 Overview The InGateway902 (IG902 for short) series is a new-generation series of 4G edge computing gateways developed by InHand Networks for the Industrial IoT sector. It provides omnipresent, uninterrupted Internet access ...
    • EC5000 User Manual_V2.0

      EC5000 Series AI Edge Computer User Manual Version 2.0, September 2024 www.inhand.com The software described in this manual is according to the license agreement, can only be used in accordance with the terms of the agreement. Copyright Notice © 2024 ...
    • EC3000 User Manual_V1.0

      EC3000 Series AI Edge Computer User Manual Version 1.0, September 2024 www.inhand.com The software described in this manual is according to the license agreement, can only be used in accordance with the terms of the agreement. Copyright Notice © 2024 ...